US20220218381A1 - Feedback algorithms for manual bailout systems for surgical instruments - Google Patents
Feedback algorithms for manual bailout systems for surgical instruments Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20220218381A1 US20220218381A1 US17/710,288 US202217710288A US2022218381A1 US 20220218381 A1 US20220218381 A1 US 20220218381A1 US 202217710288 A US202217710288 A US 202217710288A US 2022218381 A1 US2022218381 A1 US 2022218381A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- bailout
- assembly
- surgical instrument
- processor
- power
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
- 239000012636 effector Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 132
- 230000015654 memory Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 94
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 38
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 27
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 14
- 238000010304 firing Methods 0.000 description 152
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 71
- 210000001519 tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 57
- 238000005520 cutting process Methods 0.000 description 51
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 47
- 230000001954 sterilising effect Effects 0.000 description 40
- 238000004659 sterilization and disinfection Methods 0.000 description 40
- 230000000712 assembly Effects 0.000 description 37
- 238000000429 assembly Methods 0.000 description 37
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 33
- 230000005355 Hall effect Effects 0.000 description 25
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 21
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 20
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 20
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 16
- 239000012530 fluid Substances 0.000 description 15
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 13
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 13
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 13
- 238000006073 displacement reaction Methods 0.000 description 12
- 230000037361 pathway Effects 0.000 description 12
- 239000003990 capacitor Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000004020 conductor Substances 0.000 description 10
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 9
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 9
- 238000001356 surgical procedure Methods 0.000 description 9
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 8
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000006835 compression Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000007906 compression Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 7
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 7
- 238000004140 cleaning Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000013011 mating Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000001133 acceleration Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000003638 chemical reducing agent Substances 0.000 description 5
- PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N gold Chemical compound [Au] PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 229910052737 gold Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 239000010931 gold Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000001953 sensory effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Copper Chemical group [Cu] RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 238000010276 construction Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000002439 hemostatic effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 229910001416 lithium ion Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000005855 radiation Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000012414 sterilization procedure Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- HBBGRARXTFLTSG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lithium ion Chemical compound [Li+] HBBGRARXTFLTSG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000005669 field effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000007747 plating Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000000853 adhesive Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000001070 adhesive effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000007797 corrosion Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000005260 corrosion Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000009849 deactivation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000003814 drug Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229940079593 drug Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000002651 drug therapy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000001415 gene therapy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000036244 malformation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000005055 memory storage Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000717 retained effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007789 sealing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000013519 translation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000001960 triggered effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000002604 ultrasonography Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000012795 verification Methods 0.000 description 2
- 241000894006 Bacteria Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000238366 Cephalopoda Species 0.000 description 1
- IAYPIBMASNFSPL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethylene oxide Chemical compound C1CO1 IAYPIBMASNFSPL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 235000014676 Phragmites communis Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000004775 Tyvek Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000690 Tyvek Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000006978 adaptation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003491 array Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005452 bending Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000000988 bone and bone Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002131 composite material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006731 degradation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000994 depressogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007613 environmental effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002360 explosive Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000835 fiber Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003779 heat-resistant material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007654 immersion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009434 installation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012830 laparoscopic surgical procedure Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007257 malfunction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012978 minimally invasive surgical procedure Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003607 modifier Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012811 non-conductive material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000002355 open surgical procedure Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002085 persistent effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003825 pressing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004353 relayed correlation spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000004872 soft tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000153 supplemental effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002123 temporal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004804 winding Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003245 working effect Effects 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/068—Surgical staplers, e.g. containing multiple staples or clamps
- A61B17/072—Surgical staplers, e.g. containing multiple staples or clamps for applying a row of staples in a single action, e.g. the staples being applied simultaneously
- A61B17/07207—Surgical staplers, e.g. containing multiple staples or clamps for applying a row of staples in a single action, e.g. the staples being applied simultaneously the staples being applied sequentially
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/32—Surgical cutting instruments
- A61B17/320016—Endoscopic cutting instruments, e.g. arthroscopes, resectoscopes
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B90/00—Instruments, implements or accessories specially adapted for surgery or diagnosis and not covered by any of the groups A61B1/00 - A61B50/00, e.g. for luxation treatment or for protecting wound edges
- A61B90/90—Identification means for patients or instruments, e.g. tags
- A61B90/98—Identification means for patients or instruments, e.g. tags using electromagnetic means, e.g. transponders
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61L—METHODS OR APPARATUS FOR STERILISING MATERIALS OR OBJECTS IN GENERAL; DISINFECTION, STERILISATION OR DEODORISATION OF AIR; CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES; MATERIALS FOR BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES
- A61L2/00—Methods or apparatus for disinfecting or sterilising materials or objects other than foodstuffs or contact lenses; Accessories therefor
- A61L2/02—Methods or apparatus for disinfecting or sterilising materials or objects other than foodstuffs or contact lenses; Accessories therefor using physical phenomena
- A61L2/04—Heat
- A61L2/06—Hot gas
- A61L2/07—Steam
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61L—METHODS OR APPARATUS FOR STERILISING MATERIALS OR OBJECTS IN GENERAL; DISINFECTION, STERILISATION OR DEODORISATION OF AIR; CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES; MATERIALS FOR BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES
- A61L2/00—Methods or apparatus for disinfecting or sterilising materials or objects other than foodstuffs or contact lenses; Accessories therefor
- A61L2/02—Methods or apparatus for disinfecting or sterilising materials or objects other than foodstuffs or contact lenses; Accessories therefor using physical phenomena
- A61L2/08—Radiation
- A61L2/081—Gamma radiation
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61L—METHODS OR APPARATUS FOR STERILISING MATERIALS OR OBJECTS IN GENERAL; DISINFECTION, STERILISATION OR DEODORISATION OF AIR; CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES; MATERIALS FOR BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES
- A61L2/00—Methods or apparatus for disinfecting or sterilising materials or objects other than foodstuffs or contact lenses; Accessories therefor
- A61L2/02—Methods or apparatus for disinfecting or sterilising materials or objects other than foodstuffs or contact lenses; Accessories therefor using physical phenomena
- A61L2/08—Radiation
- A61L2/082—X-rays
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61L—METHODS OR APPARATUS FOR STERILISING MATERIALS OR OBJECTS IN GENERAL; DISINFECTION, STERILISATION OR DEODORISATION OF AIR; CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES; MATERIALS FOR BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES
- A61L2/00—Methods or apparatus for disinfecting or sterilising materials or objects other than foodstuffs or contact lenses; Accessories therefor
- A61L2/02—Methods or apparatus for disinfecting or sterilising materials or objects other than foodstuffs or contact lenses; Accessories therefor using physical phenomena
- A61L2/08—Radiation
- A61L2/087—Particle radiation, e.g. electron-beam, alpha or beta radiation
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61L—METHODS OR APPARATUS FOR STERILISING MATERIALS OR OBJECTS IN GENERAL; DISINFECTION, STERILISATION OR DEODORISATION OF AIR; CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES; MATERIALS FOR BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES
- A61L2/00—Methods or apparatus for disinfecting or sterilising materials or objects other than foodstuffs or contact lenses; Accessories therefor
- A61L2/16—Methods or apparatus for disinfecting or sterilising materials or objects other than foodstuffs or contact lenses; Accessories therefor using chemical substances
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61L—METHODS OR APPARATUS FOR STERILISING MATERIALS OR OBJECTS IN GENERAL; DISINFECTION, STERILISATION OR DEODORISATION OF AIR; CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES; MATERIALS FOR BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES
- A61L2/00—Methods or apparatus for disinfecting or sterilising materials or objects other than foodstuffs or contact lenses; Accessories therefor
- A61L2/16—Methods or apparatus for disinfecting or sterilising materials or objects other than foodstuffs or contact lenses; Accessories therefor using chemical substances
- A61L2/20—Gaseous substances, e.g. vapours
- A61L2/206—Ethylene oxide
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61L—METHODS OR APPARATUS FOR STERILISING MATERIALS OR OBJECTS IN GENERAL; DISINFECTION, STERILISATION OR DEODORISATION OF AIR; CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES; MATERIALS FOR BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES
- A61L2/00—Methods or apparatus for disinfecting or sterilising materials or objects other than foodstuffs or contact lenses; Accessories therefor
- A61L2/26—Accessories or devices or components used for biocidal treatment
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B25—HAND TOOLS; PORTABLE POWER-DRIVEN TOOLS; MANIPULATORS
- B25F—COMBINATION OR MULTI-PURPOSE TOOLS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; DETAILS OR COMPONENTS OF PORTABLE POWER-DRIVEN TOOLS NOT PARTICULARLY RELATED TO THE OPERATIONS PERFORMED AND NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- B25F3/00—Associations of tools for different working operations with one portable power-drive means; Adapters therefor
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B25—HAND TOOLS; PORTABLE POWER-DRIVEN TOOLS; MANIPULATORS
- B25F—COMBINATION OR MULTI-PURPOSE TOOLS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; DETAILS OR COMPONENTS OF PORTABLE POWER-DRIVEN TOOLS NOT PARTICULARLY RELATED TO THE OPERATIONS PERFORMED AND NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- B25F5/00—Details or components of portable power-driven tools not particularly related to the operations performed and not otherwise provided for
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01M—PROCESSES OR MEANS, e.g. BATTERIES, FOR THE DIRECT CONVERSION OF CHEMICAL ENERGY INTO ELECTRICAL ENERGY
- H01M10/00—Secondary cells; Manufacture thereof
- H01M10/42—Methods or arrangements for servicing or maintenance of secondary cells or secondary half-cells
- H01M10/425—Structural combination with electronic components, e.g. electronic circuits integrated to the outside of the casing
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01M—PROCESSES OR MEANS, e.g. BATTERIES, FOR THE DIRECT CONVERSION OF CHEMICAL ENERGY INTO ELECTRICAL ENERGY
- H01M10/00—Secondary cells; Manufacture thereof
- H01M10/42—Methods or arrangements for servicing or maintenance of secondary cells or secondary half-cells
- H01M10/44—Methods for charging or discharging
- H01M10/443—Methods for charging or discharging in response to temperature
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01R—ELECTRICALLY-CONDUCTIVE CONNECTIONS; STRUCTURAL ASSOCIATIONS OF A PLURALITY OF MUTUALLY-INSULATED ELECTRICAL CONNECTING ELEMENTS; COUPLING DEVICES; CURRENT COLLECTORS
- H01R35/00—Flexible or turnable line connectors, i.e. the rotation angle being limited
- H01R35/02—Flexible line connectors without frictional contact members
- H01R35/025—Flexible line connectors without frictional contact members having a flexible conductor wound around a rotation axis
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01R—ELECTRICALLY-CONDUCTIVE CONNECTIONS; STRUCTURAL ASSOCIATIONS OF A PLURALITY OF MUTUALLY-INSULATED ELECTRICAL CONNECTING ELEMENTS; COUPLING DEVICES; CURRENT COLLECTORS
- H01R39/00—Rotary current collectors, distributors or interrupters
- H01R39/02—Details for dynamo electric machines
- H01R39/08—Slip-rings
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01R—ELECTRICALLY-CONDUCTIVE CONNECTIONS; STRUCTURAL ASSOCIATIONS OF A PLURALITY OF MUTUALLY-INSULATED ELECTRICAL CONNECTING ELEMENTS; COUPLING DEVICES; CURRENT COLLECTORS
- H01R39/00—Rotary current collectors, distributors or interrupters
- H01R39/02—Details for dynamo electric machines
- H01R39/08—Slip-rings
- H01R39/10—Slip-rings other than with external cylindrical contact surface, e.g. flat slip-rings
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H02—GENERATION; CONVERSION OR DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER
- H02J—CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS OR SYSTEMS FOR SUPPLYING OR DISTRIBUTING ELECTRIC POWER; SYSTEMS FOR STORING ELECTRIC ENERGY
- H02J5/00—Circuit arrangements for transfer of electric power between ac networks and dc networks
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/068—Surgical staplers, e.g. containing multiple staples or clamps
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/068—Surgical staplers, e.g. containing multiple staples or clamps
- A61B17/0682—Surgical staplers, e.g. containing multiple staples or clamps for applying U-shaped staples or clamps, e.g. without a forming anvil
- A61B17/0686—Surgical staplers, e.g. containing multiple staples or clamps for applying U-shaped staples or clamps, e.g. without a forming anvil having a forming anvil staying below the tissue during stapling
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B18/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods for transferring non-mechanical forms of energy to or from the body
- A61B18/04—Surgical instruments, devices or methods for transferring non-mechanical forms of energy to or from the body by heating
- A61B18/12—Surgical instruments, devices or methods for transferring non-mechanical forms of energy to or from the body by heating by passing a current through the tissue to be heated, e.g. high-frequency current
- A61B18/14—Probes or electrodes therefor
- A61B18/1442—Probes having pivoting end effectors, e.g. forceps
- A61B18/1445—Probes having pivoting end effectors, e.g. forceps at the distal end of a shaft, e.g. forceps or scissors at the end of a rigid rod
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B2017/00017—Electrical control of surgical instruments
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B2017/00017—Electrical control of surgical instruments
- A61B2017/00022—Sensing or detecting at the treatment site
- A61B2017/00039—Electric or electromagnetic phenomena other than conductivity, e.g. capacity, inductivity, Hall effect
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B2017/00017—Electrical control of surgical instruments
- A61B2017/00022—Sensing or detecting at the treatment site
- A61B2017/00084—Temperature
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B2017/00017—Electrical control of surgical instruments
- A61B2017/00115—Electrical control of surgical instruments with audible or visual output
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B2017/00017—Electrical control of surgical instruments
- A61B2017/00115—Electrical control of surgical instruments with audible or visual output
- A61B2017/00119—Electrical control of surgical instruments with audible or visual output alarm; indicating an abnormal situation
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B2017/00017—Electrical control of surgical instruments
- A61B2017/00115—Electrical control of surgical instruments with audible or visual output
- A61B2017/00119—Electrical control of surgical instruments with audible or visual output alarm; indicating an abnormal situation
- A61B2017/00123—Electrical control of surgical instruments with audible or visual output alarm; indicating an abnormal situation and automatic shutdown
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B2017/00017—Electrical control of surgical instruments
- A61B2017/00137—Details of operation mode
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B2017/00017—Electrical control of surgical instruments
- A61B2017/00199—Electrical control of surgical instruments with a console, e.g. a control panel with a display
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B2017/00017—Electrical control of surgical instruments
- A61B2017/00212—Electrical control of surgical instruments using remote controls
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B2017/00017—Electrical control of surgical instruments
- A61B2017/00221—Electrical control of surgical instruments with wireless transmission of data, e.g. by infrared radiation or radiowaves
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B2017/00017—Electrical control of surgical instruments
- A61B2017/00225—Systems for controlling multiple different instruments, e.g. microsurgical systems
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B2017/00367—Details of actuation of instruments, e.g. relations between pushing buttons, or the like, and activation of the tool, working tip, or the like
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B2017/00367—Details of actuation of instruments, e.g. relations between pushing buttons, or the like, and activation of the tool, working tip, or the like
- A61B2017/00398—Details of actuation of instruments, e.g. relations between pushing buttons, or the like, and activation of the tool, working tip, or the like using powered actuators, e.g. stepper motors, solenoids
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B2017/00367—Details of actuation of instruments, e.g. relations between pushing buttons, or the like, and activation of the tool, working tip, or the like
- A61B2017/00407—Ratchet means
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B2017/0046—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets with a releasable handle; with handle and operating part separable
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B2017/0046—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets with a releasable handle; with handle and operating part separable
- A61B2017/00464—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets with a releasable handle; with handle and operating part separable for use with different instruments
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B2017/00477—Coupling
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B2017/00681—Aspects not otherwise provided for
- A61B2017/00725—Calibration or performance testing
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B2017/00681—Aspects not otherwise provided for
- A61B2017/00734—Aspects not otherwise provided for battery operated
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/068—Surgical staplers, e.g. containing multiple staples or clamps
- A61B17/072—Surgical staplers, e.g. containing multiple staples or clamps for applying a row of staples in a single action, e.g. the staples being applied simultaneously
- A61B2017/07214—Stapler heads
- A61B2017/07271—Stapler heads characterised by its cartridge
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/068—Surgical staplers, e.g. containing multiple staples or clamps
- A61B17/072—Surgical staplers, e.g. containing multiple staples or clamps for applying a row of staples in a single action, e.g. the staples being applied simultaneously
- A61B2017/07214—Stapler heads
- A61B2017/07278—Stapler heads characterised by its sled or its staple holder
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/068—Surgical staplers, e.g. containing multiple staples or clamps
- A61B17/072—Surgical staplers, e.g. containing multiple staples or clamps for applying a row of staples in a single action, e.g. the staples being applied simultaneously
- A61B2017/07214—Stapler heads
- A61B2017/07285—Stapler heads characterised by its cutter
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/28—Surgical forceps
- A61B17/29—Forceps for use in minimally invasive surgery
- A61B2017/2926—Details of heads or jaws
- A61B2017/2927—Details of heads or jaws the angular position of the head being adjustable with respect to the shaft
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B17/00—Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
- A61B17/28—Surgical forceps
- A61B17/29—Forceps for use in minimally invasive surgery
- A61B2017/2926—Details of heads or jaws
- A61B2017/2927—Details of heads or jaws the angular position of the head being adjustable with respect to the shaft
- A61B2017/2929—Details of heads or jaws the angular position of the head being adjustable with respect to the shaft with a head rotatable about the longitudinal axis of the shaft
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B34/00—Computer-aided surgery; Manipulators or robots specially adapted for use in surgery
- A61B34/30—Surgical robots
- A61B2034/302—Surgical robots specifically adapted for manipulations within body cavities, e.g. within abdominal or thoracic cavities
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B90/00—Instruments, implements or accessories specially adapted for surgery or diagnosis and not covered by any of the groups A61B1/00 - A61B50/00, e.g. for luxation treatment or for protecting wound edges
- A61B90/06—Measuring instruments not otherwise provided for
- A61B2090/064—Measuring instruments not otherwise provided for for measuring force, pressure or mechanical tension
- A61B2090/065—Measuring instruments not otherwise provided for for measuring force, pressure or mechanical tension for measuring contact or contact pressure
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B90/00—Instruments, implements or accessories specially adapted for surgery or diagnosis and not covered by any of the groups A61B1/00 - A61B50/00, e.g. for luxation treatment or for protecting wound edges
- A61B90/08—Accessories or related features not otherwise provided for
- A61B2090/0803—Counting the number of times an instrument is used
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B90/00—Instruments, implements or accessories specially adapted for surgery or diagnosis and not covered by any of the groups A61B1/00 - A61B50/00, e.g. for luxation treatment or for protecting wound edges
- A61B90/08—Accessories or related features not otherwise provided for
- A61B2090/0807—Indication means
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B90/00—Instruments, implements or accessories specially adapted for surgery or diagnosis and not covered by any of the groups A61B1/00 - A61B50/00, e.g. for luxation treatment or for protecting wound edges
- A61B90/08—Accessories or related features not otherwise provided for
- A61B2090/0807—Indication means
- A61B2090/0808—Indication means for indicating correct assembly of components, e.g. of the surgical apparatus
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B90/00—Instruments, implements or accessories specially adapted for surgery or diagnosis and not covered by any of the groups A61B1/00 - A61B50/00, e.g. for luxation treatment or for protecting wound edges
- A61B90/08—Accessories or related features not otherwise provided for
- A61B2090/0807—Indication means
- A61B2090/081—Indication means for contamination or dirt
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B90/00—Instruments, implements or accessories specially adapted for surgery or diagnosis and not covered by any of the groups A61B1/00 - A61B50/00, e.g. for luxation treatment or for protecting wound edges
- A61B90/08—Accessories or related features not otherwise provided for
- A61B2090/0807—Indication means
- A61B2090/0811—Indication means for the position of a particular part of an instrument with respect to the rest of the instrument, e.g. position of the anvil of a stapling instrument
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B90/00—Instruments, implements or accessories specially adapted for surgery or diagnosis and not covered by any of the groups A61B1/00 - A61B50/00, e.g. for luxation treatment or for protecting wound edges
- A61B90/08—Accessories or related features not otherwise provided for
- A61B2090/0813—Accessories designed for easy sterilising, i.e. re-usable
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B90/00—Instruments, implements or accessories specially adapted for surgery or diagnosis and not covered by any of the groups A61B1/00 - A61B50/00, e.g. for luxation treatment or for protecting wound edges
- A61B90/08—Accessories or related features not otherwise provided for
- A61B2090/0814—Preventing re-use
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B34/00—Computer-aided surgery; Manipulators or robots specially adapted for use in surgery
- A61B34/70—Manipulators specially adapted for use in surgery
- A61B34/76—Manipulators having means for providing feel, e.g. force or tactile feedback
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B90/00—Instruments, implements or accessories specially adapted for surgery or diagnosis and not covered by any of the groups A61B1/00 - A61B50/00, e.g. for luxation treatment or for protecting wound edges
- A61B90/06—Measuring instruments not otherwise provided for
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B90/00—Instruments, implements or accessories specially adapted for surgery or diagnosis and not covered by any of the groups A61B1/00 - A61B50/00, e.g. for luxation treatment or for protecting wound edges
- A61B90/90—Identification means for patients or instruments, e.g. tags
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61L—METHODS OR APPARATUS FOR STERILISING MATERIALS OR OBJECTS IN GENERAL; DISINFECTION, STERILISATION OR DEODORISATION OF AIR; CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES; MATERIALS FOR BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES
- A61L2202/00—Aspects relating to methods or apparatus for disinfecting or sterilising materials or objects
- A61L2202/10—Apparatus features
- A61L2202/14—Means for controlling sterilisation processes, data processing, presentation and storage means, e.g. sensors, controllers, programs
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61L—METHODS OR APPARATUS FOR STERILISING MATERIALS OR OBJECTS IN GENERAL; DISINFECTION, STERILISATION OR DEODORISATION OF AIR; CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES; MATERIALS FOR BANDAGES, DRESSINGS, ABSORBENT PADS OR SURGICAL ARTICLES
- A61L2202/00—Aspects relating to methods or apparatus for disinfecting or sterilising materials or objects
- A61L2202/20—Targets to be treated
- A61L2202/24—Medical instruments, e.g. endoscopes, catheters, sharps
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01M—PROCESSES OR MEANS, e.g. BATTERIES, FOR THE DIRECT CONVERSION OF CHEMICAL ENERGY INTO ELECTRICAL ENERGY
- H01M10/00—Secondary cells; Manufacture thereof
- H01M10/42—Methods or arrangements for servicing or maintenance of secondary cells or secondary half-cells
- H01M10/48—Accumulators combined with arrangements for measuring, testing or indicating the condition of cells, e.g. the level or density of the electrolyte
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01M—PROCESSES OR MEANS, e.g. BATTERIES, FOR THE DIRECT CONVERSION OF CHEMICAL ENERGY INTO ELECTRICAL ENERGY
- H01M10/00—Secondary cells; Manufacture thereof
- H01M10/42—Methods or arrangements for servicing or maintenance of secondary cells or secondary half-cells
- H01M10/425—Structural combination with electronic components, e.g. electronic circuits integrated to the outside of the casing
- H01M2010/4278—Systems for data transfer from batteries, e.g. transfer of battery parameters to a controller, data transferred between battery controller and main controller
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01M—PROCESSES OR MEANS, e.g. BATTERIES, FOR THE DIRECT CONVERSION OF CHEMICAL ENERGY INTO ELECTRICAL ENERGY
- H01M2220/00—Batteries for particular applications
- H01M2220/30—Batteries in portable systems, e.g. mobile phone, laptop
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01M—PROCESSES OR MEANS, e.g. BATTERIES, FOR THE DIRECT CONVERSION OF CHEMICAL ENERGY INTO ELECTRICAL ENERGY
- H01M50/00—Constructional details or processes of manufacture of the non-active parts of electrochemical cells other than fuel cells, e.g. hybrid cells
- H01M50/20—Mountings; Secondary casings or frames; Racks, modules or packs; Suspension devices; Shock absorbers; Transport or carrying devices; Holders
- H01M50/204—Racks, modules or packs for multiple batteries or multiple cells
- H01M50/207—Racks, modules or packs for multiple batteries or multiple cells characterised by their shape
- H01M50/213—Racks, modules or packs for multiple batteries or multiple cells characterised by their shape adapted for cells having curved cross-section, e.g. round or elliptic
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01R—ELECTRICALLY-CONDUCTIVE CONNECTIONS; STRUCTURAL ASSOCIATIONS OF A PLURALITY OF MUTUALLY-INSULATED ELECTRICAL CONNECTING ELEMENTS; COUPLING DEVICES; CURRENT COLLECTORS
- H01R2201/00—Connectors or connections adapted for particular applications
- H01R2201/12—Connectors or connections adapted for particular applications for medicine and surgery
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01R—ELECTRICALLY-CONDUCTIVE CONNECTIONS; STRUCTURAL ASSOCIATIONS OF A PLURALITY OF MUTUALLY-INSULATED ELECTRICAL CONNECTING ELEMENTS; COUPLING DEVICES; CURRENT COLLECTORS
- H01R39/00—Rotary current collectors, distributors or interrupters
- H01R39/64—Devices for uninterrupted current collection
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H02—GENERATION; CONVERSION OR DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER
- H02J—CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS OR SYSTEMS FOR SUPPLYING OR DISTRIBUTING ELECTRIC POWER; SYSTEMS FOR STORING ELECTRIC ENERGY
- H02J2310/00—The network for supplying or distributing electric power characterised by its spatial reach or by the load
- H02J2310/10—The network having a local or delimited stationary reach
- H02J2310/20—The network being internal to a load
- H02J2310/23—The load being a medical device, a medical implant, or a life supporting device
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H02—GENERATION; CONVERSION OR DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER
- H02J—CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS OR SYSTEMS FOR SUPPLYING OR DISTRIBUTING ELECTRIC POWER; SYSTEMS FOR STORING ELECTRIC ENERGY
- H02J7/00—Circuit arrangements for charging or depolarising batteries or for supplying loads from batteries
- H02J7/0047—Circuit arrangements for charging or depolarising batteries or for supplying loads from batteries with monitoring or indicating devices or circuits
- H02J7/0048—Detection of remaining charge capacity or state of charge [SOC]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H02—GENERATION; CONVERSION OR DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER
- H02J—CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS OR SYSTEMS FOR SUPPLYING OR DISTRIBUTING ELECTRIC POWER; SYSTEMS FOR STORING ELECTRIC ENERGY
- H02J7/00—Circuit arrangements for charging or depolarising batteries or for supplying loads from batteries
- H02J7/007—Regulation of charging or discharging current or voltage
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H02—GENERATION; CONVERSION OR DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER
- H02J—CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS OR SYSTEMS FOR SUPPLYING OR DISTRIBUTING ELECTRIC POWER; SYSTEMS FOR STORING ELECTRIC ENERGY
- H02J7/00—Circuit arrangements for charging or depolarising batteries or for supplying loads from batteries
- H02J7/007—Regulation of charging or discharging current or voltage
- H02J7/007188—Regulation of charging or discharging current or voltage the charge cycle being controlled or terminated in response to non-electric parameters
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H02—GENERATION; CONVERSION OR DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER
- H02J—CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS OR SYSTEMS FOR SUPPLYING OR DISTRIBUTING ELECTRIC POWER; SYSTEMS FOR STORING ELECTRIC ENERGY
- H02J7/00—Circuit arrangements for charging or depolarising batteries or for supplying loads from batteries
- H02J7/007—Regulation of charging or discharging current or voltage
- H02J7/007188—Regulation of charging or discharging current or voltage the charge cycle being controlled or terminated in response to non-electric parameters
- H02J7/007192—Regulation of charging or discharging current or voltage the charge cycle being controlled or terminated in response to non-electric parameters in response to temperature
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H02—GENERATION; CONVERSION OR DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER
- H02J—CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS OR SYSTEMS FOR SUPPLYING OR DISTRIBUTING ELECTRIC POWER; SYSTEMS FOR STORING ELECTRIC ENERGY
- H02J7/00—Circuit arrangements for charging or depolarising batteries or for supplying loads from batteries
- H02J7/02—Circuit arrangements for charging or depolarising batteries or for supplying loads from batteries for charging batteries from ac mains by converters
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
- Y02E—REDUCTION OF GREENHOUSE GAS [GHG] EMISSIONS, RELATED TO ENERGY GENERATION, TRANSMISSION OR DISTRIBUTION
- Y02E60/00—Enabling technologies; Technologies with a potential or indirect contribution to GHG emissions mitigation
- Y02E60/10—Energy storage using batteries
Definitions
- the present invention relates to surgical instruments and, in various circumstances, to surgical stapling and cutting instruments and staple cartridges therefor that are designed to staple and cut tissue.
- FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a surgical instrument that has an interchangeable shaft assembly operably coupled thereto;
- FIG. 2 is an exploded assembly view of the interchangeable shaft assembly and surgical instrument of FIG. 1 ;
- FIG. 3 is another exploded assembly view showing portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly and surgical instrument of FIGS. 1 and 2 ;
- FIG. 4 is an exploded assembly view of a portion of the surgical instrument of FIGS. 1-3 ;
- FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional side view of a portion of the surgical instrument of FIG. 4 with the firing trigger in a fully actuated position;
- FIG. 6 is another cross-sectional view of a portion of the surgical instrument of FIG. 5 with the firing trigger in an unactuated position;
- FIG. 7 is an exploded assembly view of one form of an interchangeable shaft assembly
- FIG. 8 is another exploded assembly view of portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly of FIG. 7 ;
- FIG. 9 is another exploded assembly view of portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly of FIGS. 7 and 8 ;
- FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of a portion of the interchangeable shaft assembly of FIGS. 7-9 ;
- FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a portion of the shaft assembly of FIGS. 7-10 with the switch drum omitted for clarity;
- FIG. 12 is another perspective view of the portion of the interchangeable shaft assembly of FIG. 11 with the switch drum mounted thereon;
- FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a portion of the interchangeable shaft assembly of FIG. 11 operably coupled to a portion of the surgical instrument of FIG. 1 illustrated with the closure trigger thereof in an unactuated position;
- FIG. 14 is a right side elevational view of the interchangeable shaft assembly and surgical instrument of FIG. 13 ;
- FIG. 15 is a left side elevational view of the interchangeable shaft assembly and surgical instrument of FIGS. 13 and 14 ;
- FIG. 16 is a perspective view of a portion of the interchangeable shaft assembly of FIG. 11 operably coupled to a portion of the surgical instrument of FIG. 1 illustrated with the closure trigger thereof in an actuated position and a firing trigger thereof in an unactuated position;
- FIG. 17 is a right side elevational view of the interchangeable shaft assembly and surgical instrument of FIG. 16 ;
- FIG. 18 is a left side elevational view of the interchangeable shaft assembly and surgical instrument of FIGS. 16 and 17 ;
- FIG. 18A is a right side elevational view of the interchangeable shaft assembly of FIG. 11 operably coupled to a portion of the surgical instrument of FIG. 1 illustrated with the closure trigger thereof in an actuated position and the firing trigger thereof in an actuated position;
- FIG. 19 is a perspective view of a portion of an interchangeable shaft assembly showing an electrical coupler arrangement
- FIG. 20 is an exploded assembly view of portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly and electrical coupler of FIG. 19 ;
- FIG. 21 is a perspective view of circuit trace assembly
- FIG. 22 is a plan view of a portion of the circuit trace assembly of FIG. 21 ;
- FIG. 23 is a perspective view of a portion of another interchangeable shaft assembly showing another electrical coupler arrangement
- FIG. 24 is an exploded assembly view of portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly and electrical coupler of FIG. 23 ;
- FIG. 25 is an exploded slip ring assembly of the electrical coupler of FIGS. 23 and 24 ;
- FIG. 26 is a perspective view of a portion of another interchangeable shaft assembly showing another electrical coupler arrangement
- FIG. 27 is an exploded assembly view of portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly and electrical coupler of FIG. 26 ;
- FIG. 28 is a front perspective view of a portion of the slip ring assembly of the electrical coupler of FIGS. 26 and 27 ;
- FIG. 29 is an exploded assembly view of the slip ring assembly portion of FIG. 28 ;
- FIG. 30 is a rear perspective view of the portion of slip ring assembly of FIGS. 28 and 29 .
- FIG. 31 is a perspective view of a surgical instrument comprising a power assembly, a handle assembly, and an interchangeable shaft assembly;
- FIG. 32 is perspective view of the surgical instrument of FIG. 31 with the interchangeable shaft assembly separated from the handle assembly;
- FIG. 33 which is divided into FIGS. 33A and 33B , is a circuit diagram of the surgical instrument of FIG. 31 ;
- FIG. 34 is a block diagram of interchangeable shaft assemblies for use with the surgical instrument of FIG. 31 ;
- FIG. 35 is a perspective view of the power assembly of the surgical instrument of FIG. 31 separated from the handle assembly;
- FIG. 36 is a block diagram the surgical instrument of FIG. 31 illustrating interfaces between the handle assembly and the power assembly and between the handle assembly and the interchangeable shaft assembly;
- FIG. 37 is a power management module of the surgical instrument of FIG. 31 ;
- FIG. 38 is a perspective view of a surgical instrument comprising a power assembly and an interchangeable working assembly assembled with the power assembly;
- FIG. 39 is a block diagram of the surgical instrument of FIG. 38 illustrating an interface between the interchangeable working assembly and the power assembly;
- FIG. 40 is a block diagram illustrating a module of the surgical instrument of FIG. 38 ;
- FIG. 41 is a perspective view of a surgical instrument comprising a power assembly and a interchangeable working assembly assembled with the power assembly;
- FIG. 42 is a circuit diagram of an exemplary power assembly of the surgical instrument of FIG. 41 ;
- FIG. 43 is a circuit diagram of an exemplary power assembly of the surgical instrument of FIG. 41 ;
- FIG. 44 is a circuit diagram of an exemplary interchangeable working assembly of the surgical instrument of FIG. 41 ;
- FIG. 45 is a circuit diagram of an exemplary interchangeable working assembly of the surgical instrument of FIG. 41 ;
- FIG. 46 is a block diagram depicting an exemplary module of the surgical instrument of FIG. 41 ;
- FIG. 47A is a graphical representation of an exemplary communication signal generated by a working assembly controller of the interchangeable working assembly of the surgical instrument of FIG. 41 as detected by a voltage monitoring mechanism;
- FIG. 47B is a graphical representation of an exemplary communication signal generated by a working assembly controller of the interchangeable working assembly of the surgical instrument of FIG. 41 as detected by a current monitoring mechanism;
- FIG. 47C is a graphical representation of effective motor displacement of a motor of the interchangeable working assembly of FIG. 41 in response to the communication signal generated by the working assembly controller of FIG. 47A .
- FIG. 48 is a perspective view of a surgical instrument comprising a handle assembly and a shaft assembly including an end effector;
- FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the handle assembly of the surgical instrument of FIG. 48 ;
- FIG. 50 is an exploded view of the handle assembly of the surgical instrument of FIG. 48 ;
- FIG. 51 is a schematic diagram of a bailout feedback system of the surgical instrument of FIG. 48 ;
- FIG. 52 is a block diagram of a module for use with the bailout feedback system of FIG. 51 ;
- FIG. 53 is a block diagram of a module for use with the bailout feedback system of FIG. 51 ;
- FIG. 54 illustrates one instance of a power assembly comprising a usage cycle circuit configured to generate a usage cycle count of the battery back;
- FIG. 55 illustrates one instance of a usage cycle circuit comprising a resistor-capacitor timer
- FIG. 56 illustrates one instance of a usage cycle circuit comprising a timer and a rechargeable battery
- FIG. 57 illustrates one instance of a combination sterilization and charging system configured to sterilize and charge a power assembly simultaneously;
- FIG. 58 illustrates one instance of a combination sterilization and charging system configured to sterilize and charge a power assembly having a battery charger formed integrally therein;
- FIG. 59 is a schematic of a system for powering down an electrical connector of a surgical instrument handle when a shaft assembly is not coupled thereto;
- FIG. 60 is a flowchart depicting a method for adjusting the velocity of a firing element according to various embodiments of the present disclosure
- FIG. 61 is a flowchart depicting a method for adjusting the velocity of a firing element according to various embodiments of the present disclosure
- FIG. 62 is a partial, perspective view of an end effector and a fastener cartridge according to various embodiments of the present disclosure
- FIG. 63 is partial, perspective view of an end effector and a fastener cartridge according to various embodiments of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 64 is a cross-sectional, elevation view of an end effector and a fastener cartridge according to various embodiments of the present disclosure
- FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional, elevation view of an end effector and a fastener cartridge according to various embodiments of the present disclosure
- FIG. 66 is a partial, perspective view of an end effector with portions removed and a fastener cartridge according to various embodiments of the present disclosure
- FIG. 67 is a partial, perspective view of an end effector with portions removed and a fastener cartridge according to various embodiments of the present disclosure
- FIG. 68A is a schematic depicting an integrated circuit according to various embodiments of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 68B is a schematic depicting a magnetoresistive circuit according to various embodiments of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 68C is a table listing various specifications of a magnetoresistive sensor according to various embodiments of the present disclosure.
- proximal and distal are used herein with reference to a clinician manipulating the handle portion of the surgical instrument.
- proximal referring to the portion closest to the clinician and the term “distal” referring to the portion located away from the clinician.
- distal referring to the portion located away from the clinician.
- spatial terms such as “vertical,” “horizontal,” “up,” and “down” may be used herein with respect to the drawings.
- surgical instruments are used in many orientations and positions, and these terms are not intended to be limiting and/or absolute.
- FIGS. 1-6 depict a motor-driven surgical cutting and fastening instrument 10 that may or may not be reused.
- the instrument 10 includes a housing 12 that comprises a handle 14 that is configured to be grasped, manipulated and actuated by the clinician.
- the housing 12 is configured for operable attachment to an interchangeable shaft assembly 200 that has a surgical end effector 300 operably coupled thereto that is configured to perform one or more surgical tasks or procedures.
- an interchangeable shaft assembly 200 that has a surgical end effector 300 operably coupled thereto that is configured to perform one or more surgical tasks or procedures.
- housing may also encompass a housing or similar portion of a robotic system that houses or otherwise operably supports at least one drive system that is configured to generate and apply at least one control motion which could be used to actuate the interchangeable shaft assemblies disclosed herein and their respective equivalents.
- frame may refer to a portion of a handheld surgical instrument.
- frame may also represent a portion of a robotically controlled surgical instrument and/or a portion of the robotic system that may be used to operably control a surgical instrument.
- the interchangeable shaft assemblies disclosed herein may be employed with various robotic systems, instruments, components and methods disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No.
- the housing 12 depicted in FIGS. 1-3 is shown in connection with an interchangeable shaft assembly 200 that includes an end effector 300 that comprises a surgical cutting and fastening device that is configured to operably support a surgical staple cartridge 304 therein.
- the housing 12 may be configured for use in connection with interchangeable shaft assemblies that include end effectors that are adapted to support different sizes and types of staple cartridges, have different shaft lengths, sizes, and types, etc.
- the housing 12 may also be effectively employed with a variety of other interchangeable shaft assemblies including those assemblies that are configured to apply other motions and forms of energy such as, for example, radio frequency (RF) energy, ultrasonic energy and/or motion to end effector arrangements adapted for use in connection with various surgical applications and procedures.
- RF radio frequency
- end effectors, shaft assemblies, handles, surgical instruments, and/or surgical instrument systems can utilize any suitable fastener, or fasteners, to fasten tissue.
- a fastener cartridge comprising a plurality of fasteners removably stored therein can be removably inserted into and/or attached to the end effector of a shaft assembly.
- FIG. 1 illustrates the surgical instrument 10 with an interchangeable shaft assembly 200 operably coupled thereto.
- FIGS. 2 and 3 illustrate attachment of the interchangeable shaft assembly 200 to the housing 12 or handle 14 .
- the handle 14 may comprise a pair of interconnectable handle housing segments 16 and 18 that may be interconnected by screws, snap features, adhesive, etc.
- the handle housing segments 16 , 18 cooperate to form a pistol grip portion 19 that can be gripped and manipulated by the clinician.
- the handle 14 operably supports a plurality of drive systems therein that are configured to generate and apply various control motions to corresponding portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly that is operably attached thereto.
- the handle 14 may further include a frame 20 that operably supports a plurality of drive systems.
- the frame 20 can operably support a “first” or closure drive system, generally designated as 30 , which may be employed to apply closing and opening motions to the interchangeable shaft assembly 200 that is operably attached or coupled thereto.
- the closure drive system 30 may include an actuator in the form of a closure trigger 32 that is pivotally supported by the frame 20 . More specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 4 , the closure trigger 32 is pivotally coupled to the housing 14 by a pin 33 .
- the closure drive system 30 further includes a closure linkage assembly 34 that is pivotally coupled to the closure trigger 32 .
- the closure linkage assembly 34 may include a first closure link 36 and a second closure link 38 that are pivotally coupled to the closure trigger 32 by a pin 35 .
- the second closure link 38 may also be referred to herein as an “attachment member” and include a transverse attachment pin 37 .
- the first closure link 36 may have a locking wall or end 39 thereon that is configured to cooperate with a closure release assembly 60 that is pivotally coupled to the frame 20 .
- the closure release assembly 60 may comprise a release button assembly 62 that has a distally protruding locking pawl 64 formed thereon.
- the release button assembly 62 may be pivoted in a counterclockwise direction by a release spring (not shown).
- the closure release assembly 60 serves to lock the closure trigger 32 in the fully actuated position.
- the clinician desires to unlock the closure trigger 32 to permit it to be biased to the unactuated position, the clinician simply pivots the closure release button assembly 62 such that the locking pawl 64 is moved out of engagement with the locking wall 39 on the first closure link 36 .
- the closure trigger 32 may pivot back to the unactuated position.
- Other closure trigger locking and release arrangements may also be employed.
- FIGS. 13-15 illustrate the closure trigger 32 in its unactuated position which is associated with an open, or unclamped, configuration of the shaft assembly 200 in which tissue can be positioned between the jaws of the shaft assembly 200 .
- FIGS. 16-18 illustrate the closure trigger 32 in its actuated position which is associated with a closed, or clamped, configuration of the shaft assembly 200 in which tissue is clamped between the jaws of the shaft assembly 200 .
- FIGS. 14 and 17 the reader will appreciate that, when the closure trigger 32 is moved from its unactuated position ( FIG. 14 ) to its actuated position ( FIG. 17 ), the closure release button 62 is pivoted between a first position ( FIG. 14 ) and a second position ( FIG. 17 ).
- the rotation of the closure release button 62 can be referred to as being an upward rotation; however, at least a portion of the closure release button 62 is being rotated toward the circuit board 100 .
- the closure release button 62 can include an arm 61 extending therefrom and a magnetic element 63 , such as a permanent magnet, for example, mounted to the arm 61 .
- the magnetic element 63 can move toward the circuit board 100 .
- the circuit board 100 can include at least one sensor configured to detect the movement of the magnetic element 63 .
- a Hall effect sensor 65 for example, can be mounted to the bottom surface of the circuit board 100 .
- the Hall effect sensor 65 can be configured to detect changes in a magnetic field surrounding the Hall effect sensor 65 caused by the movement of the magnetic element 63 .
- the Hall effect sensor 65 can be in signal communication with a microcontroller 7004 ( FIG. 59 ), for example, which can determine whether the closure release button 62 is in its first position, which is associated with the unactuated position of the closure trigger 32 and the open configuration of the end effector, its second position, which is associated with the actuated position of the closure trigger 32 and the closed configuration of the end effector, and/or any position between the first position and the second position.
- the handle 14 and the frame 20 may operably support another drive system referred to herein as a firing drive system 80 that is configured to apply firing motions to corresponding portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly attached thereto.
- the firing drive system may 80 also be referred to herein as a “second drive system”.
- the firing drive system 80 may employ an electric motor 82 , located in the pistol grip portion 19 of the handle 14 .
- the motor 82 may be a DC brushed driving motor having a maximum rotation of, approximately, 25,000 RPM, for example.
- the motor may include a brushless motor, a cordless motor, a synchronous motor, a stepper motor, or any other suitable electric motor.
- the motor 82 may be powered by a power source 90 that in one form may comprise a removable power pack 92 .
- the power pack 92 may comprise a proximal housing portion 94 that is configured for attachment to a distal housing portion 96 .
- the proximal housing portion 94 and the distal housing portion 96 are configured to operably support a plurality of batteries 98 therein.
- Batteries 98 may each comprise, for example, a Lithium Ion (“LI”) or other suitable battery.
- the distal housing portion 96 is configured for removable operable attachment to a control circuit board assembly 100 which is also operably coupled to the motor 82 .
- a number of batteries 98 may be connected in series may be used as the power source for the surgical instrument 10 .
- the power source 90 may be replaceable and/or rechargeable.
- the electric motor 82 can include a rotatable shaft (not shown) that operably interfaces with a gear reducer assembly 84 that is mounted in meshing engagement with a with a set, or rack, of drive teeth 122 on a longitudinally-movable drive member 120 .
- a voltage polarity provided by the power source 90 can operate the electric motor 82 in a clockwise direction wherein the voltage polarity applied to the electric motor by the battery can be reversed in order to operate the electric motor 82 in a counter-clockwise direction.
- the drive member 120 will be axially driven in the distal direction “DD”.
- the handle 14 can include a switch which can be configured to reverse the polarity applied to the electric motor 82 by the power source 90 .
- the handle 14 can also include a sensor that is configured to detect the position of the drive member 120 and/or the direction in which the drive member 120 is being moved.
- Actuation of the motor 82 can be controlled by a firing trigger 130 that is pivotally supported on the handle 14 .
- the firing trigger 130 may be pivoted between an unactuated position and an actuated position.
- the firing trigger 130 may be biased into the unactuated position by a spring 132 or other biasing arrangement such that when the clinician releases the firing trigger 130 , it may be pivoted or otherwise returned to the unactuated position by the spring 132 or biasing arrangement.
- the firing trigger 130 can be positioned “outboard” of the closure trigger 32 as was discussed above.
- a firing trigger safety button 134 may be pivotally mounted to the closure trigger 32 by pin 35 .
- the safety button 134 may be positioned between the firing trigger 130 and the closure trigger 32 and have a pivot arm 136 protruding therefrom. See FIG. 4 .
- the safety button 134 When the closure trigger 32 is in the unactuated position, the safety button 134 is contained in the handle 14 where the clinician cannot readily access it and move it between a safety position preventing actuation of the firing trigger 130 and a firing position wherein the firing trigger 130 may be fired. As the clinician depresses the closure trigger 32 , the safety button 134 and the firing trigger 130 pivot down wherein they can then be manipulated by the clinician.
- the handle 14 can include a closure trigger 32 and a firing trigger 130 .
- the firing trigger 130 can be pivotably mounted to the closure trigger 32 .
- the closure trigger 32 can include an arm 31 extending therefrom and the firing trigger 130 can be pivotably mounted to the arm 31 about a pivot pin 33 .
- the closure trigger 32 is moved from its unactuated position ( FIG. 14 ) to its actuated position ( FIG. 17 )
- the firing trigger 130 can descend downwardly, as outlined above.
- the firing trigger 130 can be depressed to operate the motor of the surgical instrument firing system.
- the handle 14 can include a tracking system, such as system 800 , for example, configured to determine the position of the closure trigger 32 and/or the position of the firing trigger 130 .
- the tracking system 800 can include a magnetic element, such as permanent magnet 802 , for example, which is mounted to an arm 801 extending from the firing trigger 130 .
- the tracking system 800 can comprise one or more sensors, such as a first Hall effect sensor 803 and a second Hall effect sensor 804 , for example, which can be configured to track the position of the magnet 802 .
- the reader will appreciate that, when the closure trigger 32 is moved from its unactuated position to its actuated position, the magnet 802 can move between a first position adjacent the first Hall effect sensor 803 and a second position adjacent the second Hall effect sensor 804 .
- the reader will further appreciate that, when the firing trigger 130 is moved from an unfired position ( FIG. 17 ) to a fired position ( FIG. 18A ), the magnet 802 can move relative to the second Hall effect sensor 804 .
- the sensors 803 and 804 can track the movement of the magnet 802 and can be in signal communication with a microcontroller on the circuit board 100 .
- the microcontroller can determine the position of the magnet 802 along a predefined path and, based on that position, the microcontroller can determine whether the closure trigger 32 is in its unactuated position, its actuated position, or a position therebetween.
- the microcontroller can determine the position of the magnet 802 along a predefined path and, based on that position, the microcontroller can determine whether the firing trigger 130 is in its unfired position, its fully fired position, or a position therebetween.
- the longitudinally movable drive member 120 has a rack of teeth 122 formed thereon for meshing engagement with a corresponding drive gear 86 of the gear reducer assembly 84 .
- At least one form also includes a manually-actuatable “bailout” assembly 140 that is configured to enable the clinician to manually retract the longitudinally movable drive member 120 should the motor 82 become disabled.
- the bailout assembly 140 may include a lever or bailout handle assembly 142 that is configured to be manually pivoted into ratcheting engagement with teeth 124 also provided in the drive member 120 .
- the clinician can manually retract the drive member 120 by using the bailout handle assembly 142 to ratchet the drive member 120 in the proximal direction “PD”.
- Patent Application Publication No. 2010/0089970 now U.S. Pat. No. 8,608,045, discloses bailout arrangements and other components, arrangements and systems that may also be employed with the various instruments disclosed herein.
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/249,117 entitled POWERED SURGICAL CUTTING AND STAPLING APPARATUS WITH MANUALLY RETRACTABLE FIRING SYSTEM, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,608,045, is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- the interchangeable shaft assembly 200 includes a surgical end effector 300 that comprises an elongated channel 302 that is configured to operably support a staple cartridge 304 therein.
- the end effector 300 may further include an anvil 306 that is pivotally supported relative to the elongated channel 302 .
- the interchangeable shaft assembly 200 may further include an articulation joint 270 and an articulation lock 350 ( FIG. 8 ) which can be configured to releasably hold the end effector 300 in a desired position relative to a shaft axis SA-SA. Details regarding the construction and operation of the end effector 300 , the articulation joint 270 and the articulation lock 350 are set forth in U.S.
- the interchangeable shaft assembly 200 can further include a proximal housing or nozzle 201 comprised of nozzle portions 202 and 203 .
- the interchangeable shaft assembly 200 can further include a closure tube 260 which can be utilized to close and/or open the anvil 306 of the end effector 300 .
- the shaft assembly 200 can include a spine 210 which can be configured to fixably support a shaft frame portion 212 of the articulation lock 350 . See FIG. 8 .
- the spine 210 can be configured to, one, slidably support a firing member 220 therein and, two, slidably support the closure tube 260 which extends around the spine 210 .
- the spine 210 can also be configured to slidably support a proximal articulation driver 230 .
- the articulation driver 230 has a distal end 231 that is configured to operably engage the articulation lock 350 .
- the articulation lock 350 interfaces with an articulation frame 352 that is adapted to operably engage a drive pin (not shown) on the end effector frame (not shown).
- a drive pin not shown
- the spine 210 can comprise a proximal end 211 which is rotatably supported in a chassis 240 .
- the proximal end 211 of the spine 210 has a thread 214 formed thereon for threaded attachment to a spine bearing 216 configured to be supported within the chassis 240 . See FIG. 7 .
- Such an arrangement facilitates rotatable attachment of the spine 210 to the chassis 240 such that the spine 210 may be selectively rotated about a shaft axis SA-SA relative to the chassis 240 .
- the interchangeable shaft assembly 200 includes a closure shuttle 250 that is slidably supported within the chassis 240 such that it may be axially moved relative thereto.
- the closure shuttle 250 includes a pair of proximally-protruding hooks 252 that are configured for attachment to the attachment pin 37 that is attached to the second closure link 38 as will be discussed in further detail below.
- a proximal end 261 of the closure tube 260 is coupled to the closure shuttle 250 for relative rotation thereto.
- a U shaped connector 263 is inserted into an annular slot 262 in the proximal end 261 of the closure tube 260 and is retained within vertical slots 253 in the closure shuttle 250 . See FIG.
- Such an arrangement serves to attach the closure tube 260 to the closure shuttle 250 for axial travel therewith while enabling the closure tube 260 to rotate relative to the closure shuttle 250 about the shaft axis SA-SA.
- a closure spring 268 is journaled on the closure tube 260 and serves to bias the closure tube 260 in the proximal direction “PD” which can serve to pivot the closure trigger into the unactuated position when the shaft assembly is operably coupled to the handle 14 .
- the interchangeable shaft assembly 200 may further include an articulation joint 270 .
- the articulation joint 270 includes a double pivot closure sleeve assembly 271 .
- the double pivot closure sleeve assembly 271 includes an end effector closure sleeve assembly 272 having upper and lower distally projecting tangs 273 , 274 .
- An end effector closure sleeve assembly 272 includes a horseshoe aperture 275 and a tab 276 for engaging an opening tab on the anvil 306 in the various manners described in U.S. patent application Ser. No.
- An upper double pivot link 277 includes upwardly projecting distal and proximal pivot pins that engage respectively an upper distal pin hole in the upper proximally projecting tang 273 and an upper proximal pin hole in an upper distally projecting tang 264 on the closure tube 260 .
- a lower double pivot link 278 includes upwardly projecting distal and proximal pivot pins that engage respectively a lower distal pin hole in the lower proximally projecting tang 274 and a lower proximal pin hole in the lower distally projecting tang 265 . See also FIG. 8 .
- the closure tube 260 is translated distally (direction “DD”) to close the anvil 306 , for example, in response to the actuation of the closure trigger 32 .
- the anvil 306 is closed by distally translating the closure tube 260 and thus the shaft closure sleeve assembly 272 , causing it to strike a proximal surface on the anvil 360 in the manner described in the aforementioned reference U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541.
- the anvil 306 is opened by proximally translating the closure tube 260 and the shaft closure sleeve assembly 272 , causing tab 276 and the horseshoe aperture 275 to contact and push against the anvil tab to lift the anvil 306 .
- the shaft closure tube 260 is moved to its proximal position.
- the surgical instrument 10 may further include an articulation lock 350 of the types and construction described in further detail in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541, which can be configured and operated to selectively lock the end effector 300 in position.
- an articulation lock 350 of the types and construction described in further detail in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541, which can be configured and operated to selectively lock the end effector 300 in position.
- Such arrangement enables the end effector 300 to be rotated, or articulated, relative to the shaft closure tube 260 when the articulation lock 350 is in its unlocked state. In such an unlocked state, the end effector 300 can be positioned and pushed against soft tissue and/or bone, for example, surrounding the surgical site within the patient in order to cause the end effector 300 to articulate relative to the closure tube 260 .
- the end effector 300 may also be articulated
- the interchangeable shaft assembly 200 further includes a firing member 220 that is supported for axial travel within the shaft spine 210 .
- the firing member 220 includes an intermediate firing shaft portion 222 that is configured for attachment to a distal cutting portion or knife bar 280 .
- the firing member 220 may also be referred to herein as a “second shaft” and/or a “second shaft assembly”.
- the intermediate firing shaft portion 222 may include a longitudinal slot 223 in the distal end thereof which can be configured to receive a tab 284 on the proximal end 282 of the distal knife bar 280 .
- the longitudinal slot 223 and the proximal end 282 can be sized and configured to permit relative movement therebetween and can comprise a slip joint 286 .
- the slip joint 286 can permit the intermediate firing shaft portion 222 of the firing drive 220 to be moved to articulate the end effector 300 without moving, or at least substantially moving, the knife bar 280 .
- the intermediate firing shaft portion 222 can be advanced distally until a proximal sidewall of the longitudinal slot 223 comes into contact with the tab 284 in order to advance the knife bar 280 and fire the staple cartridge positioned within the channel 302 As can be further seen in FIGS.
- the shaft spine 210 has an elongate opening or window 213 therein to facilitate assembly and insertion of the intermediate firing shaft portion 222 into the shaft frame 210 .
- a top frame segment 215 may be engaged with the shaft frame 212 to enclose the intermediate firing shaft portion 222 and knife bar 280 therein. Further description of the operation of the firing member 220 may be found in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541.
- the shaft assembly 200 can include a clutch assembly 400 which can be configured to selectively and releasably couple the articulation driver 230 to the firing member 220 .
- the clutch assembly 400 includes a lock collar, or sleeve 402 , positioned around the firing member 220 wherein the lock sleeve 402 can be rotated between an engaged position in which the lock sleeve 402 couples the articulation driver 360 to the firing member 220 and a disengaged position in which the articulation driver 360 is not operably coupled to the firing member 200 .
- lock sleeve 402 When lock sleeve 402 is in its engaged position, distal movement of the firing member 220 can move the articulation driver 360 distally and, correspondingly, proximal movement of the firing member 220 can move the articulation driver 230 proximally.
- lock sleeve 402 When lock sleeve 402 is in its disengaged position, movement of the firing member 220 is not transmitted to the articulation driver 230 and, as a result, the firing member 220 can move independently of the articulation driver 230 .
- the articulation driver 230 can be held in position by the articulation lock 350 when the articulation driver 230 is not being moved in the proximal or distal directions by the firing member 220 .
- the lock sleeve 402 can comprise a cylindrical, or an at least substantially cylindrical, body including a longitudinal aperture 403 defined therein configured to receive the firing member 220 .
- the lock sleeve 402 can comprise diametrically-opposed, inwardly-facing lock protrusions 404 and an outwardly-facing lock member 406 .
- the lock protrusions 404 can be configured to be selectively engaged with the firing member 220 .
- the lock protrusions 404 are positioned within a drive notch 224 defined in the firing member 220 such that a distal pushing force and/or a proximal pulling force can be transmitted from the firing member 220 to the lock sleeve 402 .
- the second lock member 406 is received within a drive notch 232 defined in the articulation driver 230 such that the distal pushing force and/or the proximal pulling force applied to the lock sleeve 402 can be transmitted to the articulation driver 230 .
- the firing member 220 , the lock sleeve 402 , and the articulation driver 230 will move together when the lock sleeve 402 is in its engaged position.
- the lock protrusions 404 may not be positioned within the drive notch 224 of the firing member 220 and, as a result, a distal pushing force and/or a proximal pulling force may not be transmitted from the firing member 220 to the lock sleeve 402 .
- the distal pushing force and/or the proximal pulling force may not be transmitted to the articulation driver 230 .
- the firing member 220 can be slid proximally and/or distally relative to the lock sleeve 402 and the proximal articulation driver 230 .
- the shaft assembly 200 further includes a switch drum 500 that is rotatably received on the closure tube 260 .
- the switch drum 500 comprises a hollow shaft segment 502 that has a shaft boss 504 formed thereon for receive an outwardly protruding actuation pin 410 therein.
- the actuation pin 410 extends through a slot 267 into a longitudinal slot 408 provided in the lock sleeve 402 to facilitate axial movement of the lock sleeve 402 when it is engaged with the articulation driver 230 .
- a rotary torsion spring 420 is configured to engage the boss 504 on the switch drum 500 and a portion of the nozzle housing 203 as shown in FIG.
- the switch drum 500 can further comprise at least partially circumferential openings 506 defined therein which, referring to FIGS. 5 and 6 , can be configured to receive circumferential mounts 204 , 205 extending from the nozzle halves 202 , 203 and permit relative rotation, but not translation, between the switch drum 500 and the proximal nozzle 201 .
- the mounts 204 and 205 also extend through openings 266 in the closure tube 260 to be seated in recesses 211 in the shaft spine 210 .
- the nozzle 201 may be employed to operably engage and disengage the articulation drive system with the firing drive system in the various manners described in further detail in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541.
- the shaft assembly 200 can comprise a slip ring assembly 600 which can be configured to conduct electrical power to and/or from the end effector 300 and/or communicate signals to and/or from the end effector 300 , for example.
- the slip ring assembly 600 can comprise a proximal connector flange 604 mounted to a chassis flange 242 extending from the chassis 240 and a distal connector flange 601 positioned within a slot defined in the shaft housings 202 , 203 .
- the proximal connector flange 604 can comprise a first face and the distal connector flange 601 can comprise a second face which is positioned adjacent to and movable relative to the first face.
- the distal connector flange 601 can rotate relative to the proximal connector flange 604 about the shaft axis SA-SA.
- the proximal connector flange 604 can comprise a plurality of concentric, or at least substantially concentric, conductors 602 defined in the first face thereof.
- a connector 607 can be mounted on the proximal side of the connector flange 601 and may have a plurality of contacts (not shown) wherein each contact corresponds to and is in electrical contact with one of the conductors 602 . Such an arrangement permits relative rotation between the proximal connector flange 604 and the distal connector flange 601 while maintaining electrical contact therebetween.
- the proximal connector flange 604 can include an electrical connector 606 which can place the conductors 602 in signal communication with a shaft circuit board 610 mounted to the shaft chassis 240 , for example.
- a wiring harness comprising a plurality of conductors can extend between the electrical connector 606 and the shaft circuit board 610 .
- the electrical connector 606 may extend proximally through a connector opening 243 defined in the chassis mounting flange 242 . See FIG. 7 .
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/800,067 entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE TISSUE THICKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM, filed on Mar. 13, 2013, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.
- the shaft assembly 200 can include a proximal portion which is fixably mounted to the handle 14 and a distal portion which is rotatable about a longitudinal axis.
- the rotatable distal shaft portion can be rotated relative to the proximal portion about the slip ring assembly 600 , as discussed above.
- the distal connector flange 601 of the slip ring assembly 600 can be positioned within the rotatable distal shaft portion.
- the switch drum 500 can also be positioned within the rotatable distal shaft portion. When the rotatable distal shaft portion is rotated, the distal connector flange 601 and the switch drum 500 can be rotated synchronously with one another.
- the switch drum 500 can be rotated between a first position and a second position relative to the distal connector flange 601 .
- the articulation drive system may be operably disengaged from the firing drive system and, thus, the operation of the firing drive system may not articulate the end effector 300 of the shaft assembly 200 .
- the switch drum 500 is in its second position, the articulation drive system may be operably engaged with the firing drive system and, thus, the operation of the firing drive system may articulate the end effector 300 of the shaft assembly 200 .
- the switch drum 500 is moved between its first position and its second position, the switch drum 500 is moved relative to distal connector flange 601 .
- the shaft assembly 200 can comprise at least one sensor configured to detect the position of the switch drum 500 .
- the distal connector flange 601 can comprise a Hall effect sensor 605 , for example, and the switch drum 500 can comprise a magnetic element, such as permanent magnet 505 , for example.
- the Hall effect sensor 605 can be configured to detect the position of the permanent magnet 505 .
- Hall effect sensor 605 can detect changes in a magnetic field created when the permanent magnet 505 is moved.
- the Hall effect sensor 605 can be in signal communication with the shaft circuit board 610 and/or the handle circuit board 100 , for example. Based on the signal from the Hall effect sensor 605 , a microcontroller on the shaft circuit board 610 and/or the handle circuit board 100 can determine whether the articulation drive system is engaged with or disengaged from the firing drive system.
- the chassis 240 includes at least one, and preferably two, tapered attachment portions 244 formed thereon that are adapted to be received within corresponding dovetail slots 702 formed within a distal attachment flange portion 700 of the frame 20 .
- Each dovetail slot 702 may be tapered or, stated another way, be somewhat V-shaped to seatingly receive the attachment portions 244 therein.
- a shaft attachment lug 226 is formed on the proximal end of the intermediate firing shaft 222 .
- the shaft attachment lug 226 is received in a firing shaft attachment cradle 126 formed in the distal end 125 of the longitudinal drive member 120 . See FIGS. 3 and 6 .
- the latch system 710 includes a lock member or lock yoke 712 that is movably coupled to the chassis 240 .
- the lock yoke 712 has a U-shape with two spaced downwardly extending legs 714 .
- the legs 714 each have a pivot lug 716 formed thereon that are adapted to be received in corresponding holes 245 formed in the chassis 240 .
- Such arrangement facilitates pivotal attachment of the lock yoke 712 to the chassis 240 .
- the lock yoke 712 may include two proximally protruding lock lugs 714 that are configured for releasable engagement with corresponding lock detents or grooves 704 in the distal attachment flange 700 of the frame 20 . See FIG. 3 .
- the lock yoke 712 is biased in the proximal direction by spring or biasing member (not shown). Actuation of the lock yoke 712 may be accomplished by a latch button 722 that is slidably mounted on a latch actuator assembly 720 that is mounted to the chassis 240 .
- the latch button 722 may be biased in a proximal direction relative to the lock yoke 712 .
- the lock yoke 712 may be moved to an unlocked position by biasing the latch button the in distal direction which also causes the lock yoke 712 to pivot out of retaining engagement with the distal attachment flange 700 of the frame 20 .
- the lock lugs 716 are retainingly seated within the corresponding lock detents or grooves 704 in the distal attachment flange 700 .
- an interchangeable shaft assembly that includes an end effector of the type described herein that is adapted to cut and fasten tissue, as well as other types of end effectors
- the clinician may actuate the closure trigger 32 to grasp and manipulate the target tissue into a desired position. Once the target tissue is positioned within the end effector 300 in a desired orientation, the clinician may then fully actuate the closure trigger 32 to close the anvil 306 and clamp the target tissue in position for cutting and stapling. In that instance, the first drive system 30 has been fully actuated.
- One form of the latch system 710 is configured to prevent such inadvertent detachment.
- the lock yoke 712 includes at least one and preferably two lock hooks 718 that are adapted to contact corresponding lock lug portions 256 that are formed on the closure shuttle 250 .
- the lock yoke 712 may be pivoted in a distal direction to unlock the interchangeable shaft assembly 200 from the housing 12 .
- the lock hooks 718 do not contact the lock lug portions 256 on the closure shuttle 250 .
- the lock yoke 712 is prevented from being pivoted to an unlocked position. See FIGS. 16-18 .
- the clinician were to attempt to pivot the lock yoke 712 to an unlocked position or, for example, the lock yoke 712 was in advertently bumped or contacted in a manner that might otherwise cause it to pivot distally, the lock hooks 718 on the lock yoke 712 will contact the lock lugs 256 on the closure shuttle 250 and prevent movement of the lock yoke 712 to an unlocked position.
- the clinician may position the chassis 240 of the interchangeable shaft assembly 200 above or adjacent to the distal attachment flange 700 of the frame 20 such that the tapered attachment portions 244 formed on the chassis 240 are aligned with the dovetail slots 702 in the frame 20 .
- the clinician may then move the shaft assembly 200 along an installation axis IA that is perpendicular to the shaft axis SA-SA to seat the attachment portions 244 in “operable engagement” with the corresponding dovetail receiving slots 702 .
- the shaft attachment lug 226 on the intermediate firing shaft 222 will also be seated in the cradle 126 in the longitudinally movable drive member 120 and the portions of pin 37 on the second closure link 38 will be seated in the corresponding hooks 252 in the closure yoke 250 .
- operble engagement in the context of two components means that the two components are sufficiently engaged with each other so that upon application of an actuation motion thereto, the components may carry out their intended action, function and/or procedure.
- a first system can comprise a frame system which couples and/or aligns the frame or spine of the shaft assembly 200 with the frame 20 of the handle 14 .
- Another system can comprise a closure drive system 30 which can operably connect the closure trigger 32 of the handle 14 and the closure tube 260 and the anvil 306 of the shaft assembly 200 .
- the closure tube attachment yoke 250 of the shaft assembly 200 can be engaged with the pin 37 on the second closure link 38 .
- Another system can comprise the firing drive system 80 which can operably connect the firing trigger 130 of the handle 14 with the intermediate firing shaft 222 of the shaft assembly 200 .
- the shaft attachment lug 226 can be operably connected with the cradle 126 of the longitudinal drive member 120 .
- Another system can comprise an electrical system which can signal to a controller in the handle 14 , such as microcontroller, for example, that a shaft assembly, such as shaft assembly 200 , for example, has been operably engaged with the handle 14 and/or, two, conduct power and/or communication signals between the shaft assembly 200 and the handle 14 .
- the shaft assembly 200 can include an electrical connector 4010 that is operably mounted to the shaft circuit board 610 .
- the electrical connector 4010 is configured for mating engagement with a corresponding electrical connector 4000 on the handle control board 100 . Further details regaining the circuitry and control systems may be found in U.S.
- the fifth system may consist of the latching system for releasably locking the shaft assembly 200 to the handle 14 .
- the handle 14 can include an electrical connector 4000 comprising a plurality of electrical contacts.
- the electrical connector 4000 can comprise a first contact 4001 a , a second contact 4001 b , a third contact 4001 c , a fourth contact 4001 d , a fifth contact 4001 e , and a sixth contact 4001 f , for example. While the illustrated embodiment utilizes six contacts, other embodiments are envisioned which may utilize more than six contacts or less than six contacts. As illustrated in FIG.
- the first contact 4001 a can be in electrical communication with a transistor 4008
- contacts 4001 b - 4001 e can be in electrical communication with a microcontroller 7004
- the sixth contact 4001 f can be in electrical communication with a ground.
- one or more of the electrical contacts 4001 b - 4001 e may be in electrical communication with one or more output channels of the microcontroller 7004 and can be energized, or have a voltage potential applied thereto, when the handle 1042 is in a powered state.
- one or more of the electrical contacts 4001 b - 4001 e may be in electrical communication with one or more input channels of the microcontroller 7004 and, when the handle 14 is in a powered state, the microcontroller 7004 can be configured to detect when a voltage potential is applied to such electrical contacts.
- the electrical contacts 4001 a - 4001 f may not communicate with each other.
- the electrical contacts 4001 a - 4001 f of the electrical connector 4000 may be exposed and, in some circumstances, one or more of the contacts 4001 a - 4001 f may be accidentally placed in electrical communication with each other.
- Such circumstances can arise when one or more of the contacts 4001 a - 4001 f come into contact with an electrically conductive material, for example.
- the microcontroller 7004 can receive an erroneous input and/or the shaft assembly 200 can receive an erroneous output, for example.
- the handle 14 may be unpowered when a shaft assembly, such as shaft assembly 200 , for example, is not attached to the handle 14 .
- the handle 1042 can be powered when a shaft assembly, such as shaft assembly 200 , for example, is not attached thereto.
- the microcontroller 7004 can be configured to ignore inputs, or voltage potentials, applied to the contacts in electrical communication with the microcontroller 7004 , i.e., contacts 4001 b - 4001 e , for example, until a shaft assembly is attached to the handle 14 . Eventhough the microcontroller 7004 may be supplied with power to operate other functionalities of the handle 14 in such circumstances, the handle 14 may be in a powered-down state. In a way, the electrical connector 4000 may be in a powered-down state as voltage potentials applied to the electrical contacts 4001 b - 4001 e may not affect the operation of the handle 14 .
- contacts 4001 b - 4001 e may be in a powered-down state
- the electrical contacts 4001 a and 4001 f which are not in electrical communication with the microcontroller 7004 , may or may not be in a powered-down state.
- sixth contact 4001 f may remain in electrical communication with a ground regardless of whether the handle 14 is in a powered-up or a powered-down state.
- the transistor 4008 and/or any other suitable arrangement of transistors, such as transistor 4010 , for example, and/or switches may be configured to control the supply of power from a power source 4004 , such as a battery 90 within the handle 14 , for example, to the first electrical contact 4001 a regardless of whether the handle 14 is in a powered-up or a powered-down state.
- a power source 4004 such as a battery 90 within the handle 14
- the shaft assembly 200 for example, can be configured to change the state of the transistor 4008 when the shaft assembly 200 is engaged with the handle 14 .
- a Hall effect sensor 4002 can be configured to switch the state of transistor 4010 which, as a result, can switch the state of transistor 4008 and ultimately supply power from power source 4004 to first contact 4001 a . In this way, both the power circuits and the signal circuits to the connector 4000 can be powered down when a shaft assembly is not installed to the handle 14 and powered up when a shaft assembly is installed to the handle 14 .
- the handle 14 can include the Hall effect sensor 4002 , for example, which can be configured to detect a detectable element, such as a magnetic element 4007 ( FIG. 3 ), for example, on a shaft assembly, such as shaft assembly 200 , for example, when the shaft assembly is coupled to the handle 14 .
- the Hall effect sensor 4002 can be powered by a power source 4006 , such as a battery, for example, which can, in effect, amplify the detection signal of the Hall effect sensor 4002 and communicate with an input channel of the microcontroller 7004 via the circuit illustrated in FIG. 59 .
- the microcontroller 7004 can enter into its normal, or powered-up, operating state. In such an operating state, the microcontroller 7004 will evaluate the signals transmitted to one or more of the contacts 4001 b - 4001 e from the shaft assembly and/or transmit signals to the shaft assembly through one or more of the contacts 4001 b - 4001 e in normal use thereof. In various circumstances, the shaft assembly 1200 may have to be fully seated before the Hall effect sensor 4002 can detect the magnetic element 4007 .
- both the power circuits and the signal circuits to the connector 4000 can be powered down when a shaft assembly is not installed to the handle 14 and powered up when a shaft assembly is installed to the handle 14 .
- any number of magnetic sensing elements may be employed to detect whether a shaft assembly has been assembled to the handle 14 , for example.
- the technologies used for magnetic field sensing include search coil, fluxgate, optically pumped, nuclear precession, SQUID, Hall-effect, anisotropic magnetoresistance, giant magnetoresistance, magnetic tunnel junctions, giant magnetoimpedance, magnetostrictive/piezoelectric composites, magnetodiode, magnetotransistor, fiber optic, magnetooptic, and microelectromechanical systems-based magnetic sensors, among others.
- the microcontroller 7004 may generally comprise a microprocessor (“processor”) and one or more memory units operationally coupled to the processor. By executing instruction code stored in the memory, the processor may control various components of the surgical instrument, such as the motor, various drive systems, and/or a user display, for example.
- the microcontroller 7004 may be implemented using integrated and/or discrete hardware elements, software elements, and/or a combination of both.
- Examples of integrated hardware elements may include processors, microprocessors, microcontrollers, integrated circuits, application specific integrated circuits (ASIC), programmable logic devices (PLD), digital signal processors (DSP), field programmable gate arrays (FPGA), logic gates, registers, semiconductor devices, chips, microchips, chip sets, microcontrollers, system-on-chip (SoC), and/or system-in-package (SIP).
- Examples of discrete hardware elements may include circuits and/or circuit elements such as logic gates, field effect transistors, bipolar transistors, resistors, capacitors, inductors, and/or relays.
- the microcontroller 7004 may include a hybrid circuit comprising discrete and integrated circuit elements or components on one or more substrates, for example.
- the microcontroller 7004 may be an LM 4F230H5QR, available from Texas Instruments, for example.
- the Texas Instruments LM4F230H5QR is an ARM Cortex-M4F Processor Core comprising on-chip memory of 256 KB single-cycle flash memory, or other non-volatile memory, up to 40 MHz, a prefetch buffer to improve performance above 40 MHz, a 32 KB single-cycle serial random access memory (SRAM), internal read-only memory (ROM) loaded with StellarisWare® software, 2 KB electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), one or more pulse width modulation (PWM) modules, one or more quadrature encoder inputs (QEI) analog, one or more 12-bit Analog-to-Digital Converters (ADC) with 12 analog input channels, among other features that are readily available.
- Other microcontrollers may be readily substituted for use with the present disclosure. Accordingly, the present disclosure should not be limited
- the handle 14 and/or the shaft assembly 200 can include systems and configurations configured to prevent, or at least reduce the possibility of, the contacts of the handle electrical connector 4000 and/or the contacts of the shaft electrical connector 4010 from becoming shorted out when the shaft assembly 200 is not assembled, or completely assembled, to the handle 14 .
- the handle electrical connector 4000 can be at least partially recessed within a cavity 4009 defined in the handle frame 20 .
- the six contacts 4001 a - 4001 f of the electrical connector 4000 can be completely recessed within the cavity 4009 . Such arrangements can reduce the possibility of an object accidentally contacting one or more of the contacts 4001 a - 4001 f .
- the shaft electrical connector 4010 can be positioned within a recess defined in the shaft chassis 240 which can reduce the possibility of an object accidentally contacting one or more of the contacts 4011 a - 4011 f of the shaft electrical connector 4010 .
- the shaft contacts 4011 a - 4011 f can comprise male contacts.
- each shaft contact 4011 a - 4011 f can comprise a flexible projection extending therefrom which can be configured to engage a corresponding handle contact 4001 a - 4001 f , for example.
- the handle contacts 4001 a - 4001 f can comprise female contacts.
- each handle contact 4001 a - 4001 f can comprise a flat surface, for example, against which the male shaft contacts 4001 a - 4001 f can wipe, or slide, against and maintain an electrically conductive interface therebetween.
- the direction in which the shaft assembly 200 is assembled to the handle 14 can be parallel to, or at least substantially parallel to, the handle contacts 4001 a - 4001 f such that the shaft contacts 4011 a - 4011 f slide against the handle contacts 4001 a - 4001 f when the shaft assembly 200 is assembled to the handle 14 .
- the handle contacts 4001 a - 4001 f can comprise male contacts and the shaft contacts 4011 a - 4011 f can comprise female contacts.
- the handle contacts 4001 a - 4001 f and the shaft contacts 4011 a - 4011 f can comprise any suitable arrangement of contacts.
- the handle 14 can comprise a connector guard configured to at least partially cover the handle electrical connector 4000 and/or a connector guard configured to at least partially cover the shaft electrical connector 4010 .
- a connector guard can prevent, or at least reduce the possibility of, an object accidentally touching the contacts of an electrical connector when the shaft assembly is not assembled to, or only partially assembled to, the handle.
- a connector guard can be movable. For instance, the connector guard can be moved between a guarded position in which it at least partially guards a connector and an unguarded position in which it does not guard, or at least guards less of, the connector. In at least one embodiment, a connector guard can be displaced as the shaft assembly is being assembled to the handle.
- a connector guard can comprise a door, for example.
- the door can comprise a beveled surface which, when contacted by the handle or shaft, can facilitate the displacement of the door in a certain direction.
- the connector guard can be translated and/or rotated, for example.
- a connector guard can comprise at least one film which covers the contacts of an electrical connector. When the shaft assembly is assembled to the handle, the film can become ruptured. In at least one instance, the male contacts of a connector can penetrate the film before engaging the corresponding contacts positioned underneath the film.
- the surgical instrument can include a system which can selectively power-up, or activate, the contacts of an electrical connector, such as the electrical connector 4000 , for example.
- the contacts can be transitioned between an unactivated condition and an activated condition.
- the contacts can be transitioned between a monitored condition, a deactivated condition, and an activated condition.
- the microcontroller 7004 can monitor the contacts 4001 a - 4001 f when a shaft assembly has not been assembled to the handle 14 to determine whether one or more of the contacts 4001 a - 4001 f may have been shorted.
- the microcontroller 7004 can be configured to apply a low voltage potential to each of the contacts 4001 a - 4001 f and assess whether only a minimal resistance is present at each of the contacts.
- Such an operating state can comprise the monitored condition.
- the microcontroller 7004 can deactivate that contact, more than one contact, or, alternatively, all of the contacts.
- Such an operating state can comprise the deactivated condition. If a shaft assembly is assembled to the handle 14 and it is detected by the microcontroller 7004 , as discussed above, the microcontroller 7004 can increase the voltage potential to the contacts 4001 a - 4001 f .
- Such an operating state can comprise the activated condition.
- the various shaft assemblies disclosed herein may employ sensors and various other components that require electrical communication with the controller in the housing. These shaft assemblies generally are configured to be able to rotate relative to the housing necessitating a connection that facilitates such electrical communication between two or more components that may rotate relative to each other.
- the connector arrangements must be relatively robust in nature while also being somewhat compact to fit into the shaft assembly connector portion.
- FIGS. 19-22 depict one form of electric coupler or slip ring connector 1600 that may be employed with, for example an interchangeable shaft assembly 1200 or a variety of other applications that require electrical connections between components that rotate relative to each other.
- the shaft assembly 1200 may be similar to shaft assembly 200 described herein and include a closure tube or outer shaft 1260 and a proximal nozzle 1201 (the upper half of nozzle 1201 is omitted for clarity).
- the outer shaft 1260 is mounted on a shaft spine 1210 such that the outer tube 1260 may be selectively axially movable thereon.
- the proximal ends of the shaft spine 1210 and the outer tube 1260 may be rotatably coupled to a chassis 1240 for rotation relative thereto about a shaft axis SA-SA.
- the proximal nozzle 1201 may include mounts or mounting lugs 1204 ( FIG. 20 ) that protrude inwardly from the nozzle portions and extend through corresponding openings 1266 in the outer tube 1260 to be seated in corresponding recesses 1211 in the shaft spine 1210 .
- mounts or mounting lugs 1204 FIG. 20
- the clinician simply rotates the nozzle 1201 as represented by arrows “R” in FIG. 19 .
- the distal electrical component 1800 is rotatable with the nozzle 1201 about the shaft axis SA-SA.
- the electrical component 1800 comprises a connector, battery, etc. that includes contacts 1802 , 1804 , 1806 , and 1808 that are laterally displaced from each other.
- the slip ring connector 1600 further includes a mounting member 1610 that includes a cylindrical body portion 1612 that defines an annular mounting surface 1613 .
- a distal flange 1614 may be formed on at least one end of the cylindrical body portion 1612 .
- the body portion 1612 of the mounting member 1610 is sized to be non-rotatably mounted on a mounting hub 1241 on the chassis 1240 .
- one distal flange 1614 is provided on one end of the body portion 1612 .
- a second flange 1243 is formed on the chassis 1240 such that when the body portion 1612 is fixedly (non-rotatably) mounted thereon, the second flange 1243 abuts the proximal end of the body portion 1612 .
- the slip ring connector 1600 also employs a unique and novel annular circuit trace assembly 1620 that is wrapped around the annular mounting surface 1613 of the body portion 1612 such that it is received between the first and second flanges 1614 and 1243 .
- the circuit trace assembly 1620 may comprise an adhesive-backed flexible substrate 1622 that may be wrapped around the circumference of the body portion 1612 (i.e., the annular mounting surface 1613 ). Prior to being wrapped around the body portion 1612 , the flexible substrate 1622 may have a “T-shape” with a first annular portion 1624 and a lead portion 1626 . As can also be seen in FIGS.
- the circuit trace assembly 1620 may further include circuit traces 1630 , 1640 , 1650 , 1660 that may comprise, for example, electrically-conductive gold-plated traces. However, other electrically-conductive materials may also be used.
- Each electrically-conductive circuit trace includes an “annular portion” that will form an annular part of the trace when the substrate is wrapped around the body portion 1612 as well as another “lead portion” that extends transversely from or perpendicular from the annular portion. More specifically, referring to FIG. 22 , first electrically-conductive circuit trace 1630 has a first annular portion 1632 and first lead portion 1634 .
- the second electrically-conductive circuit trace 1640 has a second annular portion 1642 and a second lead portion 1644 extending transversely or perpendicularly therefrom.
- the third electrically conductive circuit trace 1650 has a third annular portion 1652 and a third lead portion 1654 extending transversely or perpendicularly therefrom.
- the fourth electrically-conductive circuit trace has a fourth annular portion 1662 and a fourth lead portion 1664 extending transversely or perpendicularly therefrom.
- the electrically-conductive circuit traces 1630 , 1640 , 1650 , 1660 may be applied to the flexible substrate 1622 while the substrate is in a planar orientation (i.e., prior to being wrapped onto the annular body portion 1612 of the mounting member 1610 ) using conventional manufacturing techniques. As can be seen in FIG. 22 , the annular portions 1632 , 1642 , 1652 , 1662 are laterally displaced from each other. Likewise, the lead portions 1634 , 1644 , 1654 , 1664 are laterally displaced from each other.
- the ends of the portion of the substrate that contains the annular portions 1632 , 1642 , 1652 , 1664 are butted together such that the annular portions 1632 , 1642 , 1652 , 1664 form discrete continuous annular electrically-conductive paths 1636 , 1646 , 1656 , 1666 , respectively that extend around the shaft axis SA-SA.
- the electrically-conductive paths 1636 , 1646 , 1656 , and 1666 are laterally or axially displaced from each other along the shaft axis SA-SA.
- the lead portion 1626 may extend through a slot 1245 in the flange 1243 and be electrically coupled to a circuit board (see e.g., FIG. 7 —circuit board 610 ) or other suitable electrical component(s).
- the electrical component 1800 is mounted within the nozzle 1261 for rotation about the mounting member 1610 such that: contact 1802 is in constant electrical contact with the first annular electrically-conductive path 1636 ; contact 1804 is in constant electrical contact with the second annular electrically-conductive path 1646 ; contact 1806 is in constant electrical contact with the third annular electrically-conductive path 1656 ; and contact 1808 is in constant electrical contact with the fourth electrically-conductive path 1666 .
- the various advantages of the slip ring connector 1600 may also be obtained in applications wherein the mounting member 1610 is supported for rotation about the shaft axis SA-SA and the electrical component 1800 is fixedly mounted relative thereto. It will be further appreciated that the slip ring connector 1600 may be effectively employed in connection with a variety of different components and applications outside the field of surgery wherein it is desirable to provide electrical connections between components that rotate relative to each other.
- the slip ring connector 1600 comprises a radial slip ring that provides a conductive contact means of passing signal(s) and power to and from any radial position and after shaft rotation.
- the electrical component comprises a battery contact
- the battery contact position can be situated relative to the mounting member to minimize any tolerance stack up between those components.
- the coupler arrangement may represent a low cost coupling arrangement that can be assembled with minimal manufacturing costs.
- the gold plated traces may also minimize the likelihood of corrosion.
- the unique and novel contact arrangement facilitates complete clockwise and counterclockwise rotation about the shaft axis SA-SA while remaining in electrical contact with the corresponding annular electrically-conductive paths.
- FIGS. 23-25 depict one form of electric coupler or slip ring connector 1600 ′ that may be employed with, for example an interchangeable shaft assembly 1200 ′ or a variety of other applications that require electrical connections between components that rotate relative to each other.
- the shaft assembly 1200 ′ may be similar to shaft assembly 1200 described herein and include a closure tube or outer shaft 1260 and a proximal nozzle 1201 (the upper half of nozzle 1201 is omitted for clarity).
- the outer shaft 1260 is mounted on a shaft spine 1210 such that the outer tube 1260 may be selectively axially movable thereon.
- the proximal ends of the shaft spine 1210 and the outer tube 1260 may be rotatably coupled to a chassis 1240 ′ for rotation relative thereto about a shaft axis SA-SA.
- the proximal nozzle 1201 may include mounts or mounting lugs that protrude inwardly from the nozzle portions and extend through corresponding openings 1266 in the outer tube 1260 to be seated in corresponding recesses 1211 in the shaft spine 1210 .
- the clinician simply rotates the nozzle 1201 as represented by arrows “R” in FIG. 23 .
- the distal electrical component 1800 ′ is rotatable with the nozzle 1201 and the wires/traces attached thereto.
- the electrical component 1800 comprises a connector, battery, etc. that includes contacts 1802 ′, 1804 ′, 1806 ′, 1808 ′ that are laterally displaced from each other.
- the slip ring connector 1600 ′ further includes a laminated slip ring assembly 1610 ′ that is fabricated from a plurality of conductive rings that are laminated together. More specifically and with reference to FIG. 25 , one form of slip ring assembly 1610 ′ may comprise a first non-electrically conductive flange 1670 that forms a distal end of the slip ring assembly 1610 ′.
- the flange 1670 may be fabricated from a high-heat resistant material, for example.
- a first electrically conductive ring 1680 is positioned immediately adjacent the first flange 1670 .
- the first electrically conductive ring 1680 may comprise a first copper ring 1681 that has a first gold plating 1682 thereon.
- a second non-electrically conductive ring 1672 is adjacent to the first electrically-conductive ring 1680 .
- a second electrically-conductive ring 1684 is adjacent to the second non-electrically-conductive ring 1672 .
- the second electrically-conductive ring 1684 may comprise a second copper ring 1685 that has a second gold plating 1686 thereon.
- a third non-electrically-conductive ring 1674 is adjacent to the second electrically-conductive ring 1684 .
- a third electrically conductive ring 1688 is adjacent to the third non-electrically conductive ring 1674 .
- the third electrically conductive ring 1688 may comprise a third copper ring 1689 that has a third gold plating 1690 thereon.
- a fourth non-electrically conductive ring 1676 is adjacent to the third electrically-conductive ring 1688 .
- a fourth electrically conductive ring 1692 is adjacent to the fourth non-electrically-conductive ring 1676 .
- the fourth electrically-conductive ring 1692 is adjacent to the fourth non-electrically conductive ring 1676 .
- a fifth non-electrically conductive ring 1678 is adjacent to the fourth electrically-conductive ring 1692 and forms the proximal end of the mounting member 1610 ′.
- the non-electrically conductive rings 1670 , 1672 , 1674 , 1676 , and 1678 may be fabricated from the same material.
- the first electrically-conductive ring 1680 forms a first annular electrically-conductive pathway 1700 .
- the second electrically-conductive ring 1682 forms a second annular electrically-conductive pathway 1702 that is laterally or axially spaced from the first annular electrically-conductive pathway 1700 .
- the third electrically-conductive ring 1688 forms a third annular electrically conductive pathway 1704 that is laterally or axially spaced from the second annular electrically-conductive pathway 1702 .
- the fourth electrically-conductive ring 1692 forms a fourth annular electrically-conductive pathway 1706 that is laterally or axially spaced from the third annular electrically-conductive pathway 1704 .
- the slip ring assembly 1610 ′ comprises a one piece molded high temperature resistant, non-conductive material with molded in channels for electromagnetic forming (EMF—Magneformed) copper rings.
- the slip ring connector 1600 ′ further includes a non-conductive transverse mounting member 1720 that is adapted to be inserted into axially-aligned notches 1710 in each of the rings 1670 , 1680 , 1672 , 1684 , 1674 , 1688 , 1676 , 1692 , and 1678 .
- the transverse mounting member 1720 has a first circuit trace 1722 thereon that is adapted for electrical contact with the first annular electrically-conductive pathway 1700 when the transverse mounting member 1672 is mounted within the notches 1710 .
- a second circuit trace 1724 is printed on the transverse mounting member 1720 and is configured for electrical contact with the second annular electrically conductive pathway 1702 .
- a third circuit trace 1726 is printed on the transverse mounting member 1720 and is configured for electrical contact with the third annular electrically-conductive pathway 1704 .
- a fourth circuit trace 1728 is printed on the transverse mounting member 1720 and is configured for electrical contact with the fourth annular electrically-conductive pathway 1706 .
- the slip ring assembly 1610 ′ is configured to be fixedly (non-rotatably) received on a mounting hub 1241 ′ on the chassis 1240 ′.
- the transverse mounting member 1720 is received within groove 1243 ′ formed in the mounting hub 1241 ′ which acts as a keyway for the transverse mounting member 1720 and which serves to prevent the slip ring assembly 1610 ′ from rotating relative to the mounting hub 1241 ′.
- the electrical component 1800 ′ is mounted within the nozzle 1201 for rotation about the slip ring assembly 1610 ′ such that: contact 1802 ′ is in constant electrical contact with the first annular electrically-conductive path 1700 ; contact 1804 ′ is in constant electrical contact with the second annular electrically-conductive path 1702 ; contact 1806 ′ is in constant electrical contact with the third annular electrically-conductive path 1704 ; and contact 1808 ′ is in constant electrical contact with the fourth electrically-conductive path 1706 .
- slip ring connector 1600 ′ may also be obtained in applications wherein the slip ring assembly 1610 ′ is supported for rotation about the shaft axis SA-SA and the electrical component 1800 ′ is fixedly mounted relative thereto. It will be further appreciated that the slip ring connector 1600 ′ may be effectively employed in connection with a variety of different components and applications outside the field of surgery wherein it is desirable to provide electrical connections between components that rotate relative to each other.
- the slip ring connector 1600 ′ comprises a radial slip ring that provides a conductive contact means of passing signal(s) and power to and from any radial position and after shaft rotation.
- the electrical component comprises a battery contact
- the battery contact position can be situated relative to the mounting member to minimize any tolerance stack-up between those components.
- the slip ring connector 1600 ′ represents a low cost coupling arrangement that can be assembled with minimal manufacturing costs.
- the gold plated traces may also minimize the likelihood of corrosion.
- the unique and novel contact arrangement facilitates complete clockwise and counterclockwise rotation about the shaft axis while remaining in electrical contact with the corresponding annular electrically-conductive paths.
- FIGS. 26-30 depict another form of electric coupler or slip ring connector 1600 ′′ that may be employed with, for example an interchangeable shaft assembly 1200 ′′ or a variety of other applications that require electrical connections between components that rotate relative to each other.
- the shaft assembly 1200 ′′ may be similar to shaft assemblies 1200 and/or 1200 ′ described herein except for the differences noted below.
- the shaft assembly 1200 ′′ may include a closure tube or outer shaft 1260 and a proximal nozzle 1201 (the upper half of nozzle 1201 is omitted for clarity).
- the outer shaft 1260 is mounted on a shaft spine 1210 such that the outer tube 1260 may be selectively axially movable thereon.
- the proximal ends of the shaft spine 1210 and the outer tube 1260 may be rotatably coupled to a chassis 1240 ′′ for rotation relative thereto about a shaft axis SA-SA.
- the proximal nozzle 1201 may include mounts or mounting lugs that protrude inwardly from the nozzle portions and extend through corresponding openings 1266 in the outer tube 1260 to be seated in corresponding recesses 1211 in the shaft spine 1210 .
- conductors such as wires and/or traces (not shown) may be received or mounted within the outer tube 1260 or could even be routed along the outer tube 1260 from the sensors to a distal electrical component 1800 ′′′ mounted within the nozzle 1201 .
- the electrical component 1800 ′′ is mounted in the nozzle 1201 such that it is substantially aligned with the shaft axis SA-SA.
- the distal electrical component 1800 ′′ is rotatable about the shaft axis SA-SA with the nozzle 1201 and the wires/traces attached thereto.
- the electrical component 1800 ′′ may comprise a connector, a battery, etc. that includes four contacts 1802 ′′, 1804 ′′, 1806 ′′, 1808 ′′ that are laterally displaced from each other.
- the slip ring connector 1600 ′′ further includes a slip ring assembly 1610 ′′ that includes a base ring 1900 that is fabricated from a non-electrically conductive material and has a central mounting bore 1902 therethrough.
- the mounting bore 1902 has a flat surface 1904 and is configured for non-rotational attachment to a mounting flange assembly 1930 that is supported at a distal end of the chassis 1240 ′′.
- a distal side 1905 of the base ring 1900 has a series of concentric electrical-conductive rings 1906 , 1908 , 1910 , and 1912 attached or laminated thereto.
- the rings 1906 , 1908 , 1910 , and 1912 may be attached to the base ring 1900 by any suitable method.
- the base ring 1900 may further include a circuit trace extending therethrough that is coupled to each of the electrically-conductive rings 1906 , 1908 , 1910 , and 1912 .
- a first circuit trace 1922 extends through a first hole 1920 in the base ring 1900 and is coupled to the first electrically conductive ring 1906 .
- the first circuit trace 1922 terminates in a first proximal contact portion 1924 on the proximal side 1907 of the base ring 1900 . See FIG. 30 .
- a second circuit trace 1928 extends through a second hole 1926 in the base ring 1900 and is coupled to the second electrically-conductive ring 1908 .
- the second circuit trace 1928 terminates in a second proximal contact 1930 on the proximal side 1907 of the base ring 1900 .
- a third circuit trace 1934 extends through a third hole 1932 in the base ring and is attached to the third electrically-conductive ring 1910 .
- the third circuit trace 1934 terminates in a third proximal contact 1936 on the proximal side 1907 of the base ring.
- a fourth circuit trace 1940 extends through a fourth hole 1938 in the base ring 1900 to be attached to the fourth electrically-conductive ring 1912 .
- the fourth circuit trace 1940 terminates in a fourth proximal contact 1942 on the proximal side 1907 of the base ring 1900 .
- the base ring 1900 is configured to be non-rotatably supported within the nozzle 1201 by a mounting flange 1950 that is non-rotatably coupled to the mounting hub portion 1241 ′′ of the chassis 1240 ′′.
- the mounting hub portion 1241 ′′ may be formed with a flat surface 1243 ′′ for supporting a transverse mounting member of the type, for example, described above that includes a plurality (preferably four) leads that may be coupled to, for example, a circuit board or other corresponding electrical components supported on the chassis in the various manners and arrangements described herein as well as in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541.
- the mounting flange 1950 has a notch 1952 therein that is adapted to engage a portion of the flat surface 1243 ′′ on the mounting hub portion 1241 ′′.
- the mounting flange 1950 may further include a flange hub portion 1954 that comprises a series of spring tabs 1956 that serve to fixedly attach the base ring 1900 to the mounting flange 1950 .
- the closure tube 1260 and spine 1210 extend through the flange hub 1954 and are rotatable relative thereto with the nozzle 1201 .
- the electrical component 1800 ′′ is mounted within the nozzle 1201 for rotation about the slip ring assembly 1610 ′′ such that, for example, contact 1802 ′′ in the component 1800 ′′ is in constant electrical contact with rings 1906 ; contact 1804 ′′ is in contact with ring 1908 ; contact 1806 ′′ is in contact with ring 1910 ; and contact 1808 ′′ is in contact with ring 1912 even when the nozzle 1201 is rotated relative to the chassis 1240 ′′.
- the various advantages of the slip ring connector 1600 ′′ may also be obtained in applications wherein the slip ring assembly 1610 ′′ is supported for rotation about the shaft axis SA-SA and the electrical component 1800 ′′ is fixedly mounted relative thereto.
- the slip ring connector 1600 ′′ may be effectively employed in connection with a variety of different components and applications outside the field of surgery wherein it is desirable to provide electrical connections between components that rotate relative to each other.
- the slip ring connector 1600 ′′ comprises a radial slip ring that provides a conductive contact means of passing signal(s) and power to and from any radial position and after shaft rotation.
- the electrical component comprises a battery contact
- the battery contact position can be situated relative to the mounting member to minimize any tolerance stack-up between those components.
- the slip ring connector 1600 ′′ represents a low cost and compact coupling arrangement that can be assembled with minimal manufacturing costs.
- the unique and novel contact arrangement facilitates complete clockwise and counterclockwise rotation about the shaft axis while remaining in electrical contact with the corresponding annular electrically-conductive rings.
- FIGS. 31-36 generally depict a motor-driven surgical fastening and cutting instrument 2000 .
- the surgical instrument 2000 may include a handle assembly 2002 , a shaft assembly 2004 , and a power assembly 2006 (or “power source” or “power pack”).
- the shaft assembly 2004 may include an end effector 2008 which, in certain circumstances, can be configured to act as an endocutter for clamping, severing, and/or stapling tissue, although, in other instances, different types of end effectors may be used, such as end effectors for other types of surgical devices, graspers, cutters, staplers, clip appliers, access devices, drug/gene therapy devices, ultrasound devices, RF device, and/or laser devices, for example.
- the handle assembly 2002 can be employed with a plurality of interchangeable shaft assemblies such as, for example, the shaft assembly 2004 .
- Such interchangeable shaft assemblies may comprise surgical end effectors such as, for example, the end effector 2008 that can be configured to perform one or more surgical tasks or procedures.
- suitable interchangeable shaft assemblies are disclosed in U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/782,866, entitled CONTROL SYSTEM OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, filed Mar. 14, 2013.
- the entire disclosure of U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/782,866, entitled CONTROL SYSTEM OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, filed Mar. 14, 2013, is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
- the handle assembly 2002 may comprise a housing 2010 that consists of a handle 2012 that may be configured to be grasped, manipulated and actuated by a clinician.
- housing also may encompass a housing or similar portion of a robotic system that houses or otherwise operably supports at least one drive system that is configured to generate and apply at least one control motion which could be used to actuate the interchangeable shaft assemblies disclosed herein and their respective equivalents.
- the interchangeable shaft assemblies disclosed herein may be employed with various robotic systems, instruments, components and methods disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser.
- the handle assembly 2002 may operably support a plurality of drive systems therein that can be configured to generate and apply various control motions to corresponding portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly that is operably attached thereto.
- the handle assembly 2002 can operably support a first or closure drive system, which may be employed to apply closing and opening motions to the shaft assembly 2004 while operably attached or coupled to the handle assembly 2002 .
- the handle assembly 2002 may operably support a firing drive system that can be configured to apply firing motions to corresponding portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly attached thereto.
- the handle assembly 2002 may include a motor 2014 which can be controlled by a motor driver 2015 and can be employed by the firing system of the surgical instrument 2000 .
- the motor 2014 may be a DC brushed driving motor having a maximum rotation of, approximately, 25,000 RPM, for example.
- the motor 2014 may include a brushless motor, a cordless motor, a synchronous motor, a stepper motor, or any other suitable electric motor.
- the motor driver 2015 may comprise an H-Bridge FETs 2019, as illustrated in FIGS. 33A and 33B , for example.
- the motor 2014 can be powered by the power assembly 2006 ( FIG.
- the power assembly 2006 may comprise a battery 2007 ( FIG. 36 ) which may include a number of battery cells connected in series that can be used as the power source to power the surgical instrument 2000 .
- the power assembly 2006 may be referred to as a battery pack.
- the battery cells of the power assembly 2006 may be replaceable and/or rechargeable.
- the battery cells can be Lithium-Ion batteries which can be separably couplable to the power assembly 2006 .
- the electric motor 2014 can include a rotatable shaft (not shown) that may operably interface with a gear reducer assembly that can be mounted in meshing engagement with a set, or rack, of drive teeth on a longitudinally-movable drive member.
- a voltage polarity provided by the battery 2007 ( FIG. 36 ) can operate the electric motor 2014 to drive the longitudinally-movable drive member to effectuate the end effector 2008 .
- the motor 2014 can be configured to drive the longitudinally-movable drive member to advance a firing mechanism to fire staples into tissue captured by the end effector 2008 from a staple cartridge assembled with the end effector 2008 and/or advance a cutting member 2011 ( FIG. 34 ) to cut tissue captured by the end effector 2008 , for example.
- the surgical instrument 2000 may comprise a lockout mechanism to prevent a user from coupling incompatible handle assemblies and power assemblies.
- the power assembly 2006 may include a mating element 2011 .
- the mating element 2011 can be a tab extending from the power assembly 2006 .
- the handle assembly 2002 may comprise a corresponding mating element (not shown) for mating engagement with the mating element 2011 .
- Such an arrangement can be useful in preventing a user from coupling incompatible handle assemblies and power assemblies.
- the power assembly 2006 can be configured to meet the power requirements of various interchangeable shaft assemblies.
- the cutting member 2011 of the shaft assembly 2004 can be configured to travel a distance D 1 along the end effector 2008 .
- another interchangeable shaft assembly 2004 ′ may include a cutting member 2011 ′ which can be configured to travel a distance D 2 , different from the distance D 1 , along an end effector 2008 ′ of the interchangeable shaft assembly 2004 ′.
- the power assembly 2006 can be configured to provide a first power output sufficient to power the motor 2014 to advance the cutting member 2011 the distance D 1 while the interchangeable shaft assembly 2004 is coupled to the handle assembly 2002 and can be configured to provide a second power output, different from the first power output, which is sufficient to power the motor 2014 to advance the cutting member 2011 ′ the distance D 2 while the interchangeable shaft assembly 2004 ′ is coupled to the handle assembly 2002 , for example.
- the power assembly 2006 may include a power management controller 2016 ( FIG.
- the handle assembly 2002 can be releasably coupled or attached to an interchangeable shaft assembly such as, for example, the shaft assembly 2004 .
- the handle assembly 2002 can be releasably coupled or attached to the power assembly 2006 .
- Various coupling means can be utilized to releasably couple the handle assembly 2002 to the shaft assembly 2004 and/or to the power assembly 2006 .
- Exemplary coupling mechanisms are described in U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/782,866, entitled CONTROL SYSTEM OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, and filed Mar. 14, 2013.
- the shaft assembly 2004 may include a shaft attachment module 2018 ( FIG.
- a latch actuator assembly may be configured to cooperate with a lock yoke that is pivotally coupled to the shaft attachment module 2018 for selective pivotal travel relative thereto, wherein the lock yoke may include proximally protruding lock lugs that are configured for releasable engagement with corresponding lock detents or grooves formed in a hand assembly attachment module 2020 of the handle assembly 2002 .
- the shaft assembly 2004 may include a shaft assembly controller 2022 which can communicate with the power management controller 2016 through an interface 2024 while the shaft assembly 2004 and the power assembly 2006 are coupled to the handle assembly 2002 .
- the interface 2024 may comprise a first interface portion 2025 which may include one or more electric connectors 2026 for coupling engagement with corresponding shaft assembly electric connectors 2028 and a second interface portion 2027 which may include one or more electric connectors 2030 for coupling engagement with corresponding power assembly electric connectors 2032 to permit electrical communication between the shaft assembly controller 2022 and the power management controller 2016 while the shaft assembly 2004 and the power assembly 2006 are coupled to the handle assembly 2002 .
- One or more communication signals can be transmitted through the interface 2024 to communicate one or more of the power requirements of the attached interchangeable shaft assembly 2004 to the power management controller 2016 .
- the power management controller may modulate the power output of the battery 2007 of the power assembly 2006 , as described below in greater detail, in accordance with the power requirements of the attached shaft assembly 2004 .
- one or more of the electric connectors 2026 , 2028 , 2030 , and/or 2032 may comprise switches which can be activated after mechanical coupling engagement of the handle assembly 2002 to the shaft assembly 2004 and/or to the power assembly 2006 to allow electrical communication between the shaft assembly controller 2022 and the power management controller 2016 .
- the interface 2024 can facilitate transmission of the one or more communication signals between the power management controller 2016 and the shaft assembly controller 2022 by routing such communication signals through a main controller 2017 ( FIGS. 33A and 33B ) residing in the handle assembly 2002 , for example.
- the interface 2024 can facilitate a direct line of communication between the power management controller 2016 and the shaft assembly controller 2022 through the handle assembly 2002 while the shaft assembly 2004 and the power assembly 2006 are coupled to the handle assembly 2002 .
- the main microcontroller 2017 may be any single core or multicore processor such as those known under the trade name ARM Cortex by Texas Instruments.
- the surgical instrument 2000 may comprise a power management controller 2016 such as, for example, a safety microcontroller platform comprising two microcontroller-based families such as TMS570 and RM4x known under the trade name Hercules ARM Cortex R4, also by Texas Instruments. Nevertheless, other suitable substitutes for microcontrollers and safety processor may be employed, without limitation.
- the safety processor 1004 may be configured specifically for IEC 61508 and ISO 26262 safety critical applications, among others, to provide advanced integrated safety features while delivering scalable performance, connectivity, and memory options.
- the microcontroller 2017 may be an LM 4F230H5QR, available from Texas Instruments, for example.
- the Texas Instruments LM4F230H5QR is an ARM Cortex-M4F Processor Core comprising on-chip memory of 256 KB single-cycle flash memory, or other non-volatile memory, up to 40 MHz, a prefetch buffer to improve performance above 40 MHz, a 32 KB single-cycle serial random access memory (SRAM), internal read-only memory (ROM) loaded with StellarisWare® software, 2 KB electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), one or more pulse width modulation (PWM) modules, one or more quadrature encoder inputs (QEI) analog, one or more 12-bit Analog-to-Digital Converters (ADC) with 12 analog input channels, among other features that are readily available for the product datasheet.
- SRAM serial random access memory
- ROM internal read-only memory
- EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-
- the power assembly 2006 may include a power management circuit 2034 which may comprise the power management controller 2016 , a power modulator 2038 , and a current sense circuit 2036 .
- the power management circuit 2034 can be configured to modulate power output of the battery 2007 based on the power requirements of the shaft assembly 2004 while the shaft assembly 2004 and the power assembly 2006 are coupled to the handle assembly 2002 .
- the power management controller 2016 can be programmed to control the power modulator 2038 of the power output of the power assembly 2006 and the current sense circuit 2036 can be employed to monitor power output of the power assembly 2006 to provide feedback to the power management controller 2016 about the power output of the battery 2007 so that the power management controller 2016 may adjust the power output of the power assembly 2006 to maintain a desired output, as illustrated in FIG. 37 .
- the power management controller 2016 and/or the shaft assembly controller 2022 each may comprise one or more processors and/or memory units which may store a number of software modules. Although certain modules and/or blocks of the surgical instrument 2000 may be described by way of example, it can be appreciated that a greater or lesser number of modules and/or blocks may be used.
- modules and/or blocks may be implemented by one or more hardware components, e.g., processors, Digital Signal Processors (DSPs), Programmable Logic Devices (PLDs), Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), circuits, registers and/or software components, e.g., programs, subroutines, logic and/or combinations of hardware and software components.
- DSPs Digital Signal Processors
- PLDs Programmable Logic Devices
- ASICs Application Specific Integrated Circuits
- registers and/or software components e.g., programs, subroutines, logic and/or combinations of hardware and software components.
- the surgical instrument 2000 may comprise an output device 2042 which may include one or more devices for providing a sensory feedback to a user. Such devices may comprise, for example, visual feedback devices (e.g., an LCD display screen, LED indicators), audio feedback devices (e.g., a speaker, a buzzer) or tactile feedback devices (e.g., haptic actuators).
- the output device 2042 may comprise a display 2043 which may be included in the handle assembly 2002 , as illustrated in FIG. 36 .
- the shaft assembly controller 2022 and/or the power management controller 2016 can provide feedback to a user of the surgical instrument 2000 through the output device 2042 .
- the interface 2024 can be configured to connect the shaft assembly controller 2022 and/or the power management controller 2016 to the output device 2042 .
- the output device 2042 can instead be integrated with the power assembly 2006 . In such circumstances, communication between the output device 2042 and the shaft assembly controller 2022 may be accomplished through the interface 2024 while the shaft assembly 2004 is coupled to the handle assembly 2002 .
- a surgical instrument 2050 is illustrated.
- the surgical instrument 2050 is similar in many respects to the surgical fastening and cutting instrument 2000 ( FIG. 31 ).
- the surgical instrument 2050 may include an end effector 2052 which is similar in many respects to the end effector 2008 .
- the end effector 2052 can be configured to act as an endocutter for clamping, severing, and/or stapling tissue.
- the surgical instrument 2050 may include an interchangeable working assembly 2054 which may include a handle assembly 2053 and a shaft 2055 extending between the handle assembly 2053 and the end effector 2052 , as illustrated in FIG. 38 .
- the surgical instrument 2050 may include a power assembly 2056 which can be employed with a plurality of interchangeable working assemblies such as, for example, the interchangeable working assembly 2054 .
- Such interchangeable working assemblies may include surgical end effectors such as, for example, the end effector 2052 that can be configured to perform one or more surgical tasks or procedures.
- the handle assembly 2053 and the shaft 2055 may be integrated into a single unit. In other circumstances, the handle assembly 2053 and the shaft 2055 may be separably couplable to each other.
- the surgical instrument 2050 may operably support a plurality of drive systems which can be powered by the power assembly 2056 while the power assembly 2056 is coupled to the interchangeable working assembly 2054 .
- the interchangeable working assembly 2054 can operably support a closure drive system, which may be employed to apply closing and opening motions to the end effector 2052 .
- the interchangeable working assembly 2054 may operably support a firing drive system that can be configured to apply firing motions to the end effector 2052 . Examples of drive systems suitable for use with the surgical instrument 2050 are described in U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/782,866, entitled CONTROL SYSTEM OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, and filed Mar. 14, 2013, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
- the power assembly 2056 of the surgical instrument 2050 can be separably coupled to an interchangeable working assembly such as, for example, the interchangeable working assembly 2054 .
- Various coupling means can be utilized to releasably couple the power assembly 2056 to the interchangeable working assembly 2054 .
- Exemplary coupling mechanisms are described herein and are described in U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/782,866, entitled CONTROL SYSTEM OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, and filed Mar. 14, 2013, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
- the power assembly 2056 may include a power source 2058 such as, for example, a battery which can be configured to power the interchangeable working assembly 2054 while coupled to the power assembly 2056 .
- the power assembly 2056 may include a memory 2060 which can be configured to receive and store information about the battery 2058 and/or the interchangeable working assembly 2054 such as, for example, the state of charge of the battery 2058 , the number of treatment cycles performed using the battery 2058 , and/or identification information for the interchangeable working assemblies coupled to the power assembly 2056 during the life cycle of the battery 2058 .
- the interchangeable working assembly 2054 may include a controller 2062 which can be configured to provide the memory 2060 with such information about the battery 2058 and/or the interchangeable working assembly 2054 .
- the power assembly 2056 may include an interface 2064 which can be configured to facilitate electrical communication between the memory 2060 of the power assembly 2056 and a controller of an interchangeable working assembly that is coupled to the power assembly 2056 such as, for example, the controller 2062 of the interchangeable working assembly 2054 .
- the interface 2064 may comprise one or more connectors 2066 for coupling engagement with corresponding working assembly connectors 2068 to permit electrical communication between the controller 2062 and the memory 2060 while the interchangeable working assembly 2054 is coupled to the power assembly 2056 .
- one or more of the electric connectors 2066 and/or 2068 may comprise switches which can be activated after coupling engagement of the interchangeable working assembly 2054 and the power assembly 2056 to allow electric communication between the controller 2062 and the memory 2060 .
- the power assembly 2056 may include a state of charge monitoring circuit 2070 .
- the state of charge monitoring circuit 2070 may comprise a coulomb counter.
- the controller 2062 can be in communication with the state of charge monitoring circuit 2070 while the interchangeable working assembly 2054 is coupled to the power assembly 2056 .
- the state of charge monitoring circuit 2070 can be operable to provide for accurate monitoring of charge states of the battery 2058 .
- FIG. 40 depicts an exemplary module 2072 for use with a controller of an interchangeable working assembly such as, for example, the controller 2062 of the interchangeable working assembly 2054 while coupled to the power assembly 2056 .
- the controller 2062 may comprise one or more processors and/or memory units which may store a number of software modules such as, for example, the module 2072 .
- certain modules and/or blocks of the surgical instrument 2050 may be described by way of example, it can be appreciated that a greater or lesser number of modules and/or blocks may be used.
- modules and/or blocks may be implemented by one or more hardware components, e.g., processors, DSPs, PLDs, ASICs, circuits, registers and/or software components, e.g., programs, subroutines, logic and/or combinations of hardware and software components.
- hardware components e.g., processors, DSPs, PLDs, ASICs, circuits, registers and/or software components, e.g., programs, subroutines, logic and/or combinations of hardware and software components.
- the interface 2064 may facilitate communication between the controller 2062 and the memory 2060 and/or the state of charge monitoring circuit 2070 to execute the module 2072 , as illustrated in FIG. 40 .
- the controller 2062 of the interchangeable working assembly 2054 may utilize the state of charge monitoring circuit 2070 to measure the state of charge of the battery 2058 .
- the controller 2062 may then access the memory 2060 and determine whether a previous value for the state of charge of the battery 2058 is stored in the memory 2060 . When a previous value is detected, the controller 2060 may compare the measured value to the previously stored value. When the measured value is different from the previously stored value, the controller 2060 may update the previously stored value.
- the controller 2060 may store the measured value into the memory 2060 .
- the controller 2060 may provide visual feedback to a user of the surgical instrument 2050 as to the measured state of charge of the battery 2058 .
- the controller 2060 may display the measured value of the state of charge of the battery 2058 on an LCD display screen which, in some circumstances, can be integrated with the interchangeable working assembly 2054 .
- the module 2072 also can be executed by other controllers upon coupling the interchangeable working assemblies of such other controllers to the power assembly 2056 .
- a user may disconnect the interchangeable working assembly 2054 from the power assembly 2056 .
- the user may then connect another interchangeable working assembly comprising another controller to the power assembly 2056 .
- Such controller may in turn utilize the coulomb counting circuit 2070 to measure the state of charge of the battery 2058 and may then access the memory 2060 and determine whether a previous value for the state of charge of the battery 2058 is stored in the memory 2060 such as, for example, a value entered by the controller 2060 while the interchangeable working assembly 2054 was coupled to the power assembly 2056 .
- the controller may compare the measured value to the previously stored value.
- the controller may update the previously stored value.
- FIG. 41 depicts a surgical instrument 2090 which is similar in many respects to the surgical instrument 2000 ( FIG. 31 ) and/or the surgical instrument 2050 ( FIG. 38 ).
- the surgical instrument 2090 may include an end effector 2092 which is similar in many respects to the end effector 2008 and/or the end effector 2052 .
- the end effector 2092 can be configured to act as an endocutter for clamping, severing, and/or stapling tissue.
- the surgical instrument 2090 may include an interchangeable working assembly 2094 which may include a handle assembly 2093 and a shaft 2095 which may extend between the handle assembly 2093 and the end effector 2092 .
- the surgical instrument 2090 may include a power assembly 2096 which can be employed with a plurality of interchangeable working assemblies such as, for example, the interchangeable working assembly 2094 .
- Such interchangeable working assemblies may comprise surgical end effectors such as, for example, the end effector 2092 that can be configured to perform one or more surgical tasks or procedures.
- the handle assembly 2093 and the shaft 2095 may be integrated into a single unit. In other circumstances, the handle assembly 2093 and the shaft 2095 can be separably couplable to each other.
- the power assembly 2096 of the surgical instrument 2090 can be separably couplable to an interchangeable working assembly such as, for example, the interchangeable working assembly 2094 .
- Various coupling means can be utilized to releasably couple the power assembly 2096 to the interchangeable working assembly 2094 .
- the surgical instrument 2090 may operably support one or more drive systems which can be powered by the power assembly 2096 while the power assembly 2096 is coupled to the interchangeable working assembly 2094 .
- the interchangeable working assembly 2094 may operably support a closure drive system, which may be employed to apply closing and/or opening motions to the end effector 2092 .
- the interchangeable working assembly 2094 may operably support a firing drive system that can be configured to apply firing motions to the end effector 2092 .
- a firing drive system that can be configured to apply firing motions to the end effector 2092 .
- Exemplary drive systems and coupling mechanisms for use with the surgical instrument 2090 are described in greater detail U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/782,866, entitled CONTROL SYSTEM OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, and filed Mar. 14, 2013, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
- the interchangeable working assembly 2094 may include a motor such as, for example, the motor 2014 ( FIG. 44 ) and a motor driver such as, for example, the motor driver 2015 ( FIG. 44 ) which can be employed to motivate the closure drive system and/or the firing drive system of the interchangeable working assembly 2094 , for example.
- the motor 2014 can be powered by a battery 2098 ( FIG. 42 ) which may reside in the power assembly 2096 .
- the battery 2098 may include a number of battery cells connected in series that can be used as a power source to power the motor 2014 .
- the battery cells of the power assembly 2096 may be replaceable and/or rechargeable.
- the battery cells can be Lithium-Ion batteries which can be separably couplable to the power assembly 2096 , for example.
- a voltage polarity provided by the power assembly 2096 can operate the motor 2014 to drive a longitudinally-movable drive member to effectuate the end effector 2092 .
- the motor 2014 can be configured to drive the longitudinally-movable drive member to advance a cutting member to cut tissue captured by the end effector 2092 and/or a firing mechanism to fire staples from a staple cartridge assembled with the end effector 2092 , for example.
- the staples can be fired into tissue captured by the end effector 2092 , for example.
- the interchangeable working assembly 2094 may include a working assembly controller 2102 ( FIGS. 44 and 45 ) and the power assembly 2096 may include a power assembly controller 2100 ( FIGS. 42 and 43 ).
- the working assembly controller 2102 can be configured to generate one or more signals to communicate with the power assembly controller 2100 .
- the working assembly controller 2102 may generate the one or more signals to communicate with the power assembly controller 2100 by modulating power transmission from the power assembly 2096 to the interchangeable working assembly 2094 while the power assembly 2096 is coupled to the interchangeable working assembly 2094 .
- the power assembly controller 2100 can be configured to perform one or more functions in response to receiving the one or more signals generated by the working assembly controller 2102 .
- the interchangeable working assembly 2094 may comprise a power requirement and the working assembly controller 2102 may be configured to generate a signal to instruct the power assembly controller 2100 to select a power output of the battery 2098 in accordance with the power requirement of the interchangeable working assembly 2094 ; the signal can be generated, as described above, by modulating power transmission from the power assembly 2096 to the interchangeable working assembly 2094 while the power assembly 2096 is coupled to the interchangeable working assembly 2094 .
- the power assembly controller 2100 may set the power output of the battery 2098 to accommodate the power requirement of the interchangeable working assembly 2094 .
- various interchangeable working assemblies may be utilized with the power assembly 2096 .
- the various interchangeable working assemblies may comprise various power requirements and may generate signals unique to their power requirements during their coupling engagement with the power assembly 2096 to alert the power assembly controller 2100 to set the power output of the battery 2098 in accordance with their power requirements.
- the power assembly 2096 may include a power modulator control 2106 which may comprise, for example, one or more field-effect transistors (FETs), a Darlington array, an adjustable amplifier, and/or any other power modulator.
- the power assembly controller 2100 may actuate the power modulator control 2106 to set the power output of the battery 2098 to the power requirement of the interchangeable working assembly 2094 in response to the signal generated by working assembly controller 2102 while the interchangeable working assembly 2094 is coupled to the power assembly 2096 .
- FETs field-effect transistors
- the power assembly controller 2100 may actuate the power modulator control 2106 to set the power output of the battery 2098 to the power requirement of the interchangeable working assembly 2094 in response to the signal generated by working assembly controller 2102 while the interchangeable working assembly 2094 is coupled to the power assembly 2096 .
- the power assembly controller 2100 can be configured to monitor power transmission from the power assembly 2096 to the interchangeable working assembly 2094 for the one or more signals generated by the working assembly controller 2102 of the interchangeable working assembly 2094 while he interchangeable working assembly 2094 is coupled to the power assembly 2096 .
- the power assembly controller 2100 may utilize a voltage monitoring mechanism for monitoring the voltage across the battery 2098 to detect the one or more signals generated by the working assembly controller 2102 , for example.
- a voltage conditioner can be utilized to scale the voltage of the battery 2098 to be readable by an Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) of the power assembly controller 2100 .
- the voltage conditioner may comprise a voltage divider 2108 which can create a reference voltage or a low voltage signal proportional to the voltage of the battery 2098 which can be measured and reported to the power assembly controller 2100 through the ADC, for example.
- the power assembly 2096 may comprise a current monitoring mechanism for monitoring current transmitted to the interchangeable working assembly 2094 to detect the one or more signals generated by the working assembly controller 2102 , for example.
- the power assembly 2096 may comprise a current sensor 2110 which can be utilized to monitor current transmitted to the interchangeable working assembly 2094 .
- the monitored current can be reported to the power assembly controller 2100 through an ADC, for example.
- the power assembly controller 2100 may be configured to simultaneously monitor both of the current transmitted to the interchangeable working assembly 2094 and the corresponding voltage across the battery 2098 to detect the one or more signals generated by the working assembly controller 2102 .
- various other mechanisms for monitoring current and/or voltage can be utilized by the power assembly controller 2100 to detect the one or more signals generated by the working assembly controller 2102 ; all such mechanisms are contemplated by the present disclosure.
- the working assembly controller 2102 can be configured to generate the one or more signals for communication with the power assembly controller 2100 by effectuating the motor driver 2015 to modulate the power transmitted to the motor 2014 from the battery 2098 .
- the voltage across the battery 2098 and/or the current drawn from the battery 2098 to power the motor 2014 may form discrete patterns or waveforms that represent the one or more signals.
- the power assembly controller 2100 can be configured to monitor the voltage across the battery 2098 and/or the current drawn from the battery 2098 for the one or more signals generated by the working assembly controller 2102 .
- the power assembly controller 2100 can be configured to perform one or more functions that correspond to the detected signal. In at least one example, upon detecting a first signal, the power assembly controller 2100 can be configured to actuate the power modulator control 2106 to set the power output of the battery 2098 to a first duty cycle. In at least one example, upon detecting a second signal, the power assembly controller 2100 can be configured to actuate the power modulator control 2106 to set the power output of the battery 2098 to a second duty cycle different from the first duty cycle.
- the interchangeable working assembly 2094 may include a power modulation circuit 2012 which may comprise one or more field-effect transistors (FETs) which can be controlled by the working assembly controller 2102 to generate a signal or a waveform recognizable by the power assembly controller 2100 .
- the working assembly controller 2102 may operate the power modulation circuit 2012 to amplify the voltage higher than the voltage of the battery 2098 to trigger a new power mode of the power assembly 2096 , for example.
- the power assembly 2096 may comprise a switch 2104 which can be switchable between an open position and a closed position.
- the switch 2104 can be transitioned from the open position to the closed positioned when the power assembly 2096 is coupled with the interchangeable working assembly 2094 , for example.
- the switch 2104 can be manually transitioned from the open position to the closed position after the power assembly 2096 is coupled with the interchangeable working assembly 2094 , for example. While the switch 2104 is in the open position, components of the power assembly 2096 may draw sufficiently low or no power to retain capacity of the battery 2098 for clinical use.
- the switch 2104 can be a mechanical, reed, hall, or any other suitable switching mechanism.
- the power assembly 2096 may include an optional power supply 2105 which may be configured to provide sufficient power to various components of the power assembly 2096 during use of the battery 2098 .
- the interchangeable working assembly 2094 also may include an optional power supply 2107 which can be configured to provide sufficient power to various components of the interchangeable working assembly 2094 .
- the power assembly 2096 can be coupled to the interchangeable working assembly 2094 .
- the switch 2104 can be transitioned to the closed configuration to electrically connect the interchangeable working assembly 2094 to the power assembly 2096 .
- the interchangeable working assembly 2094 may power up and may, at least initially, draw relatively low current from the battery 2098 .
- the interchangeable working assembly 2094 may draw less than or equal to 1 ampere to power various components of the interchangeable working assembly 2094 .
- the power assembly 2096 also may power up as the switch 2014 is transitioned to the closed position.
- the power assembly controller 2100 may begin to monitor current draw from the interchangeable working assembly 2094 , as described in greater detail above, by monitoring voltage across the battery 2098 and/or current transmission from the battery 2098 to the interchangeable working assembly 2094 , for example.
- the working assembly controller 2102 may employ the motor drive 2015 to pulse power to the motor 2014 in patterns or waveforms of power spikes, for example.
- the working assembly controller 2102 can be configured to communicate with the motor driver 2015 to rapidly switch the direction of motion of the motor 2014 by rapidly switching the voltage polarity across the windings of the motor 2014 to limit the effective current transmission to the motor 2014 resulting from the power spikes.
- the effective motor displacement resulting from the power spikes can be reduced to minimize effective displacement of a drive system of the surgical instrument 2090 that is coupled to the motor 2014 in response to the power spikes.
- the working assembly controller 2102 may communicate with the power assembly controller 2100 by employing the motor driver 2015 to draw power from the battery 2098 in spikes arranged in predetermined packets or groups which can be repeated over predetermined time periods to form patterns detectable by the power assembly controller 2100 .
- the power assembly controller 2100 can be configured to monitor voltage across the battery 2100 for predetermined voltage patterns such as, for example, the voltage pattern 2103 ( FIG. 47A ) and/or predetermined current patterns such as, for example, the current pattern 2109 ( FIG. 47B ) using voltage and/or current monitoring mechanisms as described in greater detail above.
- the power assembly controller 2100 can be configured to perform one or more functions upon detecting of a pattern. The reader will appreciate that the communication between the power assembly controller 2100 and the working assembly controller 2102 via power transmission modulation may reduce the number of connection lines needed between the interchangeable working assembly 2094 and the power assembly 2096 .
- the power assembly 2096 can be employed with various interchangeable working assemblies of multiple generations which may comprise different power requirements. Some of the various interchangeable workings assemblies may comprise communication systems, as described above, while others may lack such communication systems.
- the power assembly 2096 can be utilized with a first generation interchangeable working assembly which lacks the communication system described above.
- the power assembly 2096 can be utilized with a second generation interchangeable working assembly such as, for example, the interchangeable working assembly 2094 which comprises a communication system, as described above.
- the first generation interchangeable working assembly may comprise a first power requirement and the second generation interchangeable working assembly may comprise a second power requirement which can be different from the first power requirement.
- the first power requirement may be less than the second power requirement.
- the power assembly 2096 may comprise a first power mode for use with the first generation interchangeable working assembly and a second power mode for use with the second generation interchangeable working assembly.
- the power assembly 2096 can be configured to operate at a default first power mode corresponding to the power requirement of the first generation interchangeable working assembly.
- the default first power mode of the power assembly 2096 may accommodate the first power requirement of the first generation interchangeable working assembly.
- the working assembly controller 2102 of the interchangeable working assembly 2094 may communicate, as described above, with the power assembly controller 2100 of the power assembly 2096 to switch the power assembly 2096 to the second power mode to accommodate the second power requirement of the interchangeable working assembly 2094 .
- the power assembly 2096 will remain in the default first power mode while connected to the first generation interchangeable working assembly.
- the battery 2098 can be rechargeable. In certain circumstances, it may be desirable to drain the battery 2098 prior to shipping the power assembly 2096 .
- a dedicated drainage circuit can be activated to drain the battery 2098 in preparation for shipping of the power assembly 2096 .
- the battery 2098 can be recharged for use during a surgical procedure. However, the drainage circuit may continue to consume energy from the battery 2098 during clinical use.
- the interchangeable working assembly controller 2102 can be configured to transmit a drainage circuit deactivation signal to the power assembly controller 2100 by modulating power transmission from the battery 2098 to the motor 2014 , as described in greater detail above.
- the power assembly controller 2100 can be programmed to deactivate the drainage circuit to prevent drainage of the battery 2098 by the drainage circuit in response to the drainage circuit deactivation signal, for example.
- various communication signals can be generated by the working assembly controller 2102 to instruct the power assembly controller 2100 to perform various functions while the power assembly 2096 is coupled to the interchangeable working assembly 2094 .
- the power assembly controller 2100 and/or the working assembly controller 2102 may comprise one or more processors and/or memory units which may store a number of software modules.
- modules and/or blocks of the surgical instrument 2050 may be described by way of example, it can be appreciated that a greater or lesser number of modules and/or blocks may be used.
- modules and/or blocks may be implemented by one or more hardware components, e.g., processors, DSPs, PLDs, ASICs, circuits, registers and/or software components, e.g., programs, subroutines, logic and/or combinations of hardware and software components.
- FIG. 48 generally depicts a motor-driven surgical instrument 2200 .
- the surgical instrument 2200 may include a handle assembly 2202 , a shaft assembly 2204 , and a power assembly 2206 (or “power source” or “power pack”).
- the shaft assembly 2204 may include an end effector 2208 which, in certain circumstances, can be configured to act as an endocutter for clamping, severing, and/or stapling tissue, although, in other circumstances, different types of end effectors may be used, such as end effectors for other types of surgical devices, graspers, cutters, staplers, clip appliers, access devices, drug/gene therapy devices, ultrasound, RF and/or laser devices, etc.
- Several RF devices may be found in U.S. Pat.
- the handle assembly 2202 can be separably couplable to the shaft assembly 2204 , for example.
- the handle assembly 2202 can be employed with a plurality of interchangeable shaft assemblies which may comprise surgical end effectors such as, for example, the end effector 2208 that can be configured to perform one or more surgical tasks or procedures.
- one or more of the interchangeable shaft assemblies may employ end effectors that are adapted to support different sizes and types of staple cartridges, have different shaft lengths, sizes, and types, etc. Examples of suitable interchangeable shaft assemblies are disclosed in U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/782,866, entitled CONTROL SYSTEM OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, and filed Mar. 14, 2013, the entire disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
- the handle assembly 2202 may comprise a housing 2210 that consists of a handle 2212 that may be configured to be grasped, manipulated, and/or actuated by a clinician.
- the various unique and novel arrangements of the housing 2210 also may be effectively employed in connection with robotically-controlled surgical systems.
- the term “housing” also may encompass a housing or similar portion of a robotic system that houses or otherwise operably supports at least one drive system that is configured to generate and apply at least one control motion which could be used to actuate the shaft assembly 2204 disclosed herein and its respective equivalents.
- the housing 2210 disclosed herein may be employed with various robotic systems, instruments, components and methods disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No.
- the surgical instrument 2200 may be a surgical fastening and cutting instrument.
- the housing 2210 may operably support one or more drive systems.
- the housing 2210 may support a drive system referred to herein as firing drive system 2214 that is configured to apply firing motions to the end effector 2208 .
- the firing drive system 2214 may employ an electric motor 2216 , which can be located in the handle 2212 , for example.
- the motor 2216 may be a DC brushed driving motor having a maximum rotation of, approximately, 25,000 RPM, for example.
- the motor may include a brushless motor, a cordless motor, a synchronous motor, a stepper motor, or any other suitable electric motor.
- a battery 2218 (or “power source” or “power pack”), such as a Li ion battery, for example, may be coupled to the handle 2212 to supply power to a control circuit board assembly 2220 and ultimately to the motor 2216 .
- the electric motor 2216 can include a rotatable shaft (not shown) that may operably interface with a gear reducer assembly 2222 that may be mounted in meshing engagement with a with a set, or rack, of drive teeth 2224 on a longitudinally-movable drive member 2226 .
- a voltage polarity provided by the battery 2218 can operate the electric motor 2216 in a clockwise direction wherein the voltage polarity applied to the electric motor by the battery 2218 can be reversed in order to operate the electric motor 2216 in a counter-clockwise direction.
- the handle 2212 can include a switch which can be configured to reverse the polarity applied to the electric motor 2216 by the battery 2218 .
- the handle 2212 also can include a sensor that is configured to detect the position of the drive member 2226 and/or the direction in which the drive member 2226 is being moved.
- the longitudinally movable drive member 2226 may include a rack of drive teeth 2224 formed thereon for meshing engagement with the gear reducer assembly 2222 .
- the surgical instrument 2200 may include a manually-actuatable “bailout” assembly 2228 that can be configured to enable a clinician to manually retract the longitudinally movable drive member 2226 when a bailout error is detected such as, for example, when the motor 2216 malfunctions during operation of the surgical instrument 2200 which may cause tissue captured by the end effector 2208 to be trapped.
- the bailout assembly 2228 may include a lever or bailout handle 2230 configured to be manually moved or pivoted into ratcheting engagement with the teeth 2224 in the drive member 2226 .
- the clinician can manually retract the drive member 2226 by using the bailout handle 2230 to ratchet the drive member 2226 in the proximal direction “P”, for example, to release the trapped tissue from the end effector 2208 , for example.
- Exemplary bailout arrangements and other components, arrangements and systems that may be employed with the various instruments disclosed herein are disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No.
- the bailout handle 2230 of the bailout assembly 2228 may reside within the housing 2210 of the handle assembly 2202 .
- access to the bailout handle 2230 can be controlled by a bailout door 2232 .
- the bailout door 2232 can be releasably locked to the housing 2210 to control access to the bailout handle 2230 .
- the bailout door 2232 may include a locking mechanism such as, for example, a snap-type locking mechanism 2234 for locking engagement with the housing 2210 .
- Other locking mechanisms for locking the bailout door 2232 to the housing 2210 are contemplated by the present disclosure.
- a clinician may obtain access to the bailout handle 2230 by unlocking the locking mechanism 2234 and opening the bailout door 2232 .
- the bailout door 2232 can be separably coupled to the housing 2232 and can be detached from the housing 2210 to provide access to the bailout handle 2230 , for example.
- the bailout door 2232 can be pivotally coupled to the housing 2210 via hinges (not shown) and can be pivoted relative to the housing 2210 to provide access to the bailout handle 2230 , for example.
- the bailout door 2232 can be a sliding door which can be slidably movable relative to the housing 2210 to provide access to the bailout handle 2230 .
- the surgical instrument 2200 may include a bailout feedback system 2236 which can be configured to guide and/or provide feedback to a clinician through the various steps of utilizing the bailout assembly 2228 , as described below in greater detail.
- the bailout feedback system 2236 may include a microcontroller 2238 and/or one or more bailout feedback elements.
- the electrical and electronic circuit elements associated with the bailout feedback system 2236 and/or the bailout feedback elements may be supported by the control circuit board assembly 2220 , for example.
- the microcontroller 2238 may generally comprise a memory 2240 and a microprocessor 2242 (“processor”) operationally coupled to the memory 2240 .
- the processor 2242 may control a motor driver 2244 circuit generally utilized to control the position and velocity of the motor 2216 .
- the processor 2242 can signal the motor driver 2244 to stop and/or disable the motor 2216 , as described in greater detail below.
- the processor 2242 may control a separate motor override circuit which may comprise a motor override switch that can stop and/or disable the motor 2216 during operation of the surgical instrument 2200 in response to an override signal from the processor 2242 .
- processor includes any suitable microprocessor, microcontroller, or other basic computing device that incorporates the functions of a computer's central processing unit (CPU) on an integrated circuit or at most a few integrated circuits.
- the processor is a multipurpose, programmable device that accepts digital data as input, processes it according to instructions stored in its memory, and provides results as output. It is an example of sequential digital logic, as it has internal memory. Processors operate on numbers and symbols represented in the binary numeral system.
- the processor 2242 may be any single core or multicore processor such as those known under the trade name ARM Cortex by Texas Instruments.
- the surgical instrument 2200 may comprise a safety processor such as, for example, a safety microcontroller platform comprising two microcontroller-based families such as TMS570 and RM4x known under the trade name Hercules ARM Cortex R4, also by Texas Instruments. Nevertheless, other suitable substitutes for microcontrollers and safety processor may be employed, without limitation.
- the safety processor 1004 may be configured specifically for IEC 61508 and ISO 26262 safety critical applications, among others, to provide advanced integrated safety features while delivering scalable performance, connectivity, and memory options.
- the microcontroller 2238 may be an LM 4F230H5QR, available from Texas Instruments, for example.
- the Texas Instruments LM4F230H5QR is an ARM Cortex-M4F Processor Core comprising on-chip memory 2240 of 256 KB single-cycle flash memory, or other non-volatile memory, up to 40 MHz, a prefetch buffer to improve performance above 40 MHz, a 32 KB single-cycle serial random access memory (SRAM), internal read-only memory (ROM) loaded with StellarisWare® software, 2 KB electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), one or more pulse width modulation (PWM) modules, one or more quadrature encoder inputs (QEI) analog, one or more 12-bit Analog-to-Digital Converters (ADC) with 12 analog input channels, among other features that are readily available for the product datasheet.
- Other microcontrollers may be readily substituted for use in the bailout feedback system 2236 . According
- the bailout feedback system 2236 may include a bailout door feedback element 2246 , for example.
- the bailout door feedback element 2246 can be configured to alert the processor 2242 that the locking mechanism 2234 is unlocked.
- the bailout door feedback element 2246 may comprise a switch circuit (not shown) operably coupled to the processor 2242 ; the switch circuit can be configured to be transitioned to an open configuration when the locking mechanism 2234 is unlocked by a clinician and/or transitioned to a closed configuration when the locking mechanism 2234 is locked by the clinician, for example.
- the bailout door feedback element 2246 may comprise at least one sensor (not shown) operably coupled to the processor 2242 ; the sensor can be configured to be triggered when the locking mechanism 2234 is transitioned to unlocked and/or locked configurations by the clinician, for example.
- the bailout door feedback element 2246 may include other means for detecting the locking and/or unlocking of the locking mechanism 2234 by the clinician.
- the bailout door feedback element 2246 may comprise a switch circuit (not shown) operably coupled to the processor 2242 ; the switch circuit can be configured to be transitioned to an open configuration when the bailout door 2232 is removed or opened, for example, and/or transitioned to a closed configuration when the bailout door 2232 is installed or closed, for example.
- the bailout door feedback element 2246 may comprise at least one sensor (not shown) operably coupled to the processor 2242 ; the sensor can be configured to be triggered when the bailout door 2232 is removed or opened, for example, and/or when the bailout door 2232 is closed or installed, for example.
- the bailout door feedback element 2246 may include other means for detecting the locking and/or unlocking of the locking mechanism 2234 and/or the opening and/or closing of the bailout door 2232 by the clinician.
- the bailout feedback system 2236 may comprise one or more additional feedback elements 2248 which may comprise additional switch circuits and/or sensors in operable communication with the processor 2242 ; the additional switch circuits and/or sensors may be employed by the processor 2242 to measure other parameters associated with the bailout feedback system 2236 .
- the bailout feedback system 2236 may comprise one or more interfaces which may include one or more devices for providing a sensory feedback to a user. Such devices may comprise, for example, visual feedback devices such as display screens and/or LED indicators, for example. In certain instances, such devices may comprise audio feedback devices such as speakers and/or buzzers, for example. In certain instances, such devices may comprise tactile feedback devices such as haptic actuators, for example.
- such devices may comprise combinations of visual feedback devices, audio feedback devices, and/or tactile feedback devices.
- the one or more interfaces may comprise a display 2250 which may be included in the handle assembly 2202 , for example.
- the processor 2242 may employ the display 2250 to alert, guide, and/or provide feedback to a user of the surgical instrument 2200 with regard to performing a manual bailout of the surgical instrument 2200 using the bailout assembly 2228 .
- the bailout feedback system 2236 may comprise one or more embedded applications implemented as firmware, software, hardware, or any combination thereof. In certain instances, the bailout feedback system 2236 may comprise various executable modules such as software, programs, data, drivers, and/or application program interfaces (APIs), for example.
- FIG. 52 depicts an exemplary module 2252 that can be stored in the memory 2240 , for example. The module 2252 can be executed by the processor 2242 , for example, to alert, guide, and/or provide feedback to a user of the surgical instrument 2200 with regard to performing a manual bailout of the surgical instrument 2200 using the bailout assembly 2228 .
- the module 2252 may be executed by the processor 2242 to provide the user with instructions as to how to access and/or use the bailout assembly 2228 to perform the manual bailout of the surgical instrument 2200 , for example.
- the module 2252 may comprise one or more decision-making steps such as, for example, a decision-making step 2254 with regard to the detection of one or more errors requiring the manual bailout of the surgical instrument 2200 .
- the processor 2242 may be configured to detect a bailout error in response to the occurrence of one or more intervening events during the normal operation of the surgical instrument 2200 , for example.
- the processor 2242 may be configured to detect a bailout error when one or more bailout error signals are received by the processor 2242 ; the bailout error signals can be communicated to the processor 2242 by other processors and/or sensors of the surgical instrument 2200 , for example.
- a bailout error can be detected by the processor 2242 when a temperature of the surgical instrument 2200 , as detected by a sensor (not shown), exceeds a threshold, for example.
- the surgical instrument 2200 may comprise a positioning system (not shown) for sensing and recording the position of the longitudinally-movable drive member 2226 during a firing stroke of the firing drive system 2214 .
- the processor 2242 can be configured to detect a bailout error when one or more of the recorded positions of the longitudinally-movable drive member 2226 is not are accordance with a predetermined threshold, for example.
- the processor 2242 may respond by stopping and/or disabling the motor 2216 , for example.
- the processor 2242 also may store a bailed out state in the memory 2240 after detecting the bailout error, as illustrated in FIG. 52 .
- the processor 2242 may store in the memory 2240 a status indicating that a bailout error has been detected.
- the memory 2240 can be a non-volatile memory which may preserve the stored status that a bailout error has been detected when the surgical instrument 2200 is reset by the user, for example.
- the motor 2216 can be stopped and/or disabled by disconnecting the battery 2218 from the motor 2216 , for example.
- the processor 2242 may employ the driver 2244 to stop and/or disable the motor 2216 .
- the processor 2242 may employ the motor override circuit to stop and/or disable the motor 2216 .
- stopping and/or disabling the motor 2216 may prevent a user of the surgical instrument 2200 from using the motor 2216 at least until the manual bailout is performed, for example. The reader will appreciate that stopping and/or disabling the motor 2216 in response to the detection of a bailout error can be advantageous in protecting tissue captured by the surgical instrument 2200 .
- the module 2252 may include a decision-making step 2256 for detecting whether the bailout door 2232 is removed.
- the processor 2242 can be operationally coupled to the bailout door feedback element 2246 which can be configured to alert the processor 2242 as to whether the bailout door 2232 is removed.
- the processor 2242 can be programmed to detect that the bailout door 2232 is removed when the bailout door feedback element 2246 reports that the locking mechanism 2234 is unlocked, for example.
- the processor 2242 can be programmed to detect that the bailout door 2232 is removed when the bailout door feedback element 2246 reports that the bailout door 2232 is opened, for example.
- the processor 2242 can be programmed to detect that the bailout door 2232 is removed when the bailout door feedback element 2246 reports that the locking mechanism 2234 is unlocked and that the bailout door 2232 is opened, for example.
- the processor 2242 may not interrupt the normal operation of the surgical instrument 2200 and may proceed with various clinical algorithms.
- the processor 2242 may respond by stopping and/or disabling the motor 2216 , as described above.
- the processor 2242 also may provide the user with instructions to reinstall the bailout door 2232 , as described in greater detail below.
- the processor 2242 when the processor 2242 detects that the bailout door 2232 is reinstalled, while no bailout error is detected, the processor 2242 can be configured to reconnect the power to the motor 2216 and allow the user to continue with clinical algorithms, as illustrated in FIG. 52 .
- the processor 2242 may not reconnect power to the motor 2216 and may continue providing the user with the instructions to reinstall the bailout door 2232 . In certain instances, when the user does not reinstall the bailout door 2232 , the processor 2242 may provide the user with a warning that the bailout door 2232 needs to be reinstalled in order to continue with the normal operation of the surgical instrument 2200 . In certain instances, the surgical instrument 2200 can be equipped with an override mechanism (not shown) to permit the user to reconnect power to the motor 2216 even when the bailout door 2216 is not installed.
- the processor 2242 can be configured to provide the user with a sensory feedback when the processor 2242 detects that the bailout door 2232 is removed. In various instances, the processor 2242 can be configured to provide the user with a sensory feedback when the processor 2242 detects that the bailout door 2232 is reinstalled.
- Various devices can be employed by the processor 2242 to provide the sensory feedback to the user. Such devices may comprise, for example, visual feedback devices such as display screens and/or LED indicators, for example. In certain instances, such devices may comprise audio feedback devices such as speakers and/or buzzers, for example. In certain instances, such devices may comprise tactile feedback devices such as haptic actuators, for example. In certain instances, such devices may comprise combinations of visual feedback devices, audio feedback devices, and/or tactile feedback devices.
- the processor 2242 may employ the display 2250 to instruct the user to reinstall the bailout door 2232 .
- the processor 2242 may present an alert symbol next to an image of the bailout door 2232 to the user through the display 2250 , for example.
- the processor 2242 may present an animated image of the bailout door 2232 being installed, for example.
- Other images, symbols, and/or words can be displayed through the display 2250 to alert the user of the surgical instrument 2200 to reinstall the bailout door 2232 .
- the processor 2242 may signal the user of the surgical instrument 2200 to perform the manual bailout using the bailout handle 2230 .
- the processor 2242 can signal the user to perform the manual bailout by providing the user with a visual, audio, and/or tactile feedback, for example.
- the processor 2242 can signal the user of the surgical instrument 2200 to perform the manual bailout by flashing a backlight of the display 2250 .
- the processor 2242 may then provide the user with instructions to perform the manual bailout.
- the instructions may depend on whether the bailout door 2232 is installed; a decision making step 2258 may determine the type of instructions provided to the user.
- the processor 2242 may provide the user with instructions to remove the bailout door 2232 and instructions to operate the bailout handle 2230 , for example.
- the processor 2242 may provide the user with the instructions to operate the bailout handle 2230 but not the instructions to remove the bailout door 2232 , for example.
- the instructions provided by the processor 2242 to the user to remove the bailout door 2232 and/or to operate the bailout handle 2230 may comprise one or more steps; the steps may be presented to the user in a chronological order.
- the steps may comprise actions to be performed by the user.
- the user may proceed through the steps of the manual bailout by performing the actions presented in each of the steps.
- the actions required in one or more of the steps can be presented to the user in the form of animated images displayed on the display 2250 , for example.
- one or more of the steps can be presented to the user as messages which may include words, symbols, and/or images that guide the user through the manual bailout.
- one or more of the steps of performing the manual bailout can be combined in one or more messages, for example.
- each message may comprise a separate step, for example.
- the steps and/or the messages providing the instructions for the manual bailout can be presented to the user in predetermined time intervals to allow the user sufficient time to comply with the presented steps and/or messages, for example.
- the processor 2242 can be programed to continue presenting a step and/or a message until feedback is received by the processor 2242 that the step has been performed.
- the feedback can be provided to the processor 2242 by the bailout door feedback element 2246 , for example.
- Other mechanisms and/or sensors can be employed by the processor 2242 to obtain feedback that a step has been completed.
- the user can be instructed to alert that processor 2242 when a step is completed by pressing an alert button, for example.
- the display 2250 may comprise a capacitive screen which may provide the user with an interface to alert the processor 2242 when a step is completed. For example, the user may press the capacitive screen to move to the next step of the manual bailout instructions after a current step is completed.
- the processor 2242 can be configured to employ the display 2250 to present an animated image 2260 depicting a hand moving toward the bailout door 2232 .
- the processor 2242 may continue to display the animated image 2260 for a time interval sufficient for the user to engage the bailout door 2232 , for example.
- the processor 2242 may then replace the animated image 2260 with an animated image 2262 depicting a finger engaging the bailout door locking mechanism 2234 , for example.
- the processor 2242 may continue to display the animated image 2262 for a time interval sufficient for the user to unlock the locking mechanism 2234 , for example.
- the processor 2242 may continue to display the animated image 2262 until the bailout door feedback element 2246 reports that the locking mechanism 2234 is unlocked, for example. In certain instances, the processor 2242 may continue to display the animated image 2262 until the user alerts the processor 2242 that the step of unlocking the locking mechanism 2234 is completed.
- the processor 2242 may then replace the animated image 2262 with an animated image 2264 depicting a finger removing the bailout door 2232 , for example.
- the processor 2242 may continue to display the animated image 2264 for a time interval sufficient for the user to remove the bailout door 2232 , for example.
- the processor 2242 may continue to display the animated image 2264 until the bailout door feedback element 2246 reports that the bailout door 2232 is removed, for example.
- the processor 2242 may continue to display the animated image 2264 until the user alerts the processor 2242 that the step of removing the bailout door 2232 has been removed, for example.
- the processor 2242 can be configured to continue to repeat displaying the animated images 2260 , 2262 , and 2246 in their respective order when the processor 2242 continues to detect that the bailout door is installed at the decision making step 2258 , for example.
- the processor 2242 may proceed to guide the user through the steps of operating the bailout handle 2230 .
- the processor 2242 may replace the animated image 2264 with an animated image 2266 depicting a finger lifting the bailout handle 2230 , for example, into ratcheting engagement with the teeth 2224 in the drive member 2226 , as described above.
- the processor 2242 may continue to display the animated image 2266 for a time interval sufficient for the user to lift the bailout handle 2230 , for example.
- the processor 2242 may continue to display the animated image 2266 until the processor receives feedback that the bailout handle 2230 has been lifted.
- the processor 2242 may continue to display the animated image 2266 until the user alerts the processor 2242 that the step of lifting the bailout handle 2230 has been removed.
- the user can manually retract the drive member 2226 by using the bailout handle 2230 to ratchet the drive member 2226 in the proximal direction “P,” for example, to release tissue trapped by the end effector 2208 , for example.
- the processor 2242 may replace the animated image 2266 with an animated image 2268 depicting a finger repeatedly pulling then pushing the bailout handle 2230 , for example, to simulate the ratcheting of the bailout handle 2230 .
- the processor 2242 may continue to display the animated image 2268 for a time interval sufficient for the user to ratchet the drive member 2226 to default position, for example.
- the processor 2242 may continue to display the animated image 2268 until the processor 2242 receives feedback that the drive member 2226 has been retracted.
- FIG. 53 depicts a module 2270 which is similar in many respects to the module 2258 .
- the module 2252 also can be stored in the memory 2240 and/or executed by the processor 2242 , for example, to alert, guide, and/or provide feedback to a user of the surgical instrument 2200 with regard to performing a manual bailout of the surgical instrument 2200 .
- the surgical instrument 2200 may not comprise a bailout door.
- the module 2270 can be employed by the processor 2242 to provide the user with instructions as to how to operate the bailout handle 2230 , for example.
- the processor 2242 may not interrupt the normal operation of the surgical instrument 2200 and may proceed with various clinical algorithms. However, when the processor 2242 detects a bailout error in the decision-making step 2254 of the module 2270 , the processor 2242 may respond by stopping and/or disabling the motor 2216 , for example. In addition, in certain instances, the processor 2242 also may store a bailed out state in the memory 2240 after detecting the bailout error, as illustrated in FIG. 53 .
- the processor 2242 may signal the user of the surgical instrument 2200 to perform the manual bailout, for example, by flashing the backlight of the display 2250 ; the processor 2242 may then proceed directly to providing the user with the instructions to operate the bailout handle 2230 , as described above.
- FIGS. 52 and/or 53 are illustrative examples of the instructions that can be provided to the user of the surgical instrument 2200 to perform a manual bailout.
- the modules 2252 and/or 2270 can be configured to provide more or less steps than those illustrated in FIGS. 52 and 53 .
- the reader will also appreciate that the modules 2252 and/or 2270 are exemplary modules; various other modules can be executed by the processor 2242 to provide the user of the surgical instrument 2200 with instructions to perform the manual bailout.
- the processor 2242 can be configured to present to the user of the surgical instrument 2200 the steps and/or messages for performing a manual bailout in predetermined time intervals.
- time intervals may be the same or may vary depending on the complexity of the task to be performed by the user, for example.
- time intervals can be any time interval in the range of about 1 second, for example, to about 10 minutes, for example.
- time intervals can be any time interval in the range of about 1 second, for example, to about 1 minute, for example.
- Other time intervals are contemplated by the present disclosure.
- a power assembly such as, for example the power assembly 2006 illustrated in FIGS. 31-33B , is configured to monitor the number of uses of the power assembly 2006 and/or a surgical instrument 2000 coupled to the power assembly 2006 .
- the power assembly 2006 maintains a usage cycle count corresponding to the number of uses.
- the power assembly 2006 and/or the surgical instrument 2000 performs one or more actions based on the usage cycle count. For example, in some instances, when the usage cycle count exceeds a predetermined usage limit, the power assembly 2006 and/or a surgical instrument 2000 may disable the power assembly 2006 , disable the surgical instrument 2000 , indicate that a reconditioning or service cycle is required, provide a usage cycle count to an operator and/or a remote system, and/or perform any other suitable action.
- the usage cycle count is determined by any suitable system, such as, for example, a mechanical limiter, a usage cycle circuit, and/or any other suitable system coupled to the battery 2006 and/or the surgical instrument 2000 .
- FIG. 54 illustrates one example of a power assembly 2400 comprising a usage cycle circuit 2402 configured to monitor a usage cycle count of the power assembly 2400 .
- the power assembly 2400 may be coupled to a surgical instrument 2410 .
- the usage cycle circuit 2402 comprises a processor 2404 and a use indicator 2406 .
- the use indicator 2406 is configured to provide a signal to the processor 2404 to indicate a use of the battery back 2400 and/or a surgical instrument 2410 coupled to the power assembly 2400 .
- a “use” may comprise any suitable action, condition, and/or parameter such as, for example, changing a modular component of a surgical instrument 2410 , deploying or firing a disposable component coupled to the surgical instrument 2410 , delivering electrosurgical energy from the surgical instrument 2410 , reconditioning the surgical instrument 2410 and/or the power assembly 2400 , exchanging the power assembly 2400 , recharging the power assembly 2400 , and/or exceeding a safety limitation of the surgical instrument 2410 and/or the battery back 2400 .
- a usage cycle is defined by one or more power assembly 2400 parameters.
- a usage cycle comprises using more than 5% of the total energy available from the power assembly 2400 when the power assembly 2400 is at a full charge level.
- a usage cycle comprises a continuous energy drain from the power assembly 2400 exceeding a predetermined time limit.
- a usage cycle may correspond to five minutes of continuous and/or total energy draw from the power assembly 2400 .
- the power assembly 2400 comprises a usage cycle circuit 2402 having a continuous power draw to maintain one or more components of the usage cycle circuit 2402 , such as, for example, the use indicator 2406 and/or a counter 2408 , in an active state.
- the processor 2404 maintains a usage cycle count.
- the usage cycle count indicates the number of uses detected by the use indicator 2406 for the power assembly 2400 and/or the surgical instrument 2410 .
- the processor 2404 may increment and/or decrement the usage cycle count based on input from the use indicator 2406 .
- the usage cycle count is used to control one or more operations of the power assembly 2400 and/or the surgical instrument 2410 .
- a power assembly 2400 is disabled when the usage cycle count exceeds a predetermined usage limit.
- the instances discussed herein are discussed with respect to incrementing the usage cycle count above a predetermined usage limit, those skilled in the art will recognize that the usage cycle count may start at a predetermined amount and may be decremented by the processor 2404 . In this instance, the processor 2404 initiates and/or prevents one or more operations of the power assembly 2400 when the usage cycle count falls below a predetermined usage limit.
- the usage cycle count is maintained by a counter 2408 .
- the counter 2408 comprises any suitable circuit, such as, for example, a memory module, an analog counter, and/or any circuit configured to maintain a usage cycle count.
- the counter 2408 is formed integrally with the processor 2404 .
- the counter 2408 comprises a separate component, such as, for example, a solid state memory module.
- the usage cycle count is provided to a remote system, such as, for example, a central database.
- the usage cycle count is transmitted by a communications module 2412 to the remote system.
- the communications module 2412 is configured to use any suitable communications medium, such as, for example, wired and/or wireless communication.
- the communications module 2412 is configured to receive one or more instructions from the remote system, such as, for example, a control signal when the usage cycle count exceeds the predetermined usage limit.
- the use indicator 2406 is configured to monitor the number of modular components used with a surgical instrument 2410 coupled to the power assembly 2400 .
- a modular component may comprise, for example, a modular shaft, a modular end effector, and/or any other modular component.
- the use indicator 2406 monitors the use of one or more disposable components, such as, for example, insertion and/or deployment of a staple cartridge within an end effector coupled to the surgical instrument 2410 .
- the use indicator 2406 comprises one or more sensors for detecting the exchange of one or more modular and/or disposable components of the surgical instrument 2410 .
- the use indicator 2406 is configured to monitor single patient surgical procedures performed while the power assembly 2400 is installed.
- the use indicator 2406 may be configured to monitor firings of the surgical instrument 2410 while the power assembly 2400 is coupled to the surgical instrument 2410 .
- a firing may correspond to deployment of a staple cartridge, application of electrosurgical energy, and/or any other suitable surgical event.
- the use indicator 2406 may comprise one or more circuits for measuring the number of firings while the power assembly 2400 is installed.
- the use indicator 2406 provides a signal to the processor 2404 when a single patient procedure is performed and the processor 2404 increments the usage cycle count.
- the use indicator 2406 comprises a circuit configured to monitor one or more parameters of the power source 2414 , such as, for example, a current draw from the power source 2414 .
- the one or more parameters of the power source 2414 correspond to one or more operations performable by the surgical instrument 2410 , such as, for example, a cutting and sealing operation.
- the use indicator 2406 provides the one or more parameters to the processor 2404 , which increments the usage cycle count when the one or more parameters indicate that a procedure has been performed.
- the use indicator 2406 comprises a timing circuit configured to increment a usage cycle count after a predetermined time period.
- the predetermined time period corresponds to a single patient procedure time, which is the time required for an operator to perform a procedure, such as, for example, a cutting and sealing procedure.
- the processor 2404 polls the use indicator 2406 to determine when the single patient procedure time has expired.
- the processor 2404 increments the usage cycle count.
- the processor 2404 resets the timing circuit of the use indicator 2406 .
- the use indicator 2406 comprises a time constant that approximates the single patient procedure time.
- FIG. 55 illustrates one instance of power assembly 2500 comprising a usage cycle circuit 2502 having a resistor-capacitor (RC) timing circuit 2506 .
- the RC timing circuit 2506 comprises a time constant defined by a resistor-capacitor pair.
- the time constant is defined by the values of the resistor 2516 and the capacitor 2518 .
- the processor 2504 may poll the voltage of the capacitor 2518 of the resistor-capacitor pair 2506 . When the voltage of the capacitor 2518 is below a predetermined threshold, the processor 2504 increment the usage cycle count.
- the processor 2504 may be coupled to the RC timing circuit 2506 by, for example, an ND 2520 . After incrementing the usage cycle count, the processor 2504 turns on a transistor 2522 to connect the RC timing circuit 2506 to a power source 2514 to charge the capacitor 2518 of the RC timing circuit 2506 . Once the capacitor 2518 is fully charged, the transistor 2522 is opened and the RC timing circuit 2506 is allowed to discharge, as governed by the time constant, to indicate a subsequent single patient procedure.
- FIG. 56 illustrates one instance of a power assembly 2550 comprising a usage cycle circuit 2552 having a rechargeable battery 2564 and a clock 2560 .
- the rechargeable battery 2564 is charged by the power source 2558 .
- the rechargeable battery 2564 comprises enough power to run the clock 2560 for at least the single patient procedure time.
- the clock 2560 may comprise a real time clock, a processor configured to implement a time function, or any other suitable timing circuit.
- the processor 2554 receives a signal from the clock 2560 and increments the usage cycle count when the clock 2560 indicates that the single patient procedure time has been exceeded.
- the processor 2554 resets the clock 2560 after incrementing the usage cycle count.
- the processor 2554 closes a transistor 2562 to recharge the rechargeable battery 2564 . Once the rechargeable battery 2564 is fully charged, the processor 2554 opens the transistor 2562 , and allows the clock 2560 to run while the rechargeable battery 2564 discharges.
- the use indicator 2406 comprises a sensor configured to monitor one or more environmental conditions experienced by the power assembly 2400 .
- the use indicator 2406 may comprise an accelerometer.
- the accelerometer is configured to monitor acceleration of the power assembly 2400 .
- the power assembly 2400 comprises a maximum acceleration tolerance. Acceleration above a predetermined threshold indicates, for example, that the power assembly 2400 has been dropped.
- the processor 2404 increments a usage cycle count.
- the use indicator 2406 comprises a moisture sensor.
- the moisture sensor is configured to indicate when the power assembly 2400 has been exposed to moisture.
- the moisture sensor may comprise, for example, an immersion sensor configured to indicate when the power assembly 2400 has been fully immersed in a cleaning fluid, a moisture sensor configured to indicate when moisture is in contact with the power assembly 2400 during use, and/or any other suitable moisture sensor.
- the use indicator 2406 comprises a chemical exposure sensor.
- the chemical exposure sensor is configured to indicate when the power assembly 2400 has come into contact with harmful and/or dangerous chemicals. For example, during a sterilization procedure, an inappropriate chemical may be used that leads to degradation of the power assembly 2400 .
- the processor 2404 increments the usage cycle count when the use indicator 2406 detects an inappropriate chemical.
- the usage cycle circuit 2402 is configured to monitor the number of reconditioning cycles experienced by the power assembly 2400 .
- a reconditioning cycle may comprise, for example, a cleaning cycle, a sterilization cycle, a charging cycle, routine and/or preventative maintenance, and/or any other suitable reconditioning cycle.
- the use indicator 2406 is configured to detect a reconditioning cycle.
- the use indicator 2406 may comprise a moisture sensor to detect a cleaning and/or sterilization cycle.
- the usage cycle circuit 2402 monitors the number of reconditioning cycles experienced by the power assembly 2400 and disables the power assembly 2400 after the number of reconditioning cycles exceeds a predetermined threshold.
- the usage cycle circuit 2402 may be configured to monitor the number of power assembly 2400 exchanges.
- the usage cycle circuit 2402 increments the usage cycle count each time the power assembly 2400 is exchanged.
- the usage cycle circuit 2402 locks out the power assembly 2400 and/or the surgical instrument 2410 .
- the usage cycle circuit 2402 identifies the serial number of the power assembly 2400 and locks the power assembly 2400 such that the power assembly 2400 is usable only with the surgical instrument 2410 .
- the usage cycle circuit 2402 increments the usage cycle each time the power assembly 2400 is removed from and/or coupled to the surgical instrument 2410 .
- the usage cycle count corresponds to sterilization of the power assembly 2400 .
- the use indicator 2406 comprises a sensor configured to detect one or more parameters of a sterilization cycle, such as, for example, a temperature parameter, a chemical parameter, a moisture parameter, and/or any other suitable parameter.
- the processor 2404 increments the usage cycle count when a sterilization parameter is detected.
- the usage cycle circuit 2402 disables the power assembly 2400 after a predetermined number of sterilizations. In some instances, the usage cycle circuit 2402 is reset during a sterilization cycle, a voltage sensor to detect a recharge cycle, and/or any suitable sensor.
- the processor 2404 increments the usage cycle count when a reconditioning cycle is detected.
- the usage cycle circuit 2402 is disabled when a sterilization cycle is detected.
- the usage cycle circuit 2402 is reactivated and/or reset when the power assembly 2400 is coupled to the surgical instrument 2410 .
- the use indicator comprises a zero power indicator.
- the zero power indicator changes state during a sterilization cycle and is checked by the processor 2404 when the power assembly 2400 is coupled to a surgical instrument 2410 .
- the processor 2404 increments the usage cycle count.
- a counter 2408 maintains the usage cycle count.
- the counter 2408 comprises a non-volatile memory module.
- the processor 2404 increments the usage cycle count stored in the non-volatile memory module each time a usage cycle is detected.
- the memory module may be accessed by the processor 2404 and/or a control circuit, such as, for example, the control circuit 1100 .
- the processor 2404 disables the power assembly 2400 .
- the usage cycle count is maintained by a plurality of circuit components.
- the counter 2408 comprises a resistor (or fuse) pack.
- a resistor (or fuse) is burned to an open position, changing the resistance of the resistor pack.
- the power assembly 2400 and/or the surgical instrument 2410 reads the remaining resistance.
- the resistor pack has a predetermined resistance, such as, for example, an infinite resistance corresponding to an open circuit, which indicates that the power assembly 2400 has reached its usage limit. In some instances, the resistance of the resistor pack is used to derive the number of uses remaining.
- the usage cycle circuit 2402 prevents further use of the power assembly 2400 and/or the surgical instrument 2410 when the usage cycle count exceeds a predetermined usage limit.
- the usage cycle count associated with the power assembly 2400 is provided to an operator, for example, utilizing a screen formed integrally with the surgical instrument 2410 .
- the surgical instrument 2410 provides an indication to the operator that the usage cycle count has exceeded a predetermined limit for the power assembly 2400 , and prevents further operation of the surgical instrument 2410 .
- the usage cycle circuit 2402 is configured to physically prevent operation when the predetermined usage limit is reached.
- the power assembly 2400 may comprise a shield configured to deploy over contacts of the power assembly 2400 when the usage cycle count exceeds the predetermined usage limit. The shield prevents recharge and use of the power assembly 2400 by covering the electrical connections of the power assembly 2400 .
- the usage cycle circuit 2402 is located at least partially within the surgical instrument 2410 and is configured to maintain a usage cycle count for the surgical instrument 2410 .
- FIG. 54 illustrates one or more components of the usage cycle circuit 2402 within the surgical instrument 2410 in phantom, illustrating the alternative positioning of the usage cycle circuit 2402 .
- the usage cycle circuit 2402 disables and/or prevents operation of the surgical instrument 2410 .
- the usage cycle count is incremented by the usage cycle circuit 2402 when the use indicator 2406 detects a specific event and/or requirement, such as, for example, firing of the surgical instrument 2410 , a predetermined time period corresponding to a single patient procedure time, based on one or more motor parameters of the surgical instrument 2410 , in response to a system diagnostic indicating that one or more predetermined thresholds are met, and/or any other suitable requirement.
- a specific event and/or requirement such as, for example, firing of the surgical instrument 2410 , a predetermined time period corresponding to a single patient procedure time, based on one or more motor parameters of the surgical instrument 2410 , in response to a system diagnostic indicating that one or more predetermined thresholds are met, and/or any other suitable requirement.
- the use indicator 2406 comprises a timing circuit corresponding to a single patient procedure time.
- the use indicator 2406 comprises one or more sensors configured to detect a specific event and/or condition of the surgical instrument 2410 .
- the usage cycle circuit 2402 is configured to prevent operation of the surgical instrument 2410 after the predetermined usage limit is reached.
- the surgical instrument 2410 comprises a visible indicator to indicate when the predetermined usage limit has been reached and/or exceeded.
- a flag such as a red flag
- the usage cycle circuit 2402 may be coupled to a display formed integrally with the surgical instrument 2410 .
- the usage cycle circuit 2402 displays a message indicating that the predetermined usage limit has been exceeded.
- the surgical instrument 2410 may provide an audible indication to the operator that the predetermined usage limit has been exceeded.
- the surgical instrument 2410 emits an audible tone when the predetermined usage limit is exceeded and the power assembly 2400 is removed from the surgical instrument 2410 .
- the audible tone indicates the last use of the surgical instrument 2410 and indicates that the surgical instrument 2410 should be disposed or reconditioned.
- the usage cycle circuit 2402 is configured to transmit the usage cycle count of the surgical instrument 2410 to a remote location, such as, for example, a central database.
- the usage cycle circuit 2402 comprises a communications module 2412 configured to transmit the usage cycle count to the remote location.
- the communications module 2412 may utilize any suitable communications system, such as, for example, wired or wireless communications system.
- the remote location may comprise a central database configured to maintain usage information.
- the power assembly 2400 when the power assembly 2400 is coupled to the surgical instrument 2410 , the power assembly 2400 records a serial number of the surgical instrument 2410 . The serial number is transmitted to the central database, for example, when the power assembly 2400 is coupled to a charger.
- the central database maintains a count corresponding to each use of the surgical instrument 2410 . For example, a bar code associated with the surgical instrument 2410 may be scanned each time the surgical instrument 2410 is used. When the use count exceeds a predetermined usage limit, the central database provides a signal to the surgical instrument 2410 indicating that the surgical instrument 2410 should be discarded.
- the surgical instrument 2410 may be configured to lock and/or prevent operation of the surgical instrument 2410 when the usage cycle count exceeds a predetermined usage limit.
- the surgical instrument 2410 comprises a disposable instrument and is discarded after the usage cycle count exceeds the predetermined usage limit.
- the surgical instrument 2410 comprises a reusable surgical instrument which may be reconditioned after the usage cycle count exceeds the predetermined usage limit.
- the surgical instrument 2410 initiates a reversible lockout after the predetermined usage limit is met. A technician reconditions the surgical instrument 2410 and releases the lockout, for example, utilizing a specialized technician key configured to reset the usage cycle circuit 2402 .
- FIG. 57 illustrates one instance of a combined sterilization and charging system 2600 configured to charge and sterilize a battery 2602 simultaneously.
- the combined sterilization and charging system 2600 comprises a sterilization chamber 2604 .
- a battery 2602 is placed within the sterilization chamber 2604 .
- the battery 2602 is coupled to a surgical instrument.
- a charging cable 2606 is mounted through a wall 2608 of the sterilization chamber 2604 .
- the wall 2608 is sealed around the charging cable 2606 to maintain a sterile environment within the sterilization chamber 2604 during sterilization.
- the charging cable 2606 comprises a first end configured to couple to the power assembly 2602 within the sterilization chamber 2604 and a second end coupled to a battery charger 2610 located outside of the sterilization chamber 2604 . Because the charging cable 2606 passes through the wall 2608 of the sterilization chamber 2604 while maintaining a sterile environment within the sterilization chamber 2604 , the power assembly 2602 may be charged and sterilized simultaneously.
- the charging profile applied by the battery charger 2610 is configured to match the sterilization cycle of the sterilization chamber 2604 .
- a sterilization procedure time is about 28 to 38 minutes.
- the battery charger 2610 is configured to provide a charging profile that charges the battery during the sterilization procedure time.
- the charging profile may extend over a cooling-off period following the sterilization procedure.
- the charging profile may be adjusted by the battery charger 2610 based on feedback from the power assembly 2602 and/or the sterilization chamber 2604 .
- a sensor 2612 is located within the sterilization chamber 2604 .
- the sensor 2612 is configured to monitor one or more characteristics of the sterilization chamber 2604 , such as, for example, chemicals present in the sterilization chamber 2604 , temperature of the sterilization chamber 2604 , and/or any other suitable characteristic of the sterilization chamber 2604 .
- the sensor 2612 is coupled to the battery charger 2610 by a cable 2614 extending through the wall 2608 of the sterilization chamber 2604 .
- the cable 2614 is sealed such that the sterilization chamber 2604 may maintain a sterile environment.
- the battery charger 2610 adjusts the charging profile based on feedback from the sensor 2614 .
- the battery charger 2610 receives temperature data from the sensor 2612 and adjusts the charging profile when the temperature of the sterilization chamber 2604 and/or the power assembly 2602 exceeds a predetermined temperature.
- the battery charger 2610 receives chemical composition information from the sensor 2612 and prevents charging of the power assembly 2602 when a chemical, such as, for example, H 2 O 2 , approaches explosive limits.
- FIG. 58 illustrates one instance of a combination sterilization and charging system 2650 configured for a power assembly 2652 having a battery charger 2660 formed integrally therewith.
- An alternating current (AC) source 2666 is located outside of the sterilization chamber 2654 and is coupled the battery charger 2660 by an AC cable 2656 mounted through a wall 2658 of the sterilization chamber 2654 .
- the wall 2658 is sealed around the AC cable 2656 .
- the battery charger 2660 operates similar to the battery charger 2610 illustrated in FIG. 57 .
- the battery charger 2660 receives feedback from a sensor 2662 located within the sterilization chamber 2654 and coupled to the battery charger 2660 by a cable 2664 .
- a surgical system can include a magnet and a sensor.
- the magnet and the sensor can cooperate to detect various conditions of a fastener cartridge, such as the presence of a fastener cartridge in an end effector of the surgical instrument, the type of fastener cartridge loaded in the end effector, and/or the firing state of a loaded fastener cartridge, for example.
- a jaw 902 of an end effector 900 can comprise a magnet 910 , for example, and a fastener cartridge 920 can comprise a sensor 930 , for example.
- the magnet 910 can be positioned at the distal end 906 of an elongate channel 904 sized and configured to receive the fastener cartridge 920 .
- the sensor 930 can be at least partially embedded or retained in the distal end 926 of the nose 924 of the fastener cartridge 920 , for example.
- the sensor 924 can be in signal communication with the microcontroller of the surgical instrument.
- the sensor 930 can detect the presence of the magnet 910 when the fastener cartridge 920 is positioned in the elongate channel 904 of the jaw 902 .
- the sensor 930 can detect when the fastener cartridge 920 is improperly positioned in the elongate channel 904 and/or not loaded into the elongate channel 904 , for example, and can communicate the cartridge loading state to the microcontroller of the surgical system, for example.
- the magnet 910 can be positioned in the fastener cartridge 920 , for example, and the sensor 930 can be positioned in the end effector 900 , for example.
- the sensor 930 can detect the type of fastener cartridge 920 loaded in the end effector 900 .
- the senor 930 can detect the type of cartridge, e.g., the cartridge length, the number of fasteners and/or the fastener height(s), positioned in the jaw 902 based on the detected magnetic signal. Additionally or alternatively, the sensor 930 can detect if the fastener cartridge 920 is properly seated in the end effector 900 .
- the end effector 900 and the fastener cartridge 920 can comprise a plurality of magnets and/or a plurality of sensors and, in certain instances, the sensor(s) can detect whether the fastener cartridge 920 is properly positioned and/or aligned based on the position of multiple magnets relative to the sensor(s), for example.
- an end effector 3000 can include a plurality of magnets and a plurality of sensors.
- a jaw 3002 can include a plurality of magnets 3010 , 3012 positioned at the distal end 3006 thereof.
- the fastener cartridge 3020 can include a plurality of sensors 3030 , 3032 positioned at the distal end 3026 of the nose 3024 , for example.
- the sensors 3030 , 3032 can detect the presence of the fastener cartridge 3020 in the elongate channel 3004 of the jaw 3002 .
- the sensors 3030 , 3032 can comprise Hall Effect sensors, for example.
- Various sensors are described in U.S. Pat. No.
- a magnet can be positioned on a moveable component of a fastener cartridge.
- a magnet can be positioned on a component of the fastener cartridge that moves during a firing stroke.
- a sensor in the end effector can detect the firing state of the fastener cartridge.
- a magnet 3130 can be positioned on the sled 3122 of a fastener cartridge 3120 .
- a sensor 1110 can be positioned in the jaw 3102 of the end effector 3100 . In various circumstances, the sled 3122 can translate during a firing stroke.
- the sled 3120 can remain at the distal end of the fastener cartridge 3120 after the firing stroke. Stated differently, after the cartridge has been fired, the sled 3120 can remain at the distal end of the fastener cartridge 3120 . Accordingly, the sensor 3110 can detect the position of the magnet 3130 and the corresponding sled 3120 to determine the firing state of the fastener cartridge 3120 . For example, when the sensor 3110 detects the proximal position of the magnet 3130 , the fastener cartridge 3120 can be unfired and ready to fire, for example, and when the sensor 3110 detects the distal position of the magnet 3130 , the fastener cartridge 3120 can be spent, for example. Referring now to FIG.
- a jaw 3202 of an end effector 3200 can include a plurality of sensors 3210 , 3212 .
- a proximal sensor 3212 can be positioned in the proximal portion of the jaw 3202
- a distal sensor 3210 can be positioned in the distal portion of the jaw 3202 , for example.
- the sensors 3210 , 3212 can detect the position of the sled 3122 as the sled 3122 moves during a firing stroke, for example.
- the sensors 3210 , 3212 can comprise Hall Effect sensors, for example.
- an end effector can include a plurality of electrical contacts, which can detect the presence and/or firing state of a fastener cartridge.
- an end effector 3300 can include a jaw 3302 defining a channel 3304 configured to receive a fastener cartridge 3320 .
- the jaw 3302 and the fastener cartridge 3320 can comprise electrical contacts.
- the elongate channel 3304 can define a bottom surface 3306 , and an electrical contact 3310 can be positioned on the bottom surface 3306 .
- a plurality of electrical contacts 3310 can be defined in the elongate channel 3304 .
- the electrical contacts 3310 can form part of a firing-state circuit 3340 , which can be in signal communication with a microcontroller of the surgical system.
- the electrical contacts 3310 can be electrically coupled to and/or in communication with a power supply, and can form electrically active ends of an open circuit, for example.
- one of the electrical contacts 3310 can be powered such that a voltage potential is created intermediate the electrical contacts 3310 .
- one of the contacts can be coupled to an output channel of the microprocessor, for example, which can apply a voltage potential to the contact.
- Another contact can be coupled to an input channel of the microprocessor, for example.
- the electrical contacts 3310 can be insulated from the frame 3306 of the jaw 3302 . Referring still to FIG.
- the fastener cartridge 3320 can also include an electrical contact 3330 , or a plurality of electrical contacts, for example.
- the electrical contact 3330 can be positioned on a moveable element of the fastener cartridge 3320 .
- the electrical contact 3330 can be positioned on the sled 3322 of the fastener cartridge 3320 , and thus, the electrical contact 3330 can move in the fastener cartridge 3320 during a firing stroke.
- the electrical contact 3330 can comprise a metallic bar or plate on the sled 3320 , for example.
- the electrical contact 3330 in the fastener cartridge 3320 can cooperate with the electrical contact(s) 3310 in the end effector 3300 , for example.
- the electrical contact 3330 can contact the electrical contact(s) 3310 when the sled 3322 is positioned in a particular position, or a range of positions, in the fastener cartridge 3320 .
- the electrical contact 3330 can contact the electrical contacts 3310 when the sled 3322 is unfired, and thus, positioned in a proximal position in the fastener cartridge 3320 .
- the electrical contact 3330 can close the circuit between the electrical contacts 3310 , for example.
- the firing-state circuit 3340 can communicate the closed circuit, i.e., the unfired cartridge indication, to the microcontroller of the surgical system.
- the electrical contact 3330 can move out of electrically contact with the electrical contacts 3310 , for example.
- the firing-state circuit 3340 can communicate the open circuit, i.e., the fired cartridge indication, to the microcontroller of the surgical system.
- the microcontroller may only initiate a firing stroke when an unspent cartridge is indicated by the firing-state circuit 3340 , for example.
- the electrical contact 3330 can comprise an electromechanical fuse. In such instances, the fuse can break or short when the sled 3322 is fired through a firing stroke, for example.
- an end effector 3400 can include a jaw 3402 and a cartridge-present circuit 3440 .
- the jaw 3402 can comprise an electrical contact 3410 , or a plurality of electrical contacts 3410 , in an elongate channel 3404 thereof, for example.
- a fastener cartridge 3420 can include an electrical contact 3430 , or a plurality of electrical contacts 3430 , on an outer surface of the fastener cartridge 3420 .
- the electrical contacts 3430 can be positioned and/or mounted to a fixed or stationary component of the fastener cartridge 3420 , for example.
- the electrical contacts 3430 of the fastener cartridge 3420 can contact the electrical contacts 3410 of the end effector 3400 when the fastener cartridge 3420 is loaded into the elongate channel 3404 , for example.
- the cartridge-present circuit 3440 Prior to placement of the fastener cartridge 3420 in the elongate channel 3404 , the cartridge-present circuit 3440 can be an open circuit, for example.
- the electrical contacts 3410 and 3430 can form the closed cartridge-present circuit 3440 .
- the cartridge-present circuit 3440 can comprise a plurality of circuits.
- the cartridge-present circuit 3440 can identify the type of cartridge loaded in the jaw 3402 based on the number and/or arrangement of electrical contacts 3430 on the fastener cartridge 3420 , for example, and the corresponding open and/or closed circuits of the cartridge-present circuit 3440 , for example.
- the electrical contacts 3410 in the jaw 3402 can be in signal communication with the microcontroller of the surgical system.
- the electrical contacts 3410 can be wired to a power source, for example, and/or can communicate with the microcontroller via a wired and/or wireless connection, for example.
- the cartridge-present circuit 3440 can communicate the cartridge presence or absence to the microcontroller of the surgical system.
- a firing stroke may be prevented when the cartridge-present circuit 3440 indicates the absence of a fastener cartridge in the end effector jaw 3402 , for example.
- a firing stroke may be permitted when the cartridge—present circuit 3440 indicates the presence of a fastener cartridge 3420 in the end effector jaw 3402 .
- various sensors, programs, and circuits can detect and measure numerous characteristics of the surgical instrument and/or components thereof, surgical use or operation, and/or the tissue and/or operating site. For example, tissue thickness, the identification of the instrument components, usage and feedback data from surgical functions, and error or fault indications can be detected by the surgical instrument.
- the fastener cartridge can include a nonvolatile memory unit, which can be embedded or removably coupled to the fastener cartridge, for example.
- a nonvolatile memory unit can be in signal communication with the microcontroller via hardware, such as the electrical contacts described herein, radio frequency, or various other suitable forms of data transmission.
- the microcontroller can communicate data and feedback to the nonvolatile memory unit in the fastener cartridge, and thus, the fastener cartridge can store information.
- the information can be securely stored and access thereto can be restricted as suitable and appropriate for the circumstances.
- the nonvolatile memory unit can comprise information regarding the fastener cartridge characteristics and/or the compatibility thereof with various other components of the modular surgical system.
- the nonvolatile memory unit can provide compatibility information to the microcontroller of the surgical system.
- the microcontroller can verify the validity or compatibility of the modular assembly.
- the microcontroller can confirm that the handle component can fire the fastener cartridge and/or that the fastener cartridge appropriate fits the end effector, for example.
- the microcontroller can communicate the compatibility or lack thereof to the operator of the surgical system, and/or may prevent a surgical function if the modular components are incompatible, for example.
- the surgical instrument can include a sensor, which can cooperate with a magnet to detect various characteristics of the surgical instrument, operation, and surgical site.
- the sensor can comprise a Hall Effect sensor and, in other instances, the sensor can comprise a magnetoresistive sensor as depicted in FIGS. 68(A)-68(C) , for example.
- a surgical end effector can comprise a first jaw, which can be configured to receive a fastener cartridge, and a second jaw.
- the first jaw and/or the fastener cartridge can comprise a magnetic element, such as a permanent magnet, for example, and the second jaw can comprise a magnetoresistive sensor, for example.
- the first jaw and/or the fastener cartridge can comprise a magnetoresistive sensor, for example, and the second jaw can comprise a magnetic element.
- the magnetoresistive sensor may have various characteristics listed in the table in FIG. 68(C) , for example, and/or similar specifications, for example.
- the change in resistance caused by movement of the magnetic element relative to the magnetoresistive sensor can affect and/or vary the properties of the magnetic circuit depicted in FIG. 68(B) , for example.
- the magnetoresistive sensor can detect the position of the magnetic element, and thus, can detect the thickness of tissue clamped between the opposing first and second jaws, for example.
- the magnetoresistive sensor can be in signal communication with the microcontroller, and the magnetoresistive sensor can wirelessly transmit data to an antenna in signal communication with the microcontroller, for example.
- a passive circuit can comprise the magnetoresistive sensor.
- the antenna can be positioned in the end effector, and can detect a wireless signal from the magnetoresistive sensor and/or microprocessor operably coupled thereto, for example. In such circumstances, an exposed electrical connection between the end effector comprising the antenna, for example, and the fastener cartridge comprising the magnetoresistive sensor, for example, can be avoided.
- the antenna can be wired and/or in wireless communication with the microcontroller of the surgical instrument.
- Tissue can contain fluid and, when the tissue is compressed, the fluid may be pressed from the compressed tissue.
- tissue when tissue is clamped between opposing jaws of a surgical end effector, fluid may flow and/or be displaced from the clamped tissue.
- Fluid flow or displacement in clamped tissue can depend on various characteristics of the tissue, such as the thickness and/or type of tissue, as well as various characteristics of the surgical operation, such as the desired tissue compression and/or the elapsed clamping time, for example.
- fluid displacement between the opposing jaws of an end effector may contribute to malformation of staples formed between the opposing jaws.
- the displacement of fluid during and/or following staple formation can induce bending and/or other uncontrolled movement of a staple away from its desired or intended formation. Accordingly, in various instances, it may be desirable to control the firing stroke, e.g., to control the firing speed, in relationship to the detected fluid flow, or lack thereof, intermediate opposing jaws of a surgical end effector.
- the fluid displacement in clamped tissue can be determined or approximated by various measurable and/or detectable tissue characteristics.
- the degree of tissue compression can correspond to the degree of fluid displacement in the clamped tissue.
- a higher degree of tissue compression can correspond to more fluid flow, for example, and a reduced degree of tissue compression can correspond to less fluid flow, for example.
- a sensor positioned in the end effector jaws can detect the force exerted on the jaws by the compressed tissue.
- a sensor on or operably associated with the cutting element can detect the resistance on the cutting element as the cutting element is advanced through, and transects, the clamped tissue.
- the detected cutting and/or firing resistance can correspond to the degree of tissue compression.
- tissue compression is high, for example, the cutting element resistance can be greater, and when tissue compression is lower, for example, the cutting element resistance can be reduced.
- the cutting element resistance can indicate the amount of fluid displacement.
- the fluid displacement in clamped tissue can be determined or approximated by the force required to fire the cutting element, i.e., the force-to-fire.
- the force-to-fire can correspond to the cutting element resistance, for example.
- the force-to-fire can be measured or approximated by a microcontroller in signal communication with the electric motor that drives the cutting element. For example, where the cutting element resistance is higher, the electric motor can require more current to drive the cutting element through the tissue. Similarly, if the cutting element resistance is lower, the electric motor can require less current to drive the cutting element through the tissue.
- the microcontroller can detect the amount of current drawn by the electric motor during the firing stroke.
- the microcontroller can include a current sensor, which can detect the current utilized to fire the cutting element through the tissue, for example.
- a surgical instrument assembly or system can be configured to detect the compressive force in the clamped tissue.
- an electric motor can drive the firing element, and a microcontroller can be in signal communication with the electric motor.
- the microcontroller can determine the current drawn by the electric motor, for example.
- the force-to-fire can correspond to the current drawn by the electric motor throughout the firing stroke, as described above.
- the microcontroller of the surgical instrument can determine if the current drawn by the electric motor increases during the firing stroke and, if so, can calculate the percentage increase of the current.
- the microcontroller can compare the current draw increase during the firing stroke to a predefined threshold value.
- the predefined threshold value can be 5%, 10%, 25%, 50% and/or 100%, for example, and the microcontroller can compare the current increase detected during a firing stroke to the predefined threshold value.
- the threshold increase can be a value or range of values between 5% and 100%, and, in still other instances, the threshold increase can be less than 5% or greater than 100%, for example.
- the microcontroller can compare the percentage of current draw change to 50%, for example.
- the microcontroller can determine if the current drawn by the electric motor during the firing stroke exceeds a percentage of the maximum current or a baseline value.
- the microcontroller can determine if the current exceeds 5%, 10%, 25%, 50% and/or 100% of the maximum motor current. In other instances, the microcontroller can compare the current drawn by the electric motor during the firing stroke to a predefined baseline value, for example.
- the microcontroller can utilize an algorithm to determine the change in current drawn by the electric motor during a firing stroke.
- the current sensor can detect the current drawn by the electric motor at various times and/or intervals during the firing stroke.
- the current sensor can continually detect the current drawn by the electric motor and/or can intermittently detect the current draw by the electric motor.
- the algorithm can compare the most recent current reading to the immediately proceeding current reading, for example. Additionally or alternatively, the algorithm can compare a sample reading within a time period X to a previous current reading. For example, the algorithm can compare the sample reading to a previous sample reading within a previous time period X, such as the immediately proceeding time period X, for example. In other instances, the algorithm can calculate the trending average of current drawn by the motor. The algorithm can calculate the average current draw during a time period X that includes the most recent current reading, for example, and can compare that average current draw to the average current draw during an immediately proceeding time period time X, for example.
- the microcontroller can proceed to step 3503 , and the firing speed of the firing element can be reduced.
- the microcontroller can communicate with the electric motor to slow the firing speed of the firing element.
- the firing speed can be reduced by a predefined step unit and/or a predefined percentage.
- the microcontroller can comprise a velocity control module, which can affect changes in the cutting element speed and/or can maintain the cutting element speed.
- the velocity control module can comprise a resistor, a variable resistor, a pulse width modulation circuit, and/or a frequency modulation circuit, for example.
- the microcontroller can proceed to step 3505 , wherein the firing speed of the firing element can be maintained, for example.
- the microcontroller can continue to monitor the current drawn by the electric motor and changes thereto during at least a portion of the firing stroke.
- the microcontroller and/or velocity control module thereof can adjust the firing element velocity throughout the firing stroke in accordance with the detected current draw. In such instances, controlling the firing speed based on the approximated fluid flow or displacement in the clamped tissue, for example, can reduce the incidence of staple malformation in the clamped tissue.
- the microcontroller can adjust the firing element velocity by pausing the firing element for a predefined period of time. For example, similar to the embodiment depicted in FIG. 60 , if the microcontroller detects a current draw that exceeds a predefined threshold value at step 3511 , the microcontroller can proceed to step 3513 and the firing element can be paused. For example, the microcontroller can pause movement and/or translation of the firing element for one second if the current increase measured by the microcontroller exceeds the threshold value. In other instances, the firing stroke can be paused for a fraction of a second and/or more than one second, for example.
- the microcontroller can proceed to step 3515 and the firing element can continue to progress through the firing stroke without adjusting the velocity of the firing element.
- the microcontroller can be configured to pause and slow the firing element during a firing stroke. For example, for a first increase in current draw, the firing element can be paused, and for a second, different increase in current draw, the velocity of the firing element can be reduced.
- the microcontroller can command an increase in the velocity of the firing element if the current draw decreases below a threshold value, for example.
- the surgical instruments described herein may comprise one or more processors (e.g., microprocessor, microcontroller) coupled to various sensors.
- processors e.g., microprocessor, microcontroller
- a storage having operating logic
- communication interface e.g.
- the processor may be configured to execute the operating logic.
- the processor may be any one of a number of single or multi-core processors known in the art.
- the storage may comprise volatile and non-volatile storage media configured to store persistent and temporal (working) copy of the operating logic.
- the operating logic may be configured to process the collected biometric associated with motion data of the user, as described above. In various embodiments, the operating logic may be configured to perform the initial processing, and transmit the data to the computer hosting the application to determine and generate instructions. For these embodiments, the operating logic may be further configured to receive information from and provide feedback to a hosting computer. In alternate embodiments, the operating logic may be configured to assume a larger role in receiving information and determining the feedback. In either case, whether determined on its own or responsive to instructions from a hosting computer, the operating logic may be further configured to control and provide feedback to the user.
- the operating logic may be implemented in instructions supported by the instruction set architecture (ISA) of the processor, or in higher level languages and compiled into the supported ISA.
- the operating logic may comprise one or more logic units or modules.
- the operating logic may be implemented in an object oriented manner.
- the operating logic may be configured to be executed in a multi-tasking and/or multi-thread manner.
- the operating logic may be implemented in hardware such as a gate array.
- the communication interface may be configured to facilitate communication between a peripheral device and the computing system.
- the communication may include transmission of the collected biometric data associated with position, posture, and/or movement data of the user's body part(s) to a hosting computer, and transmission of data associated with the tactile feedback from the host computer to the peripheral device.
- the communication interface may be a wired or a wireless communication interface.
- An example of a wired communication interface may include, but is not limited to, a Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface.
- USB Universal Serial Bus
- An example of a wireless communication interface may include, but is not limited to, a Bluetooth interface.
- the processor may be packaged together with the operating logic. In various embodiments, the processor may be packaged together with the operating logic to form a System in Package (SiP). In various embodiments, the processor may be integrated on the same die with the operating logic. In various embodiments, the processor may be packaged together with the operating logic to form a System on Chip (SoC).
- SiP System in Package
- SoC System on Chip
- Various embodiments may be described herein in the general context of computer executable instructions, such as software, program modules, and/or engines being executed by a processor.
- software, program modules, and/or engines include any software element arranged to perform particular operations or implement particular abstract data types.
- Software, program modules, and/or engines can include routines, programs, objects, components, data structures and the like that perform particular tasks or implement particular abstract data types.
- An implementation of the software, program modules, and/or engines components and techniques may be stored on and/or transmitted across some form of computer-readable media.
- computer-readable media can be any available medium or media useable to store information and accessible by a computing device.
- Some embodiments also may be practiced in distributed computing environments where operations are performed by one or more remote processing devices that are linked through a communications network.
- software, program modules, and/or engines may be located in both local and remote computer storage media including memory storage devices.
- a memory such as a random access memory (RAM) or other dynamic storage device may be employed for storing information and instructions to be executed by the processor.
- the memory also may be used for storing temporary variables or other intermediate information during execution of instructions to be executed by the processor.
- the functional components such as software, engines, and/or modules may be implemented by hardware elements that may include processors, microprocessors, circuits, circuit elements (e.g., transistors, resistors, capacitors, inductors, and so forth), integrated circuits, application specific integrated circuits (ASIC), programmable logic devices (PLD), digital signal processors (DSP), field programmable gate array (FPGA), logic gates, registers, semiconductor device, chips, microchips, chip sets, and so forth.
- processors microprocessors, circuits, circuit elements (e.g., transistors, resistors, capacitors, inductors, and so forth), integrated circuits, application specific integrated circuits (ASIC), programmable logic devices (PLD), digital signal processors (DSP), field programmable gate array (FPGA), logic gates, registers, semiconductor device, chips, microchips, chip sets, and so forth.
- processors microprocessors, circuits, circuit elements (e.g., transistors, resistors, capacitors, inductors
- Examples of software, engines, and/or modules may include software components, programs, applications, computer programs, application programs, system programs, machine programs, operating system software, middleware, firmware, software modules, routines, subroutines, functions, methods, procedures, software interfaces, application program interfaces (API), instruction sets, computing code, computer code, code segments, computer code segments, words, values, symbols, or any combination thereof. Determining whether an embodiment is implemented using hardware elements and/or software elements may vary in accordance with any number of factors, such as desired computational rate, power levels, heat tolerances, processing cycle budget, input data rates, output data rates, memory resources, data bus speeds and other design or performance constraints.
- One or more of the modules described herein may comprise one or more embedded applications implemented as firmware, software, hardware, or any combination thereof.
- One or more of the modules described herein may comprise various executable modules such as software, programs, data, drivers, application program interfaces (APIs), and so forth.
- the firmware may be stored in a memory of the controller 2016 and/or the controller 2022 which may comprise a nonvolatile memory (NVM), such as in bit-masked read-only memory (ROM) or flash memory.
- NVM nonvolatile memory
- ROM bit-masked read-only memory
- flash memory such as in bit-masked read-only memory (ROM) or flash memory.
- storing the firmware in ROM may preserve flash memory.
- the nonvolatile memory may comprise other types of memory including, for example, programmable ROM (PROM), erasable programmable ROM (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM), or battery backed random-access memory (RAM) such as dynamic RAM (DRAM), Double-Data-Rate DRAM (DDRAM), and/or synchronous DRAM (SDRAM).
- PROM programmable ROM
- EPROM erasable programmable ROM
- EEPROM electrically erasable programmable ROM
- RAM battery backed random-access memory
- DRAM dynamic RAM
- DDRAM Double-Data-Rate DRAM
- SDRAM synchronous DRAM
- various embodiments may be implemented as an article of manufacture.
- the article of manufacture may include a computer readable storage medium arranged to store logic, instructions and/or data for performing various operations of one or more embodiments.
- the article of manufacture may comprise a magnetic disk, optical disk, flash memory or firmware containing computer program instructions suitable for execution by a general purpose processor or application specific processor.
- the embodiments are not limited in this context.
- Some embodiments also may be practiced in distributed computing environments where operations are performed by one or more remote processing devices that are linked through a communications network.
- software, control modules, logic, and/or logic modules may be located in both local and remote computer storage media including memory storage devices.
- any reference to “one embodiment” or “an embodiment” means that a particular feature, structure, or characteristic described in connection with the embodiment is comprised in at least one embodiment.
- the appearances of the phrase “in one embodiment” or “in one aspect” in the specification are not necessarily all referring to the same embodiment.
- processing refers to the action and/or processes of a computer or computing system, or similar electronic computing device, such as a general purpose processor, a DSP, ASIC, FPGA or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof designed to perform the functions described herein that manipulates and/or transforms data represented as physical quantities (e.g., electronic) within registers and/or memories into other data similarly represented as physical quantities within the memories, registers or other such information storage, transmission or display devices.
- physical quantities e.g., electronic
- Coupled and “connected” along with their derivatives. These terms are not intended as synonyms for each other. For example, some embodiments may be described using the terms “connected” and/or “coupled” to indicate that two or more elements are in direct physical or electrical contact with each other. The term “coupled,” however, also may mean that two or more elements are not in direct contact with each other, but yet still co-operate or interact with each other. With respect to software elements, for example, the term “coupled” may refer to interfaces, message interfaces, application program interface (API), exchanging messages, and so forth.
- API application program interface
- the disclosed embodiments have application in conventional endoscopic and open surgical instrumentation as well as application in robotic-assisted surgery.
- Embodiments of the devices disclosed herein can be designed to be disposed of after a single use, or they can be designed to be used multiple times. Embodiments may, in either or both cases, be reconditioned for reuse after at least one use. Reconditioning may include any combination of the steps of disassembly of the device, followed by cleaning or replacement of particular pieces, and subsequent reassembly. In particular, embodiments of the device may be disassembled, and any number of the particular pieces or parts of the device may be selectively replaced or removed in any combination. Upon cleaning and/or replacement of particular parts, embodiments of the device may be reassembled for subsequent use either at a reconditioning facility, or by a surgical team immediately prior to a surgical procedure.
- reconditioning of a device may utilize a variety of techniques for disassembly, cleaning/replacement, and reassembly. Use of such techniques, and the resulting reconditioned device, are all within the scope of the present application.
- a new or used instrument may be obtained and when necessary cleaned.
- the instrument may then be sterilized.
- the instrument is placed in a closed and sealed container, such as a plastic or TYVEK bag.
- the container and instrument may then be placed in a field of radiation that can penetrate the container, such as gamma radiation, x-rays, or high-energy electrons.
- the radiation may kill bacteria on the instrument and in the container.
- the sterilized instrument may then be stored in the sterile container.
- the sealed container may keep the instrument sterile until it is opened in a medical facility.
- a device also may be sterilized using any other technique known in the art, including but not limited to beta or gamma radiation, ethylene oxide, or steam.
- any two components so associated also can be viewed as being “operably connected,” or “operably coupled,” to each other to achieve the desired functionality, and any two components capable of being so associated also can be viewed as being “operably couplable,” to each other to achieve the desired functionality.
- operably couplable include but are not limited to physically mateable and/or physically interacting components, and/or wirelessly interactable, and/or wirelessly interacting components, and/or logically interacting, and/or logically interactable components.
- Coupled and “connected” along with their derivatives. It should be understood that these terms are not intended as synonyms for each other. For example, some aspects may be described using the term “connected” to indicate that two or more elements are in direct physical or electrical contact with each other. In another example, some aspects may be described using the term “coupled” to indicate that two or more elements are in direct physical or electrical contact. The term “coupled,” however, also may mean that two or more elements are not in direct contact with each other, but yet still co-operate or interact with each other.
- one or more components may be referred to herein as “configured to,” “configurable to,” “operable/operative to,” “adapted/adaptable,” “able to,” “conformable/conformed to,” etc.
- “configured to” can generally encompass active-state components and/or inactive-state components and/or standby-state components, unless context requires otherwise.
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Epidemiology (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Surgery (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Molecular Biology (AREA)
- Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
- Medical Informatics (AREA)
- Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
- Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
- Electrochemistry (AREA)
- Pathology (AREA)
- Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery (AREA)
- Electromagnetism (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Power Engineering (AREA)
- Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
- Surgical Instruments (AREA)
Abstract
Description
- This application is a continuation application claiming priority under 35 U.S.C. § 120 to U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/587,803, entitled FEEDBACK ALGORITHMS FOR MANUAL BAILOUT SYSTEMS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, filed Sep. 30, 2019, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2020/0093506, which is a continuation application claiming priority under 35 U.S.C. § 120 to U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/041,145, entitled FEEDBACK ALGORITHMS FOR MANUAL BAILOUT SYSTEMS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, filed Jul. 20, 2018, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2018/0333169, which is a continuation application claiming priority under 35 U.S.C. § 120 to U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,093, entitled FEEDBACK ALGORITHMS FOR MANUAL BAILOUT SYSTEMS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, filed Mar. 26, 2014, which issued on Jul. 24, 2018 as U.S. Pat. No. 10,028,761, the entire disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference herein.
- The present invention relates to surgical instruments and, in various circumstances, to surgical stapling and cutting instruments and staple cartridges therefor that are designed to staple and cut tissue.
- The features and advantages of this invention, and the manner of attaining them, will become more apparent and the invention itself will be better understood by reference to the following description of embodiments of the invention taken in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, wherein:
-
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a surgical instrument that has an interchangeable shaft assembly operably coupled thereto; -
FIG. 2 is an exploded assembly view of the interchangeable shaft assembly and surgical instrument ofFIG. 1 ; -
FIG. 3 is another exploded assembly view showing portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly and surgical instrument ofFIGS. 1 and 2 ; -
FIG. 4 is an exploded assembly view of a portion of the surgical instrument ofFIGS. 1-3 ; -
FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional side view of a portion of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 4 with the firing trigger in a fully actuated position; -
FIG. 6 is another cross-sectional view of a portion of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 5 with the firing trigger in an unactuated position; -
FIG. 7 is an exploded assembly view of one form of an interchangeable shaft assembly; -
FIG. 8 is another exploded assembly view of portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly ofFIG. 7 ; -
FIG. 9 is another exploded assembly view of portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly ofFIGS. 7 and 8 ; -
FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of a portion of the interchangeable shaft assembly ofFIGS. 7-9 ; -
FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a portion of the shaft assembly ofFIGS. 7-10 with the switch drum omitted for clarity; -
FIG. 12 is another perspective view of the portion of the interchangeable shaft assembly ofFIG. 11 with the switch drum mounted thereon; -
FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a portion of the interchangeable shaft assembly ofFIG. 11 operably coupled to a portion of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 1 illustrated with the closure trigger thereof in an unactuated position; -
FIG. 14 is a right side elevational view of the interchangeable shaft assembly and surgical instrument ofFIG. 13 ; -
FIG. 15 is a left side elevational view of the interchangeable shaft assembly and surgical instrument ofFIGS. 13 and 14 ; -
FIG. 16 is a perspective view of a portion of the interchangeable shaft assembly ofFIG. 11 operably coupled to a portion of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 1 illustrated with the closure trigger thereof in an actuated position and a firing trigger thereof in an unactuated position; -
FIG. 17 is a right side elevational view of the interchangeable shaft assembly and surgical instrument ofFIG. 16 ; -
FIG. 18 is a left side elevational view of the interchangeable shaft assembly and surgical instrument ofFIGS. 16 and 17 ; -
FIG. 18A is a right side elevational view of the interchangeable shaft assembly ofFIG. 11 operably coupled to a portion of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 1 illustrated with the closure trigger thereof in an actuated position and the firing trigger thereof in an actuated position; -
FIG. 19 is a perspective view of a portion of an interchangeable shaft assembly showing an electrical coupler arrangement; -
FIG. 20 is an exploded assembly view of portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly and electrical coupler ofFIG. 19 ; -
FIG. 21 is a perspective view of circuit trace assembly; -
FIG. 22 is a plan view of a portion of the circuit trace assembly ofFIG. 21 ; -
FIG. 23 is a perspective view of a portion of another interchangeable shaft assembly showing another electrical coupler arrangement; -
FIG. 24 is an exploded assembly view of portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly and electrical coupler ofFIG. 23 ; -
FIG. 25 is an exploded slip ring assembly of the electrical coupler ofFIGS. 23 and 24 ; -
FIG. 26 is a perspective view of a portion of another interchangeable shaft assembly showing another electrical coupler arrangement; -
FIG. 27 is an exploded assembly view of portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly and electrical coupler ofFIG. 26 ; -
FIG. 28 is a front perspective view of a portion of the slip ring assembly of the electrical coupler ofFIGS. 26 and 27 ; -
FIG. 29 is an exploded assembly view of the slip ring assembly portion ofFIG. 28 ; and -
FIG. 30 is a rear perspective view of the portion of slip ring assembly ofFIGS. 28 and 29 . -
FIG. 31 is a perspective view of a surgical instrument comprising a power assembly, a handle assembly, and an interchangeable shaft assembly; -
FIG. 32 is perspective view of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 31 with the interchangeable shaft assembly separated from the handle assembly; -
FIG. 33 , which is divided intoFIGS. 33A and 33B , is a circuit diagram of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 31 ; -
FIG. 34 is a block diagram of interchangeable shaft assemblies for use with the surgical instrument ofFIG. 31 ; -
FIG. 35 is a perspective view of the power assembly of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 31 separated from the handle assembly; -
FIG. 36 is a block diagram the surgical instrument ofFIG. 31 illustrating interfaces between the handle assembly and the power assembly and between the handle assembly and the interchangeable shaft assembly; -
FIG. 37 is a power management module of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 31 ; -
FIG. 38 is a perspective view of a surgical instrument comprising a power assembly and an interchangeable working assembly assembled with the power assembly; -
FIG. 39 is a block diagram of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 38 illustrating an interface between the interchangeable working assembly and the power assembly; -
FIG. 40 is a block diagram illustrating a module of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 38 ; -
FIG. 41 is a perspective view of a surgical instrument comprising a power assembly and a interchangeable working assembly assembled with the power assembly; -
FIG. 42 is a circuit diagram of an exemplary power assembly of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 41 ; -
FIG. 43 is a circuit diagram of an exemplary power assembly of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 41 ; -
FIG. 44 is a circuit diagram of an exemplary interchangeable working assembly of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 41 ; -
FIG. 45 is a circuit diagram of an exemplary interchangeable working assembly of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 41 ; -
FIG. 46 is a block diagram depicting an exemplary module of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 41 ; -
FIG. 47A is a graphical representation of an exemplary communication signal generated by a working assembly controller of the interchangeable working assembly of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 41 as detected by a voltage monitoring mechanism; -
FIG. 47B is a graphical representation of an exemplary communication signal generated by a working assembly controller of the interchangeable working assembly of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 41 as detected by a current monitoring mechanism; and -
FIG. 47C is a graphical representation of effective motor displacement of a motor of the interchangeable working assembly ofFIG. 41 in response to the communication signal generated by the working assembly controller ofFIG. 47A . -
FIG. 48 is a perspective view of a surgical instrument comprising a handle assembly and a shaft assembly including an end effector; -
FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the handle assembly of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 48 ; -
FIG. 50 is an exploded view of the handle assembly of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 48 ; -
FIG. 51 is a schematic diagram of a bailout feedback system of the surgical instrument ofFIG. 48 ; -
FIG. 52 is a block diagram of a module for use with the bailout feedback system ofFIG. 51 ; -
FIG. 53 is a block diagram of a module for use with the bailout feedback system ofFIG. 51 ; -
FIG. 54 illustrates one instance of a power assembly comprising a usage cycle circuit configured to generate a usage cycle count of the battery back; -
FIG. 55 illustrates one instance of a usage cycle circuit comprising a resistor-capacitor timer; -
FIG. 56 illustrates one instance of a usage cycle circuit comprising a timer and a rechargeable battery; -
FIG. 57 illustrates one instance of a combination sterilization and charging system configured to sterilize and charge a power assembly simultaneously; -
FIG. 58 illustrates one instance of a combination sterilization and charging system configured to sterilize and charge a power assembly having a battery charger formed integrally therein; -
FIG. 59 is a schematic of a system for powering down an electrical connector of a surgical instrument handle when a shaft assembly is not coupled thereto; -
FIG. 60 is a flowchart depicting a method for adjusting the velocity of a firing element according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 61 is a flowchart depicting a method for adjusting the velocity of a firing element according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 62 is a partial, perspective view of an end effector and a fastener cartridge according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 63 is partial, perspective view of an end effector and a fastener cartridge according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 64 is a cross-sectional, elevation view of an end effector and a fastener cartridge according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional, elevation view of an end effector and a fastener cartridge according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 66 is a partial, perspective view of an end effector with portions removed and a fastener cartridge according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 67 is a partial, perspective view of an end effector with portions removed and a fastener cartridge according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 68A is a schematic depicting an integrated circuit according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 68B is a schematic depicting a magnetoresistive circuit according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; and -
FIG. 68C is a table listing various specifications of a magnetoresistive sensor according to various embodiments of the present disclosure. - Applicant of the present application owns the following patent applications that were filed on Mar. 1, 2013 and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entireties:
-
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,295, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH CONDUCTIVE PATHWAYS FOR SIGNAL COMMUNICATION, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,700,309;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,323, entitled ROTARY POWERED ARTICULATION JOINTS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,782,169;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,338, entitled THUMBWHEEL SWITCH ARRANGEMENTS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0249557;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,499, entitled ELECTROMECHANICAL SURGICAL DEVICE WITH SIGNAL RELAY ARRANGEMENT, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,358,033;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,460, entitled MULTIPLE PROCESSOR MOTOR CONTROL FOR MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,554,794;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,358, entitled JOYSTICK SWITCH ASSEMBLIES FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,326,767;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,481, entitled SENSOR STRAIGHTENED END EFFECTOR DURING REMOVAL THROUGH TROCAR, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,468,438;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,518, entitled CONTROL METHODS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH REMOVABLE IMPLEMENT PORTIONS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0246475;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,375, entitled ROTARY POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH MULTIPLE DEGREES OF FREEDOM, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,398,911; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,536, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SOFT STOP, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,307,986, are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.
- Applicant of the present application also owns the following patent applications that were filed on Mar. 14, 2013 and which are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entireties:
-
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,097, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A FIRING DRIVE, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,687,230;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,193, entitled CONTROL ARRANGEMENTS FOR A DRIVE MEMBER OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,332,987;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,053, entitled INTERCHANGEABLE SHAFT ASSEMBLIES FOR USE WITH A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,883,860;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING AN ARTICULATION LOCK, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,210, entitled SENSOR ARRANGEMENTS FOR ABSOLUTE POSITIONING SYSTEM FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,808,244;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,148, entitled MULTI-FUNCTION MOTOR FOR A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263554;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,066, entitled DRIVE SYSTEM LOCKOUT ARRANGEMENTS FOR MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,629,623;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,117, entitled ARTICULATION CONTROL SYSTEM FOR ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,351,726;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,130, entitled DRIVE TRAIN CONTROL ARRANGEMENTS FOR MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,351,727; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,159, entitled METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPERATING A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,888,919.
- Applicant of the present application also owns the following patent applications that were filed on Mar. 26, 2014 and are each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entireties:
-
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,142, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A SENSOR SYSTEM, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,913,642;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,106, entitled POWER MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272582;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,099, entitled STERILIZATION VERIFICATION CIRCUIT, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,826,977;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,094, entitled VERIFICATION OF NUMBER OF BATTERY EXCHANGES/PROCEDURE COUNT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272580;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,117, entitled POWER MANAGEMENT THROUGH SLEEP OPTIONS OF SEGMENTED CIRCUIT AND WAKE UP CONTROL, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,013,049;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,075, entitled MODULAR POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH DETACHABLE SHAFT ASSEMBLIES, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,743,929;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,116, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT UTILIZING SENSOR ADAPTATION, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272571;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,071, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT CONTROL CIRCUIT HAVING A SAFETY PROCESSOR, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,690,362;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,097, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING INTERACTIVE SYSTEMS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,820,738;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,126, entitled INTERFACE SYSTEMS FOR USE WITH SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,004,497;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,133, entitled MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SYSTEM, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272557;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,081, entitled SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONTROLLING A SEGMENTED CIRCUIT, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,804,618;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,076, entitled POWER MANAGEMENT THROUGH SEGMENTED CIRCUIT AND VARIABLE VOLTAGE PROTECTION, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,733,663;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,111, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT SYSTEM, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,750,499; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,125, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A ROTATABLE SHAFT, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,201,364.
- Certain exemplary embodiments will now be described to provide an overall understanding of the principles of the structure, function, manufacture, and use of the devices and methods disclosed herein. One or more examples of these embodiments are illustrated in the accompanying drawings. Those of ordinary skill in the art will understand that the devices and methods specifically described herein and illustrated in the accompanying drawings are non-limiting exemplary embodiments. The features illustrated or described in connection with one exemplary embodiment may be combined with the features of other embodiments. Such modifications and variations are intended to be included within the scope of the present invention.
- Reference throughout the specification to “various embodiments,” “some embodiments,” “one embodiment,” or “an embodiment”, or the like, means that a particular feature, structure, or characteristic described in connection with the embodiment is included in at least one embodiment. Thus, appearances of the phrases “in various embodiments,” “in some embodiments,” “in one embodiment”, or “in an embodiment”, or the like, in places throughout the specification are not necessarily all referring to the same embodiment. Furthermore, the particular features, structures, or characteristics may be combined in any suitable manner in one or more embodiments. Thus, the particular features, structures, or characteristics illustrated or described in connection with one embodiment may be combined, in whole or in part, with the features structures, or characteristics of one or more other embodiments without limitation. Such modifications and variations are intended to be included within the scope of the present invention.
- The terms “proximal” and “distal” are used herein with reference to a clinician manipulating the handle portion of the surgical instrument. The term “proximal” referring to the portion closest to the clinician and the term “distal” referring to the portion located away from the clinician. It will be further appreciated that, for convenience and clarity, spatial terms such as “vertical,” “horizontal,” “up,” and “down” may be used herein with respect to the drawings. However, surgical instruments are used in many orientations and positions, and these terms are not intended to be limiting and/or absolute.
- Various exemplary devices and methods are provided for performing laparoscopic and minimally invasive surgical procedures. However, the person of ordinary skill in the art will readily appreciate that the various methods and devices disclosed herein can be used in numerous surgical procedures and applications including, for example, in connection with open surgical procedures. As the present Detailed Description proceeds, those of ordinary skill in the art will further appreciate that the various instruments disclosed herein can be inserted into a body in any way, such as through a natural orifice, through an incision or puncture hole formed in tissue, etc. The working portions or end effector portions of the instruments can be inserted directly into a patient's body or can be inserted through an access device that has a working channel through which the end effector and elongated shaft of a surgical instrument can be advanced.
-
FIGS. 1-6 depict a motor-driven surgical cutting andfastening instrument 10 that may or may not be reused. In the illustrated embodiment, theinstrument 10 includes ahousing 12 that comprises ahandle 14 that is configured to be grasped, manipulated and actuated by the clinician. Thehousing 12 is configured for operable attachment to aninterchangeable shaft assembly 200 that has asurgical end effector 300 operably coupled thereto that is configured to perform one or more surgical tasks or procedures. As the present Detailed Description proceeds, it will be understood that the various unique and novel arrangements of the various forms of interchangeable shaft assemblies disclosed herein may also be effectively employed in connection with robotically-controlled surgical systems. Thus, the term “housing” may also encompass a housing or similar portion of a robotic system that houses or otherwise operably supports at least one drive system that is configured to generate and apply at least one control motion which could be used to actuate the interchangeable shaft assemblies disclosed herein and their respective equivalents. The term “frame” may refer to a portion of a handheld surgical instrument. The term “frame” may also represent a portion of a robotically controlled surgical instrument and/or a portion of the robotic system that may be used to operably control a surgical instrument. For example, the interchangeable shaft assemblies disclosed herein may be employed with various robotic systems, instruments, components and methods disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/118,241, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH ROTATABLE STAPLE DEPLOYMENT ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,072,535. U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/118,241, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH ROTATABLE STAPLE DEPLOYMENT ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,072,535, is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. - The
housing 12 depicted inFIGS. 1-3 is shown in connection with aninterchangeable shaft assembly 200 that includes anend effector 300 that comprises a surgical cutting and fastening device that is configured to operably support a surgicalstaple cartridge 304 therein. Thehousing 12 may be configured for use in connection with interchangeable shaft assemblies that include end effectors that are adapted to support different sizes and types of staple cartridges, have different shaft lengths, sizes, and types, etc. In addition, thehousing 12 may also be effectively employed with a variety of other interchangeable shaft assemblies including those assemblies that are configured to apply other motions and forms of energy such as, for example, radio frequency (RF) energy, ultrasonic energy and/or motion to end effector arrangements adapted for use in connection with various surgical applications and procedures. Furthermore, the end effectors, shaft assemblies, handles, surgical instruments, and/or surgical instrument systems can utilize any suitable fastener, or fasteners, to fasten tissue. For instance, a fastener cartridge comprising a plurality of fasteners removably stored therein can be removably inserted into and/or attached to the end effector of a shaft assembly. -
FIG. 1 illustrates thesurgical instrument 10 with aninterchangeable shaft assembly 200 operably coupled thereto.FIGS. 2 and 3 illustrate attachment of theinterchangeable shaft assembly 200 to thehousing 12 or handle 14. As can be seen inFIG. 4 , thehandle 14 may comprise a pair of interconnectable handlehousing segments handle housing segments pistol grip portion 19 that can be gripped and manipulated by the clinician. As will be discussed in further detail below, thehandle 14 operably supports a plurality of drive systems therein that are configured to generate and apply various control motions to corresponding portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly that is operably attached thereto. - Referring now to
FIG. 4 , thehandle 14 may further include aframe 20 that operably supports a plurality of drive systems. For example, theframe 20 can operably support a “first” or closure drive system, generally designated as 30, which may be employed to apply closing and opening motions to theinterchangeable shaft assembly 200 that is operably attached or coupled thereto. In at least one form, theclosure drive system 30 may include an actuator in the form of aclosure trigger 32 that is pivotally supported by theframe 20. More specifically, as illustrated inFIG. 4 , theclosure trigger 32 is pivotally coupled to thehousing 14 by apin 33. Such arrangement enables theclosure trigger 32 to be manipulated by a clinician such that when the clinician grips thepistol grip portion 19 of thehandle 14, theclosure trigger 32 may be easily pivoted from a starting or “unactuated” position to an “actuated” position and more particularly to a fully compressed or fully actuated position. Theclosure trigger 32 may be biased into the unactuated position by spring or other biasing arrangement (not shown). In various forms, theclosure drive system 30 further includes aclosure linkage assembly 34 that is pivotally coupled to theclosure trigger 32. As can be seen inFIG. 4 , theclosure linkage assembly 34 may include afirst closure link 36 and asecond closure link 38 that are pivotally coupled to theclosure trigger 32 by apin 35. Thesecond closure link 38 may also be referred to herein as an “attachment member” and include atransverse attachment pin 37. - Still referring to
FIG. 4 , it can be observed that thefirst closure link 36 may have a locking wall or end 39 thereon that is configured to cooperate with aclosure release assembly 60 that is pivotally coupled to theframe 20. In at least one form, theclosure release assembly 60 may comprise arelease button assembly 62 that has a distally protruding lockingpawl 64 formed thereon. Therelease button assembly 62 may be pivoted in a counterclockwise direction by a release spring (not shown). As the clinician depresses theclosure trigger 32 from its unactuated position towards thepistol grip portion 19 of thehandle 14, thefirst closure link 36 pivots upward to a point wherein the lockingpawl 64 drops into retaining engagement with the lockingwall 39 on thefirst closure link 36 thereby preventing theclosure trigger 32 from returning to the unactuated position. SeeFIG. 18 . Thus, theclosure release assembly 60 serves to lock theclosure trigger 32 in the fully actuated position. When the clinician desires to unlock theclosure trigger 32 to permit it to be biased to the unactuated position, the clinician simply pivots the closurerelease button assembly 62 such that the lockingpawl 64 is moved out of engagement with the lockingwall 39 on thefirst closure link 36. When the lockingpawl 64 has been moved out of engagement with thefirst closure link 36, theclosure trigger 32 may pivot back to the unactuated position. Other closure trigger locking and release arrangements may also be employed. - Further to the above,
FIGS. 13-15 illustrate theclosure trigger 32 in its unactuated position which is associated with an open, or unclamped, configuration of theshaft assembly 200 in which tissue can be positioned between the jaws of theshaft assembly 200.FIGS. 16-18 illustrate theclosure trigger 32 in its actuated position which is associated with a closed, or clamped, configuration of theshaft assembly 200 in which tissue is clamped between the jaws of theshaft assembly 200. Upon comparingFIGS. 14 and 17 , the reader will appreciate that, when theclosure trigger 32 is moved from its unactuated position (FIG. 14 ) to its actuated position (FIG. 17 ), theclosure release button 62 is pivoted between a first position (FIG. 14 ) and a second position (FIG. 17 ). The rotation of theclosure release button 62 can be referred to as being an upward rotation; however, at least a portion of theclosure release button 62 is being rotated toward thecircuit board 100. Referring toFIG. 4 , theclosure release button 62 can include anarm 61 extending therefrom and amagnetic element 63, such as a permanent magnet, for example, mounted to thearm 61. When theclosure release button 62 is rotated from its first position to its second position, themagnetic element 63 can move toward thecircuit board 100. Thecircuit board 100 can include at least one sensor configured to detect the movement of themagnetic element 63. In at least one embodiment, aHall effect sensor 65, for example, can be mounted to the bottom surface of thecircuit board 100. TheHall effect sensor 65 can be configured to detect changes in a magnetic field surrounding theHall effect sensor 65 caused by the movement of themagnetic element 63. TheHall effect sensor 65 can be in signal communication with a microcontroller 7004 (FIG. 59 ), for example, which can determine whether theclosure release button 62 is in its first position, which is associated with the unactuated position of theclosure trigger 32 and the open configuration of the end effector, its second position, which is associated with the actuated position of theclosure trigger 32 and the closed configuration of the end effector, and/or any position between the first position and the second position. - In at least one form, the
handle 14 and theframe 20 may operably support another drive system referred to herein as afiring drive system 80 that is configured to apply firing motions to corresponding portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly attached thereto. The firing drive system may 80 also be referred to herein as a “second drive system”. The firingdrive system 80 may employ anelectric motor 82, located in thepistol grip portion 19 of thehandle 14. In various forms, themotor 82 may be a DC brushed driving motor having a maximum rotation of, approximately, 25,000 RPM, for example. In other arrangements, the motor may include a brushless motor, a cordless motor, a synchronous motor, a stepper motor, or any other suitable electric motor. Themotor 82 may be powered by apower source 90 that in one form may comprise aremovable power pack 92. As can be seen inFIG. 4 , for example, thepower pack 92 may comprise aproximal housing portion 94 that is configured for attachment to adistal housing portion 96. Theproximal housing portion 94 and thedistal housing portion 96 are configured to operably support a plurality ofbatteries 98 therein.Batteries 98 may each comprise, for example, a Lithium Ion (“LI”) or other suitable battery. Thedistal housing portion 96 is configured for removable operable attachment to a controlcircuit board assembly 100 which is also operably coupled to themotor 82. A number ofbatteries 98 may be connected in series may be used as the power source for thesurgical instrument 10. In addition, thepower source 90 may be replaceable and/or rechargeable. - As outlined above with respect to other various forms, the
electric motor 82 can include a rotatable shaft (not shown) that operably interfaces with agear reducer assembly 84 that is mounted in meshing engagement with a with a set, or rack, ofdrive teeth 122 on a longitudinally-movable drive member 120. In use, a voltage polarity provided by thepower source 90 can operate theelectric motor 82 in a clockwise direction wherein the voltage polarity applied to the electric motor by the battery can be reversed in order to operate theelectric motor 82 in a counter-clockwise direction. When theelectric motor 82 is rotated in one direction, thedrive member 120 will be axially driven in the distal direction “DD”. When themotor 82 is driven in the opposite rotary direction, thedrive member 120 will be axially driven in a proximal direction “PD”. Thehandle 14 can include a switch which can be configured to reverse the polarity applied to theelectric motor 82 by thepower source 90. As with the other forms described herein, thehandle 14 can also include a sensor that is configured to detect the position of thedrive member 120 and/or the direction in which thedrive member 120 is being moved. - Actuation of the
motor 82 can be controlled by a firingtrigger 130 that is pivotally supported on thehandle 14. The firingtrigger 130 may be pivoted between an unactuated position and an actuated position. The firingtrigger 130 may be biased into the unactuated position by aspring 132 or other biasing arrangement such that when the clinician releases the firingtrigger 130, it may be pivoted or otherwise returned to the unactuated position by thespring 132 or biasing arrangement. In at least one form, the firingtrigger 130 can be positioned “outboard” of theclosure trigger 32 as was discussed above. In at least one form, a firingtrigger safety button 134 may be pivotally mounted to theclosure trigger 32 bypin 35. Thesafety button 134 may be positioned between the firingtrigger 130 and theclosure trigger 32 and have apivot arm 136 protruding therefrom. SeeFIG. 4 . When theclosure trigger 32 is in the unactuated position, thesafety button 134 is contained in thehandle 14 where the clinician cannot readily access it and move it between a safety position preventing actuation of the firingtrigger 130 and a firing position wherein the firingtrigger 130 may be fired. As the clinician depresses theclosure trigger 32, thesafety button 134 and the firingtrigger 130 pivot down wherein they can then be manipulated by the clinician. - As discussed above, the
handle 14 can include aclosure trigger 32 and afiring trigger 130. Referring toFIGS. 14-18A , the firingtrigger 130 can be pivotably mounted to theclosure trigger 32. Theclosure trigger 32 can include anarm 31 extending therefrom and the firingtrigger 130 can be pivotably mounted to thearm 31 about apivot pin 33. When theclosure trigger 32 is moved from its unactuated position (FIG. 14 ) to its actuated position (FIG. 17 ), the firingtrigger 130 can descend downwardly, as outlined above. After thesafety button 134 has been moved to its firing position, referring primarily toFIG. 18A , the firingtrigger 130 can be depressed to operate the motor of the surgical instrument firing system. In various instances, thehandle 14 can include a tracking system, such assystem 800, for example, configured to determine the position of theclosure trigger 32 and/or the position of the firingtrigger 130. With primary reference toFIGS. 14, 17, and 18A , thetracking system 800 can include a magnetic element, such aspermanent magnet 802, for example, which is mounted to anarm 801 extending from the firingtrigger 130. Thetracking system 800 can comprise one or more sensors, such as a firstHall effect sensor 803 and a secondHall effect sensor 804, for example, which can be configured to track the position of themagnet 802. Upon comparingFIGS. 14 and 17 , the reader will appreciate that, when theclosure trigger 32 is moved from its unactuated position to its actuated position, themagnet 802 can move between a first position adjacent the firstHall effect sensor 803 and a second position adjacent the secondHall effect sensor 804. Upon comparingFIGS. 17 and 18A , the reader will further appreciate that, when the firingtrigger 130 is moved from an unfired position (FIG. 17 ) to a fired position (FIG. 18A ), themagnet 802 can move relative to the secondHall effect sensor 804. Thesensors magnet 802 and can be in signal communication with a microcontroller on thecircuit board 100. With data from thefirst sensor 803 and/or thesecond sensor 804, the microcontroller can determine the position of themagnet 802 along a predefined path and, based on that position, the microcontroller can determine whether theclosure trigger 32 is in its unactuated position, its actuated position, or a position therebetween. Similarly, with data from thefirst sensor 803 and/or thesecond sensor 804, the microcontroller can determine the position of themagnet 802 along a predefined path and, based on that position, the microcontroller can determine whether the firingtrigger 130 is in its unfired position, its fully fired position, or a position therebetween. - As indicated above, in at least one form, the longitudinally
movable drive member 120 has a rack ofteeth 122 formed thereon for meshing engagement with acorresponding drive gear 86 of thegear reducer assembly 84. At least one form also includes a manually-actuatable “bailout”assembly 140 that is configured to enable the clinician to manually retract the longitudinallymovable drive member 120 should themotor 82 become disabled. Thebailout assembly 140 may include a lever orbailout handle assembly 142 that is configured to be manually pivoted into ratcheting engagement with teeth 124 also provided in thedrive member 120. Thus, the clinician can manually retract thedrive member 120 by using thebailout handle assembly 142 to ratchet thedrive member 120 in the proximal direction “PD”. U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2010/0089970, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,608,045, discloses bailout arrangements and other components, arrangements and systems that may also be employed with the various instruments disclosed herein. U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/249,117, entitled POWERED SURGICAL CUTTING AND STAPLING APPARATUS WITH MANUALLY RETRACTABLE FIRING SYSTEM, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,608,045, is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. - Turning now to
FIGS. 1 and 7 , theinterchangeable shaft assembly 200 includes asurgical end effector 300 that comprises anelongated channel 302 that is configured to operably support astaple cartridge 304 therein. Theend effector 300 may further include ananvil 306 that is pivotally supported relative to theelongated channel 302. Theinterchangeable shaft assembly 200 may further include an articulation joint 270 and an articulation lock 350 (FIG. 8 ) which can be configured to releasably hold theend effector 300 in a desired position relative to a shaft axis SA-SA. Details regarding the construction and operation of theend effector 300, the articulation joint 270 and thearticulation lock 350 are set forth in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, filed Mar. 14, 2013, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING AN ARTICULATION LOCK, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541. The entire disclosure of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, filed Mar. 14, 2013, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING AN ARTICULATION LOCK, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541, is hereby incorporated by reference herein. As can be seen inFIGS. 7 and 8 , theinterchangeable shaft assembly 200 can further include a proximal housing ornozzle 201 comprised ofnozzle portions interchangeable shaft assembly 200 can further include aclosure tube 260 which can be utilized to close and/or open theanvil 306 of theend effector 300. Primarily referring now toFIGS. 8 and 9 , theshaft assembly 200 can include aspine 210 which can be configured to fixably support ashaft frame portion 212 of thearticulation lock 350. SeeFIG. 8 . Thespine 210 can be configured to, one, slidably support a firingmember 220 therein and, two, slidably support theclosure tube 260 which extends around thespine 210. Thespine 210 can also be configured to slidably support aproximal articulation driver 230. Thearticulation driver 230 has a distal end 231 that is configured to operably engage thearticulation lock 350. Thearticulation lock 350 interfaces with anarticulation frame 352 that is adapted to operably engage a drive pin (not shown) on the end effector frame (not shown). As indicated above, further details regarding the operation of thearticulation lock 350 and the articulation frame may be found in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541. In various circumstances, thespine 210 can comprise aproximal end 211 which is rotatably supported in achassis 240. In one arrangement, for example, theproximal end 211 of thespine 210 has athread 214 formed thereon for threaded attachment to a spine bearing 216 configured to be supported within thechassis 240. SeeFIG. 7 . Such an arrangement facilitates rotatable attachment of thespine 210 to thechassis 240 such that thespine 210 may be selectively rotated about a shaft axis SA-SA relative to thechassis 240. - Referring primarily to
FIG. 7 , theinterchangeable shaft assembly 200 includes aclosure shuttle 250 that is slidably supported within thechassis 240 such that it may be axially moved relative thereto. As can be seen inFIGS. 3 and 7 , theclosure shuttle 250 includes a pair of proximally-protrudinghooks 252 that are configured for attachment to theattachment pin 37 that is attached to thesecond closure link 38 as will be discussed in further detail below. Aproximal end 261 of theclosure tube 260 is coupled to theclosure shuttle 250 for relative rotation thereto. For example, a U shapedconnector 263 is inserted into anannular slot 262 in theproximal end 261 of theclosure tube 260 and is retained withinvertical slots 253 in theclosure shuttle 250. SeeFIG. 7 . Such an arrangement serves to attach theclosure tube 260 to theclosure shuttle 250 for axial travel therewith while enabling theclosure tube 260 to rotate relative to theclosure shuttle 250 about the shaft axis SA-SA. Aclosure spring 268 is journaled on theclosure tube 260 and serves to bias theclosure tube 260 in the proximal direction “PD” which can serve to pivot the closure trigger into the unactuated position when the shaft assembly is operably coupled to thehandle 14. - In at least one form, the
interchangeable shaft assembly 200 may further include an articulation joint 270. Other interchangeable shaft assemblies, however, may not be capable of articulation. As can be seen inFIG. 7 , for example, the articulation joint 270 includes a double pivotclosure sleeve assembly 271. According to various forms, the double pivotclosure sleeve assembly 271 includes an end effectorclosure sleeve assembly 272 having upper and lower distally projectingtangs closure sleeve assembly 272 includes ahorseshoe aperture 275 and atab 276 for engaging an opening tab on theanvil 306 in the various manners described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, filed Mar. 14, 2013, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING AN ARTICULATION LOCK, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541, which has been incorporated by reference herein. As described in further detail therein, thehorseshoe aperture 275 andtab 276 engage a tab on the anvil when theanvil 306 is opened. An upperdouble pivot link 277 includes upwardly projecting distal and proximal pivot pins that engage respectively an upper distal pin hole in the upperproximally projecting tang 273 and an upper proximal pin hole in an upperdistally projecting tang 264 on theclosure tube 260. A lowerdouble pivot link 278 includes upwardly projecting distal and proximal pivot pins that engage respectively a lower distal pin hole in the lower proximally projectingtang 274 and a lower proximal pin hole in the lower distally projectingtang 265. See alsoFIG. 8 . - In use, the
closure tube 260 is translated distally (direction “DD”) to close theanvil 306, for example, in response to the actuation of theclosure trigger 32. Theanvil 306 is closed by distally translating theclosure tube 260 and thus the shaftclosure sleeve assembly 272, causing it to strike a proximal surface on the anvil 360 in the manner described in the aforementioned reference U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541. As was also described in detail in that reference, theanvil 306 is opened by proximally translating theclosure tube 260 and the shaftclosure sleeve assembly 272, causingtab 276 and thehorseshoe aperture 275 to contact and push against the anvil tab to lift theanvil 306. In the anvil-open position, theshaft closure tube 260 is moved to its proximal position. - As indicated above, the
surgical instrument 10 may further include anarticulation lock 350 of the types and construction described in further detail in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541, which can be configured and operated to selectively lock theend effector 300 in position. Such arrangement enables theend effector 300 to be rotated, or articulated, relative to theshaft closure tube 260 when thearticulation lock 350 is in its unlocked state. In such an unlocked state, theend effector 300 can be positioned and pushed against soft tissue and/or bone, for example, surrounding the surgical site within the patient in order to cause theend effector 300 to articulate relative to theclosure tube 260. Theend effector 300 may also be articulated relative to theclosure tube 260 by anarticulation driver 230. - As was also indicated above, the
interchangeable shaft assembly 200 further includes a firingmember 220 that is supported for axial travel within theshaft spine 210. The firingmember 220 includes an intermediatefiring shaft portion 222 that is configured for attachment to a distal cutting portion orknife bar 280. The firingmember 220 may also be referred to herein as a “second shaft” and/or a “second shaft assembly”. As can be seen inFIGS. 8 and 9 , the intermediatefiring shaft portion 222 may include alongitudinal slot 223 in the distal end thereof which can be configured to receive atab 284 on theproximal end 282 of thedistal knife bar 280. Thelongitudinal slot 223 and theproximal end 282 can be sized and configured to permit relative movement therebetween and can comprise a slip joint 286. The slip joint 286 can permit the intermediatefiring shaft portion 222 of thefiring drive 220 to be moved to articulate theend effector 300 without moving, or at least substantially moving, theknife bar 280. Once theend effector 300 has been suitably oriented, the intermediatefiring shaft portion 222 can be advanced distally until a proximal sidewall of thelongitudinal slot 223 comes into contact with thetab 284 in order to advance theknife bar 280 and fire the staple cartridge positioned within thechannel 302 As can be further seen inFIGS. 8 and 9 , theshaft spine 210 has an elongate opening orwindow 213 therein to facilitate assembly and insertion of the intermediatefiring shaft portion 222 into theshaft frame 210. Once the intermediatefiring shaft portion 222 has been inserted therein, atop frame segment 215 may be engaged with theshaft frame 212 to enclose the intermediatefiring shaft portion 222 andknife bar 280 therein. Further description of the operation of the firingmember 220 may be found in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541. - Further to the above, the
shaft assembly 200 can include aclutch assembly 400 which can be configured to selectively and releasably couple thearticulation driver 230 to the firingmember 220. In one form, theclutch assembly 400 includes a lock collar, orsleeve 402, positioned around the firingmember 220 wherein thelock sleeve 402 can be rotated between an engaged position in which thelock sleeve 402 couples the articulation driver 360 to the firingmember 220 and a disengaged position in which the articulation driver 360 is not operably coupled to the firingmember 200. Whenlock sleeve 402 is in its engaged position, distal movement of the firingmember 220 can move the articulation driver 360 distally and, correspondingly, proximal movement of the firingmember 220 can move thearticulation driver 230 proximally. Whenlock sleeve 402 is in its disengaged position, movement of the firingmember 220 is not transmitted to thearticulation driver 230 and, as a result, the firingmember 220 can move independently of thearticulation driver 230. In various circumstances, thearticulation driver 230 can be held in position by thearticulation lock 350 when thearticulation driver 230 is not being moved in the proximal or distal directions by the firingmember 220. - Referring primarily to
FIG. 9 , thelock sleeve 402 can comprise a cylindrical, or an at least substantially cylindrical, body including alongitudinal aperture 403 defined therein configured to receive the firingmember 220. Thelock sleeve 402 can comprise diametrically-opposed, inwardly-facinglock protrusions 404 and an outwardly-facinglock member 406. The lock protrusions 404 can be configured to be selectively engaged with the firingmember 220. More particularly, when thelock sleeve 402 is in its engaged position, thelock protrusions 404 are positioned within adrive notch 224 defined in the firingmember 220 such that a distal pushing force and/or a proximal pulling force can be transmitted from the firingmember 220 to thelock sleeve 402. When thelock sleeve 402 is in its engaged position, thesecond lock member 406 is received within adrive notch 232 defined in thearticulation driver 230 such that the distal pushing force and/or the proximal pulling force applied to thelock sleeve 402 can be transmitted to thearticulation driver 230. In effect, the firingmember 220, thelock sleeve 402, and thearticulation driver 230 will move together when thelock sleeve 402 is in its engaged position. On the other hand, when thelock sleeve 402 is in its disengaged position, thelock protrusions 404 may not be positioned within thedrive notch 224 of the firingmember 220 and, as a result, a distal pushing force and/or a proximal pulling force may not be transmitted from the firingmember 220 to thelock sleeve 402. Correspondingly, the distal pushing force and/or the proximal pulling force may not be transmitted to thearticulation driver 230. In such circumstances, the firingmember 220 can be slid proximally and/or distally relative to thelock sleeve 402 and theproximal articulation driver 230. - As can be seen in
FIGS. 8-12 , theshaft assembly 200 further includes aswitch drum 500 that is rotatably received on theclosure tube 260. Theswitch drum 500 comprises ahollow shaft segment 502 that has ashaft boss 504 formed thereon for receive an outwardlyprotruding actuation pin 410 therein. In various circumstances, theactuation pin 410 extends through aslot 267 into alongitudinal slot 408 provided in thelock sleeve 402 to facilitate axial movement of thelock sleeve 402 when it is engaged with thearticulation driver 230. Arotary torsion spring 420 is configured to engage theboss 504 on theswitch drum 500 and a portion of thenozzle housing 203 as shown inFIG. 10 to apply a biasing force to theswitch drum 500. Theswitch drum 500 can further comprise at least partiallycircumferential openings 506 defined therein which, referring toFIGS. 5 and 6 , can be configured to receivecircumferential mounts 204, 205 extending from the nozzle halves 202, 203 and permit relative rotation, but not translation, between theswitch drum 500 and theproximal nozzle 201. As can be seen in those Figures, themounts 204 and 205 also extend throughopenings 266 in theclosure tube 260 to be seated inrecesses 211 in theshaft spine 210. However, rotation of thenozzle 201 to a point where themounts 204, 205 reach the end of theirrespective slots 506 in theswitch drum 500 will result in rotation of theswitch drum 500 about the shaft axis SA-SA. Rotation of theswitch drum 500 will ultimately result in the rotation ofeth actuation pin 410 and thelock sleeve 402 between its engaged and disengaged positions. Thus, in essence, thenozzle 201 may be employed to operably engage and disengage the articulation drive system with the firing drive system in the various manners described in further detail in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541. - As also illustrated in
FIGS. 8-12 , theshaft assembly 200 can comprise aslip ring assembly 600 which can be configured to conduct electrical power to and/or from theend effector 300 and/or communicate signals to and/or from theend effector 300, for example. Theslip ring assembly 600 can comprise aproximal connector flange 604 mounted to achassis flange 242 extending from thechassis 240 and adistal connector flange 601 positioned within a slot defined in theshaft housings proximal connector flange 604 can comprise a first face and thedistal connector flange 601 can comprise a second face which is positioned adjacent to and movable relative to the first face. Thedistal connector flange 601 can rotate relative to theproximal connector flange 604 about the shaft axis SA-SA. Theproximal connector flange 604 can comprise a plurality of concentric, or at least substantially concentric,conductors 602 defined in the first face thereof. Aconnector 607 can be mounted on the proximal side of theconnector flange 601 and may have a plurality of contacts (not shown) wherein each contact corresponds to and is in electrical contact with one of theconductors 602. Such an arrangement permits relative rotation between theproximal connector flange 604 and thedistal connector flange 601 while maintaining electrical contact therebetween. Theproximal connector flange 604 can include anelectrical connector 606 which can place theconductors 602 in signal communication with ashaft circuit board 610 mounted to theshaft chassis 240, for example. In at least one instance, a wiring harness comprising a plurality of conductors can extend between theelectrical connector 606 and theshaft circuit board 610. Theelectrical connector 606 may extend proximally through aconnector opening 243 defined in thechassis mounting flange 242. SeeFIG. 7 . U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/800,067, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE TISSUE THICKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM, filed on Mar. 13, 2013, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263552, is incorporated by reference in its entirety. U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/800,025, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE TISSUE THICKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM, filed on Mar. 13, 2013, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,345,481, is incorporated by reference in its entirety. Further details regardingslip ring assembly 600 may be found in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541. - As discussed above, the
shaft assembly 200 can include a proximal portion which is fixably mounted to thehandle 14 and a distal portion which is rotatable about a longitudinal axis. The rotatable distal shaft portion can be rotated relative to the proximal portion about theslip ring assembly 600, as discussed above. Thedistal connector flange 601 of theslip ring assembly 600 can be positioned within the rotatable distal shaft portion. Moreover, further to the above, theswitch drum 500 can also be positioned within the rotatable distal shaft portion. When the rotatable distal shaft portion is rotated, thedistal connector flange 601 and theswitch drum 500 can be rotated synchronously with one another. In addition, theswitch drum 500 can be rotated between a first position and a second position relative to thedistal connector flange 601. When theswitch drum 500 is in its first position, the articulation drive system may be operably disengaged from the firing drive system and, thus, the operation of the firing drive system may not articulate theend effector 300 of theshaft assembly 200. When theswitch drum 500 is in its second position, the articulation drive system may be operably engaged with the firing drive system and, thus, the operation of the firing drive system may articulate theend effector 300 of theshaft assembly 200. When theswitch drum 500 is moved between its first position and its second position, theswitch drum 500 is moved relative todistal connector flange 601. In various instances, theshaft assembly 200 can comprise at least one sensor configured to detect the position of theswitch drum 500. Turning now toFIGS. 11 and 12 , thedistal connector flange 601 can comprise aHall effect sensor 605, for example, and theswitch drum 500 can comprise a magnetic element, such aspermanent magnet 505, for example. TheHall effect sensor 605 can be configured to detect the position of thepermanent magnet 505. When theswitch drum 500 is rotated between its first position and its second position, thepermanent magnet 505 can move relative to theHall effect sensor 605. In various instances,Hall effect sensor 605 can detect changes in a magnetic field created when thepermanent magnet 505 is moved. TheHall effect sensor 605 can be in signal communication with theshaft circuit board 610 and/or thehandle circuit board 100, for example. Based on the signal from theHall effect sensor 605, a microcontroller on theshaft circuit board 610 and/or thehandle circuit board 100 can determine whether the articulation drive system is engaged with or disengaged from the firing drive system. - Referring again to
FIGS. 3 and 7 , thechassis 240 includes at least one, and preferably two, taperedattachment portions 244 formed thereon that are adapted to be received within correspondingdovetail slots 702 formed within a distalattachment flange portion 700 of theframe 20. Eachdovetail slot 702 may be tapered or, stated another way, be somewhat V-shaped to seatingly receive theattachment portions 244 therein. As can be further seen inFIGS. 3 and 7 , ashaft attachment lug 226 is formed on the proximal end of theintermediate firing shaft 222. As will be discussed in further detail below, when theinterchangeable shaft assembly 200 is coupled to thehandle 14, theshaft attachment lug 226 is received in a firingshaft attachment cradle 126 formed in thedistal end 125 of thelongitudinal drive member 120. SeeFIGS. 3 and 6 . - Various shaft assembly embodiments employ a
latch system 710 for removably coupling theshaft assembly 200 to thehousing 12 and more specifically to theframe 20. As can be seen inFIG. 7 , for example, in at least one form, thelatch system 710 includes a lock member orlock yoke 712 that is movably coupled to thechassis 240. In the illustrated embodiment, for example, thelock yoke 712 has a U-shape with two spaced downwardly extendinglegs 714. Thelegs 714 each have apivot lug 716 formed thereon that are adapted to be received in correspondingholes 245 formed in thechassis 240. Such arrangement facilitates pivotal attachment of thelock yoke 712 to thechassis 240. Thelock yoke 712 may include two proximally protruding lock lugs 714 that are configured for releasable engagement with corresponding lock detents orgrooves 704 in thedistal attachment flange 700 of theframe 20. SeeFIG. 3 . In various forms, thelock yoke 712 is biased in the proximal direction by spring or biasing member (not shown). Actuation of thelock yoke 712 may be accomplished by alatch button 722 that is slidably mounted on alatch actuator assembly 720 that is mounted to thechassis 240. Thelatch button 722 may be biased in a proximal direction relative to thelock yoke 712. As will be discussed in further detail below, thelock yoke 712 may be moved to an unlocked position by biasing the latch button the in distal direction which also causes thelock yoke 712 to pivot out of retaining engagement with thedistal attachment flange 700 of theframe 20. When thelock yoke 712 is in “retaining engagement” with thedistal attachment flange 700 of theframe 20, the lock lugs 716 are retainingly seated within the corresponding lock detents orgrooves 704 in thedistal attachment flange 700. - When employing an interchangeable shaft assembly that includes an end effector of the type described herein that is adapted to cut and fasten tissue, as well as other types of end effectors, it may be desirable to prevent inadvertent detachment of the interchangeable shaft assembly from the housing during actuation of the end effector. For example, in use the clinician may actuate the
closure trigger 32 to grasp and manipulate the target tissue into a desired position. Once the target tissue is positioned within theend effector 300 in a desired orientation, the clinician may then fully actuate theclosure trigger 32 to close theanvil 306 and clamp the target tissue in position for cutting and stapling. In that instance, thefirst drive system 30 has been fully actuated. After the target tissue has been clamped in theend effector 300, it may be desirable to prevent the inadvertent detachment of theshaft assembly 200 from thehousing 12. One form of thelatch system 710 is configured to prevent such inadvertent detachment. - As can be most particularly seen in
FIG. 7 , thelock yoke 712 includes at least one and preferably two lock hooks 718 that are adapted to contact correspondinglock lug portions 256 that are formed on theclosure shuttle 250. Referring toFIGS. 13-15 , when theclosure shuttle 250 is in an unactuated position (i.e., thefirst drive system 30 is unactuated and theanvil 306 is open), thelock yoke 712 may be pivoted in a distal direction to unlock theinterchangeable shaft assembly 200 from thehousing 12. When in that position, the lock hooks 718 do not contact thelock lug portions 256 on theclosure shuttle 250. However, when theclosure shuttle 250 is moved to an actuated position (i.e., thefirst drive system 30 is actuated and theanvil 306 is in the closed position), thelock yoke 712 is prevented from being pivoted to an unlocked position. SeeFIGS. 16-18 . Stated another way, if the clinician were to attempt to pivot thelock yoke 712 to an unlocked position or, for example, thelock yoke 712 was in advertently bumped or contacted in a manner that might otherwise cause it to pivot distally, the lock hooks 718 on thelock yoke 712 will contact the lock lugs 256 on theclosure shuttle 250 and prevent movement of thelock yoke 712 to an unlocked position. - Attachment of the
interchangeable shaft assembly 200 to thehandle 14 will now be described with reference toFIG. 3 . To commence the coupling process, the clinician may position thechassis 240 of theinterchangeable shaft assembly 200 above or adjacent to thedistal attachment flange 700 of theframe 20 such that the taperedattachment portions 244 formed on thechassis 240 are aligned with thedovetail slots 702 in theframe 20. The clinician may then move theshaft assembly 200 along an installation axis IA that is perpendicular to the shaft axis SA-SA to seat theattachment portions 244 in “operable engagement” with the correspondingdovetail receiving slots 702. In doing so, theshaft attachment lug 226 on theintermediate firing shaft 222 will also be seated in thecradle 126 in the longitudinallymovable drive member 120 and the portions ofpin 37 on thesecond closure link 38 will be seated in the correspondinghooks 252 in theclosure yoke 250. As used herein, the term “operable engagement” in the context of two components means that the two components are sufficiently engaged with each other so that upon application of an actuation motion thereto, the components may carry out their intended action, function and/or procedure. - As discussed above, at least five systems of the
interchangeable shaft assembly 200 can be operably coupled with at least five corresponding systems of thehandle 14. A first system can comprise a frame system which couples and/or aligns the frame or spine of theshaft assembly 200 with theframe 20 of thehandle 14. Another system can comprise aclosure drive system 30 which can operably connect theclosure trigger 32 of thehandle 14 and theclosure tube 260 and theanvil 306 of theshaft assembly 200. As outlined above, the closuretube attachment yoke 250 of theshaft assembly 200 can be engaged with thepin 37 on thesecond closure link 38. Another system can comprise thefiring drive system 80 which can operably connect thefiring trigger 130 of thehandle 14 with theintermediate firing shaft 222 of theshaft assembly 200. As outlined above, theshaft attachment lug 226 can be operably connected with thecradle 126 of thelongitudinal drive member 120. Another system can comprise an electrical system which can signal to a controller in thehandle 14, such as microcontroller, for example, that a shaft assembly, such asshaft assembly 200, for example, has been operably engaged with thehandle 14 and/or, two, conduct power and/or communication signals between theshaft assembly 200 and thehandle 14. For instance, theshaft assembly 200 can include anelectrical connector 4010 that is operably mounted to theshaft circuit board 610. Theelectrical connector 4010 is configured for mating engagement with a correspondingelectrical connector 4000 on thehandle control board 100. Further details regaining the circuitry and control systems may be found in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541, the entire disclosure of which was previously incorporated by reference herein. The fifth system may consist of the latching system for releasably locking theshaft assembly 200 to thehandle 14. - Referring again to
FIGS. 2 and 3 , thehandle 14 can include anelectrical connector 4000 comprising a plurality of electrical contacts. Turning now toFIG. 59 , theelectrical connector 4000 can comprise afirst contact 4001 a, asecond contact 4001 b, a third contact 4001 c, afourth contact 4001 d, afifth contact 4001 e, and asixth contact 4001 f, for example. While the illustrated embodiment utilizes six contacts, other embodiments are envisioned which may utilize more than six contacts or less than six contacts. As illustrated inFIG. 59 , thefirst contact 4001 a can be in electrical communication with atransistor 4008,contacts 4001 b-4001 e can be in electrical communication with amicrocontroller 7004, and thesixth contact 4001 f can be in electrical communication with a ground. In certain circumstances, one or more of theelectrical contacts 4001 b-4001 e may be in electrical communication with one or more output channels of themicrocontroller 7004 and can be energized, or have a voltage potential applied thereto, when the handle 1042 is in a powered state. In some circumstances, one or more of theelectrical contacts 4001 b-4001 e may be in electrical communication with one or more input channels of themicrocontroller 7004 and, when thehandle 14 is in a powered state, themicrocontroller 7004 can be configured to detect when a voltage potential is applied to such electrical contacts. When a shaft assembly, such asshaft assembly 200, for example, is assembled to thehandle 14, theelectrical contacts 4001 a-4001 f may not communicate with each other. When a shaft assembly is not assembled to thehandle 14, however, theelectrical contacts 4001 a-4001 f of theelectrical connector 4000 may be exposed and, in some circumstances, one or more of thecontacts 4001 a-4001 f may be accidentally placed in electrical communication with each other. Such circumstances can arise when one or more of thecontacts 4001 a-4001 f come into contact with an electrically conductive material, for example. When this occurs, themicrocontroller 7004 can receive an erroneous input and/or theshaft assembly 200 can receive an erroneous output, for example. To address this issue, in various circumstances, thehandle 14 may be unpowered when a shaft assembly, such asshaft assembly 200, for example, is not attached to thehandle 14. In other circumstances, the handle 1042 can be powered when a shaft assembly, such asshaft assembly 200, for example, is not attached thereto. In such circumstances, themicrocontroller 7004 can be configured to ignore inputs, or voltage potentials, applied to the contacts in electrical communication with themicrocontroller 7004, i.e.,contacts 4001 b-4001 e, for example, until a shaft assembly is attached to thehandle 14. Eventhough themicrocontroller 7004 may be supplied with power to operate other functionalities of thehandle 14 in such circumstances, thehandle 14 may be in a powered-down state. In a way, theelectrical connector 4000 may be in a powered-down state as voltage potentials applied to theelectrical contacts 4001 b-4001 e may not affect the operation of thehandle 14. The reader will appreciate that, eventhoughcontacts 4001 b-4001 e may be in a powered-down state, theelectrical contacts microcontroller 7004, may or may not be in a powered-down state. For instance,sixth contact 4001 f may remain in electrical communication with a ground regardless of whether thehandle 14 is in a powered-up or a powered-down state. Furthermore, thetransistor 4008, and/or any other suitable arrangement of transistors, such astransistor 4010, for example, and/or switches may be configured to control the supply of power from apower source 4004, such as abattery 90 within thehandle 14, for example, to the firstelectrical contact 4001 a regardless of whether thehandle 14 is in a powered-up or a powered-down state. In various circumstances, theshaft assembly 200, for example, can be configured to change the state of thetransistor 4008 when theshaft assembly 200 is engaged with thehandle 14. In certain circumstances, further to the below, aHall effect sensor 4002 can be configured to switch the state oftransistor 4010 which, as a result, can switch the state oftransistor 4008 and ultimately supply power frompower source 4004 tofirst contact 4001 a. In this way, both the power circuits and the signal circuits to theconnector 4000 can be powered down when a shaft assembly is not installed to thehandle 14 and powered up when a shaft assembly is installed to thehandle 14. - In various circumstances, referring again to
FIG. 59 , thehandle 14 can include theHall effect sensor 4002, for example, which can be configured to detect a detectable element, such as a magnetic element 4007 (FIG. 3 ), for example, on a shaft assembly, such asshaft assembly 200, for example, when the shaft assembly is coupled to thehandle 14. TheHall effect sensor 4002 can be powered by apower source 4006, such as a battery, for example, which can, in effect, amplify the detection signal of theHall effect sensor 4002 and communicate with an input channel of themicrocontroller 7004 via the circuit illustrated inFIG. 59 . Once themicrocontroller 7004 has a received an input indicating that a shaft assembly has been at least partially coupled to thehandle 14, and that, as a result, theelectrical contacts 4001 a-4001 f are no longer exposed, themicrocontroller 7004 can enter into its normal, or powered-up, operating state. In such an operating state, themicrocontroller 7004 will evaluate the signals transmitted to one or more of thecontacts 4001 b-4001 e from the shaft assembly and/or transmit signals to the shaft assembly through one or more of thecontacts 4001 b-4001 e in normal use thereof. In various circumstances, theshaft assembly 1200 may have to be fully seated before theHall effect sensor 4002 can detect themagnetic element 4007. While aHall effect sensor 4002 can be utilized to detect the presence of theshaft assembly 200, any suitable system of sensors and/or switches can be utilized to detect whether a shaft assembly has been assembled to thehandle 14, for example. In this way, further to the above, both the power circuits and the signal circuits to theconnector 4000 can be powered down when a shaft assembly is not installed to thehandle 14 and powered up when a shaft assembly is installed to thehandle 14. - In various embodiments, any number of magnetic sensing elements may be employed to detect whether a shaft assembly has been assembled to the
handle 14, for example. For example, the technologies used for magnetic field sensing include search coil, fluxgate, optically pumped, nuclear precession, SQUID, Hall-effect, anisotropic magnetoresistance, giant magnetoresistance, magnetic tunnel junctions, giant magnetoimpedance, magnetostrictive/piezoelectric composites, magnetodiode, magnetotransistor, fiber optic, magnetooptic, and microelectromechanical systems-based magnetic sensors, among others. - Referring to
FIG. 59 , themicrocontroller 7004 may generally comprise a microprocessor (“processor”) and one or more memory units operationally coupled to the processor. By executing instruction code stored in the memory, the processor may control various components of the surgical instrument, such as the motor, various drive systems, and/or a user display, for example. Themicrocontroller 7004 may be implemented using integrated and/or discrete hardware elements, software elements, and/or a combination of both. Examples of integrated hardware elements may include processors, microprocessors, microcontrollers, integrated circuits, application specific integrated circuits (ASIC), programmable logic devices (PLD), digital signal processors (DSP), field programmable gate arrays (FPGA), logic gates, registers, semiconductor devices, chips, microchips, chip sets, microcontrollers, system-on-chip (SoC), and/or system-in-package (SIP). Examples of discrete hardware elements may include circuits and/or circuit elements such as logic gates, field effect transistors, bipolar transistors, resistors, capacitors, inductors, and/or relays. In certain instances, themicrocontroller 7004 may include a hybrid circuit comprising discrete and integrated circuit elements or components on one or more substrates, for example. - Referring to
FIG. 59 , themicrocontroller 7004 may be an LM 4F230H5QR, available from Texas Instruments, for example. In certain instances, the Texas Instruments LM4F230H5QR is an ARM Cortex-M4F Processor Core comprising on-chip memory of 256 KB single-cycle flash memory, or other non-volatile memory, up to 40 MHz, a prefetch buffer to improve performance above 40 MHz, a 32 KB single-cycle serial random access memory (SRAM), internal read-only memory (ROM) loaded with StellarisWare® software, 2 KB electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), one or more pulse width modulation (PWM) modules, one or more quadrature encoder inputs (QEI) analog, one or more 12-bit Analog-to-Digital Converters (ADC) with 12 analog input channels, among other features that are readily available. Other microcontrollers may be readily substituted for use with the present disclosure. Accordingly, the present disclosure should not be limited in this context. - As discussed above, the
handle 14 and/or theshaft assembly 200 can include systems and configurations configured to prevent, or at least reduce the possibility of, the contacts of the handleelectrical connector 4000 and/or the contacts of the shaftelectrical connector 4010 from becoming shorted out when theshaft assembly 200 is not assembled, or completely assembled, to thehandle 14. Referring toFIG. 3 , the handleelectrical connector 4000 can be at least partially recessed within a cavity 4009 defined in thehandle frame 20. The sixcontacts 4001 a-4001 f of theelectrical connector 4000 can be completely recessed within the cavity 4009. Such arrangements can reduce the possibility of an object accidentally contacting one or more of thecontacts 4001 a-4001 f. Similarly, the shaftelectrical connector 4010 can be positioned within a recess defined in theshaft chassis 240 which can reduce the possibility of an object accidentally contacting one or more of the contacts 4011 a-4011 f of the shaftelectrical connector 4010. With regard to the particular embodiment depicted inFIG. 3 , the shaft contacts 4011 a-4011 f can comprise male contacts. In at least one embodiment, each shaft contact 4011 a-4011 f can comprise a flexible projection extending therefrom which can be configured to engage acorresponding handle contact 4001 a-4001 f, for example. Thehandle contacts 4001 a-4001 f can comprise female contacts. In at least one embodiment, eachhandle contact 4001 a-4001 f can comprise a flat surface, for example, against which themale shaft contacts 4001 a-4001 f can wipe, or slide, against and maintain an electrically conductive interface therebetween. In various instances, the direction in which theshaft assembly 200 is assembled to thehandle 14 can be parallel to, or at least substantially parallel to, thehandle contacts 4001 a-4001 f such that the shaft contacts 4011 a-4011 f slide against thehandle contacts 4001 a-4001 f when theshaft assembly 200 is assembled to thehandle 14. In various alternative embodiments, thehandle contacts 4001 a-4001 f can comprise male contacts and the shaft contacts 4011 a-4011 f can comprise female contacts. In certain alternative embodiments, thehandle contacts 4001 a-4001 f and the shaft contacts 4011 a-4011 f can comprise any suitable arrangement of contacts. - In various instances, the
handle 14 can comprise a connector guard configured to at least partially cover the handleelectrical connector 4000 and/or a connector guard configured to at least partially cover the shaftelectrical connector 4010. A connector guard can prevent, or at least reduce the possibility of, an object accidentally touching the contacts of an electrical connector when the shaft assembly is not assembled to, or only partially assembled to, the handle. A connector guard can be movable. For instance, the connector guard can be moved between a guarded position in which it at least partially guards a connector and an unguarded position in which it does not guard, or at least guards less of, the connector. In at least one embodiment, a connector guard can be displaced as the shaft assembly is being assembled to the handle. For instance, if the handle comprises a handle connector guard, the shaft assembly can contact and displace the handle connector guard as the shaft assembly is being assembled to the handle. Similarly, if the shaft assembly comprises a shaft connector guard, the handle can contact and displace the shaft connector guard as the shaft assembly is being assembled to the handle. In various instances, a connector guard can comprise a door, for example. In at least one instance, the door can comprise a beveled surface which, when contacted by the handle or shaft, can facilitate the displacement of the door in a certain direction. In various instances, the connector guard can be translated and/or rotated, for example. In certain instances, a connector guard can comprise at least one film which covers the contacts of an electrical connector. When the shaft assembly is assembled to the handle, the film can become ruptured. In at least one instance, the male contacts of a connector can penetrate the film before engaging the corresponding contacts positioned underneath the film. - As described above, the surgical instrument can include a system which can selectively power-up, or activate, the contacts of an electrical connector, such as the
electrical connector 4000, for example. In various instances, the contacts can be transitioned between an unactivated condition and an activated condition. In certain instances, the contacts can be transitioned between a monitored condition, a deactivated condition, and an activated condition. For instance, themicrocontroller 7004, for example, can monitor thecontacts 4001 a-4001 f when a shaft assembly has not been assembled to thehandle 14 to determine whether one or more of thecontacts 4001 a-4001 f may have been shorted. Themicrocontroller 7004 can be configured to apply a low voltage potential to each of thecontacts 4001 a-4001 f and assess whether only a minimal resistance is present at each of the contacts. Such an operating state can comprise the monitored condition. In the event that the resistance detected at a contact is high, or above a threshold resistance, themicrocontroller 7004 can deactivate that contact, more than one contact, or, alternatively, all of the contacts. Such an operating state can comprise the deactivated condition. If a shaft assembly is assembled to thehandle 14 and it is detected by themicrocontroller 7004, as discussed above, themicrocontroller 7004 can increase the voltage potential to thecontacts 4001 a-4001 f. Such an operating state can comprise the activated condition. - The various shaft assemblies disclosed herein may employ sensors and various other components that require electrical communication with the controller in the housing. These shaft assemblies generally are configured to be able to rotate relative to the housing necessitating a connection that facilitates such electrical communication between two or more components that may rotate relative to each other. When employing end effectors of the types disclosed herein, the connector arrangements must be relatively robust in nature while also being somewhat compact to fit into the shaft assembly connector portion.
-
FIGS. 19-22 depict one form of electric coupler orslip ring connector 1600 that may be employed with, for example aninterchangeable shaft assembly 1200 or a variety of other applications that require electrical connections between components that rotate relative to each other. Theshaft assembly 1200 may be similar toshaft assembly 200 described herein and include a closure tube orouter shaft 1260 and a proximal nozzle 1201 (the upper half ofnozzle 1201 is omitted for clarity). In the illustrated example, theouter shaft 1260 is mounted on ashaft spine 1210 such that theouter tube 1260 may be selectively axially movable thereon. The proximal ends of theshaft spine 1210 and theouter tube 1260 may be rotatably coupled to achassis 1240 for rotation relative thereto about a shaft axis SA-SA. As was discussed above, theproximal nozzle 1201 may include mounts or mounting lugs 1204 (FIG. 20 ) that protrude inwardly from the nozzle portions and extend throughcorresponding openings 1266 in theouter tube 1260 to be seated in correspondingrecesses 1211 in theshaft spine 1210. Thus, to rotate theouter shaft 1260 andspine shaft 1210 and presumably an end effector (not shown) coupled thereto about the shaft axis SA-SA relative to thechassis 1240, the clinician simply rotates thenozzle 1201 as represented by arrows “R” inFIG. 19 . - When sensors are employed at the end effector or at locations within or on the shaft assembly for example, conductors such as wires and/or traces (not shown) may be received or mounted within the
outer tube 1260 or could even be routed along theouter tube 1260 from the sensors to a distalelectrical component 1800 mounted within thenozzle 1201. Thus, the distalelectrical component 1800 is rotatable with thenozzle 1201 about the shaft axis SA-SA. In the embodiment illustrated inFIG. 20 , theelectrical component 1800 comprises a connector, battery, etc. that includescontacts - The
slip ring connector 1600 further includes a mountingmember 1610 that includes acylindrical body portion 1612 that defines an annular mounting surface 1613. Adistal flange 1614 may be formed on at least one end of thecylindrical body portion 1612. Thebody portion 1612 of the mountingmember 1610 is sized to be non-rotatably mounted on a mountinghub 1241 on thechassis 1240. In the illustrated embodiment, onedistal flange 1614 is provided on one end of thebody portion 1612. Asecond flange 1243 is formed on thechassis 1240 such that when thebody portion 1612 is fixedly (non-rotatably) mounted thereon, thesecond flange 1243 abuts the proximal end of thebody portion 1612. - The
slip ring connector 1600 also employs a unique and novel annularcircuit trace assembly 1620 that is wrapped around the annular mounting surface 1613 of thebody portion 1612 such that it is received between the first andsecond flanges FIGS. 21 and 22 , thecircuit trace assembly 1620 may comprise an adhesive-backedflexible substrate 1622 that may be wrapped around the circumference of the body portion 1612 (i.e., the annular mounting surface 1613). Prior to being wrapped around thebody portion 1612, theflexible substrate 1622 may have a “T-shape” with a firstannular portion 1624 and alead portion 1626. As can also be seen inFIGS. 19-21 , thecircuit trace assembly 1620 may further include circuit traces 1630, 1640, 1650, 1660 that may comprise, for example, electrically-conductive gold-plated traces. However, other electrically-conductive materials may also be used. Each electrically-conductive circuit trace includes an “annular portion” that will form an annular part of the trace when the substrate is wrapped around thebody portion 1612 as well as another “lead portion” that extends transversely from or perpendicular from the annular portion. More specifically, referring toFIG. 22 , first electrically-conductive circuit trace 1630 has a firstannular portion 1632 andfirst lead portion 1634. The second electrically-conductive circuit trace 1640 has a secondannular portion 1642 and asecond lead portion 1644 extending transversely or perpendicularly therefrom. The third electricallyconductive circuit trace 1650 has a thirdannular portion 1652 and athird lead portion 1654 extending transversely or perpendicularly therefrom. The fourth electrically-conductive circuit trace has a fourthannular portion 1662 and afourth lead portion 1664 extending transversely or perpendicularly therefrom. The electrically-conductive circuit traces 1630, 1640, 1650, 1660 may be applied to theflexible substrate 1622 while the substrate is in a planar orientation (i.e., prior to being wrapped onto theannular body portion 1612 of the mounting member 1610) using conventional manufacturing techniques. As can be seen inFIG. 22 , theannular portions lead portions - When the
circuit trace assembly 1620 is wrapped around the annular mounting surface 1613 and attached thereto by adhesive, double-stick tape, etc., the ends of the portion of the substrate that contains theannular portions annular portions conductive paths conductive paths lead portion 1626 may extend through aslot 1245 in theflange 1243 and be electrically coupled to a circuit board (see e.g.,FIG. 7 —circuit board 610) or other suitable electrical component(s). - In the depicted embodiment for example, the
electrical component 1800 is mounted within the nozzle 1261 for rotation about the mountingmember 1610 such that:contact 1802 is in constant electrical contact with the first annular electrically-conductive path 1636;contact 1804 is in constant electrical contact with the second annular electrically-conductive path 1646;contact 1806 is in constant electrical contact with the third annular electrically-conductive path 1656; andcontact 1808 is in constant electrical contact with the fourth electrically-conductive path 1666. It will be understood however, that the various advantages of theslip ring connector 1600 may also be obtained in applications wherein the mountingmember 1610 is supported for rotation about the shaft axis SA-SA and theelectrical component 1800 is fixedly mounted relative thereto. It will be further appreciated that theslip ring connector 1600 may be effectively employed in connection with a variety of different components and applications outside the field of surgery wherein it is desirable to provide electrical connections between components that rotate relative to each other. - The
slip ring connector 1600 comprises a radial slip ring that provides a conductive contact means of passing signal(s) and power to and from any radial position and after shaft rotation. In applications wherein the electrical component comprises a battery contact, the battery contact position can be situated relative to the mounting member to minimize any tolerance stack up between those components. The coupler arrangement may represent a low cost coupling arrangement that can be assembled with minimal manufacturing costs. The gold plated traces may also minimize the likelihood of corrosion. The unique and novel contact arrangement facilitates complete clockwise and counterclockwise rotation about the shaft axis SA-SA while remaining in electrical contact with the corresponding annular electrically-conductive paths. -
FIGS. 23-25 depict one form of electric coupler orslip ring connector 1600′ that may be employed with, for example aninterchangeable shaft assembly 1200′ or a variety of other applications that require electrical connections between components that rotate relative to each other. Theshaft assembly 1200′ may be similar toshaft assembly 1200 described herein and include a closure tube orouter shaft 1260 and a proximal nozzle 1201 (the upper half ofnozzle 1201 is omitted for clarity). In the illustrated example, theouter shaft 1260 is mounted on ashaft spine 1210 such that theouter tube 1260 may be selectively axially movable thereon. The proximal ends of theshaft spine 1210 and theouter tube 1260 may be rotatably coupled to achassis 1240′ for rotation relative thereto about a shaft axis SA-SA. As was discussed above, theproximal nozzle 1201 may include mounts or mounting lugs that protrude inwardly from the nozzle portions and extend throughcorresponding openings 1266 in theouter tube 1260 to be seated in correspondingrecesses 1211 in theshaft spine 1210. Thus, to rotate theouter shaft 1260 andspine shaft 1210 and presumably an end effector (not shown) coupled thereto about the shaft axis SA-SA relative to thechassis 1240′, the clinician simply rotates thenozzle 1201 as represented by arrows “R” inFIG. 23 . - When sensors are employed at the end effector or at locations within or on the shaft assembly for example, conductors such as wires and/or traces (not shown) may be received or mounted within the
outer tube 1260 or could even be routed along theouter tube 1260 from the sensors to a distalelectrical component 1800′ mounted within thenozzle 1201. Thus, the distalelectrical component 1800′ is rotatable with thenozzle 1201 and the wires/traces attached thereto. In the embodiment illustrated inFIG. 23 , theelectrical component 1800 comprises a connector, battery, etc. that includescontacts 1802′, 1804′, 1806′, 1808′ that are laterally displaced from each other. - The
slip ring connector 1600′ further includes a laminatedslip ring assembly 1610′ that is fabricated from a plurality of conductive rings that are laminated together. More specifically and with reference toFIG. 25 , one form ofslip ring assembly 1610′ may comprise a first non-electricallyconductive flange 1670 that forms a distal end of theslip ring assembly 1610′. Theflange 1670 may be fabricated from a high-heat resistant material, for example. A first electricallyconductive ring 1680 is positioned immediately adjacent thefirst flange 1670. The first electricallyconductive ring 1680 may comprise afirst copper ring 1681 that has afirst gold plating 1682 thereon. A second non-electricallyconductive ring 1672 is adjacent to the first electrically-conductive ring 1680. A second electrically-conductive ring 1684 is adjacent to the second non-electrically-conductive ring 1672. The second electrically-conductive ring 1684 may comprise asecond copper ring 1685 that has a second gold plating 1686 thereon. A third non-electrically-conductive ring 1674 is adjacent to the second electrically-conductive ring 1684. A third electricallyconductive ring 1688 is adjacent to the third non-electricallyconductive ring 1674. The third electricallyconductive ring 1688 may comprise athird copper ring 1689 that has a third gold plating 1690 thereon. A fourth non-electricallyconductive ring 1676 is adjacent to the third electrically-conductive ring 1688. A fourth electricallyconductive ring 1692 is adjacent to the fourth non-electrically-conductive ring 1676. The fourth electrically-conductive ring 1692 is adjacent to the fourth non-electricallyconductive ring 1676. A fifth non-electricallyconductive ring 1678 is adjacent to the fourth electrically-conductive ring 1692 and forms the proximal end of the mountingmember 1610′. The non-electricallyconductive rings conductive ring 1680 forms a first annular electrically-conductive pathway 1700. The second electrically-conductive ring 1682 forms a second annular electrically-conductive pathway 1702 that is laterally or axially spaced from the first annular electrically-conductive pathway 1700. The third electrically-conductive ring 1688 forms a third annular electricallyconductive pathway 1704 that is laterally or axially spaced from the second annular electrically-conductive pathway 1702. The fourth electrically-conductive ring 1692 forms a fourth annular electrically-conductive pathway 1706 that is laterally or axially spaced from the third annular electrically-conductive pathway 1704. Theslip ring assembly 1610′ comprises a one piece molded high temperature resistant, non-conductive material with molded in channels for electromagnetic forming (EMF—Magneformed) copper rings. - As can be seen in
FIG. 24 , theslip ring connector 1600′ further includes a non-conductive transverse mountingmember 1720 that is adapted to be inserted into axially-alignednotches 1710 in each of therings member 1720 has afirst circuit trace 1722 thereon that is adapted for electrical contact with the first annular electrically-conductive pathway 1700 when the transverse mountingmember 1672 is mounted within thenotches 1710. Likewise, asecond circuit trace 1724 is printed on the transverse mountingmember 1720 and is configured for electrical contact with the second annular electricallyconductive pathway 1702. Athird circuit trace 1726 is printed on the transverse mountingmember 1720 and is configured for electrical contact with the third annular electrically-conductive pathway 1704. Afourth circuit trace 1728 is printed on the transverse mountingmember 1720 and is configured for electrical contact with the fourth annular electrically-conductive pathway 1706. - In the arrangement depicted in
FIGS. 23-25 , theslip ring assembly 1610′ is configured to be fixedly (non-rotatably) received on a mountinghub 1241′ on thechassis 1240′. The transverse mountingmember 1720 is received withingroove 1243′ formed in the mountinghub 1241′ which acts as a keyway for the transverse mountingmember 1720 and which serves to prevent theslip ring assembly 1610′ from rotating relative to the mountinghub 1241′. - In the depicted embodiment for example, the
electrical component 1800′ is mounted within thenozzle 1201 for rotation about theslip ring assembly 1610′ such that:contact 1802′ is in constant electrical contact with the first annular electrically-conductive path 1700;contact 1804′ is in constant electrical contact with the second annular electrically-conductive path 1702;contact 1806′ is in constant electrical contact with the third annular electrically-conductive path 1704; andcontact 1808′ is in constant electrical contact with the fourth electrically-conductive path 1706. It will be understood however, that the various advantages of theslip ring connector 1600′ may also be obtained in applications wherein theslip ring assembly 1610′ is supported for rotation about the shaft axis SA-SA and theelectrical component 1800′ is fixedly mounted relative thereto. It will be further appreciated that theslip ring connector 1600′ may be effectively employed in connection with a variety of different components and applications outside the field of surgery wherein it is desirable to provide electrical connections between components that rotate relative to each other. - The
slip ring connector 1600′ comprises a radial slip ring that provides a conductive contact means of passing signal(s) and power to and from any radial position and after shaft rotation. In applications wherein the electrical component comprises a battery contact, the battery contact position can be situated relative to the mounting member to minimize any tolerance stack-up between those components. Theslip ring connector 1600′ represents a low cost coupling arrangement that can be assembled with minimal manufacturing costs. The gold plated traces may also minimize the likelihood of corrosion. The unique and novel contact arrangement facilitates complete clockwise and counterclockwise rotation about the shaft axis while remaining in electrical contact with the corresponding annular electrically-conductive paths. -
FIGS. 26-30 depict another form of electric coupler orslip ring connector 1600″ that may be employed with, for example aninterchangeable shaft assembly 1200″ or a variety of other applications that require electrical connections between components that rotate relative to each other. Theshaft assembly 1200″ may be similar toshaft assemblies 1200 and/or 1200′ described herein except for the differences noted below. Theshaft assembly 1200″ may include a closure tube orouter shaft 1260 and a proximal nozzle 1201 (the upper half ofnozzle 1201 is omitted for clarity). In the illustrated example, theouter shaft 1260 is mounted on ashaft spine 1210 such that theouter tube 1260 may be selectively axially movable thereon. The proximal ends of theshaft spine 1210 and theouter tube 1260 may be rotatably coupled to achassis 1240″ for rotation relative thereto about a shaft axis SA-SA. As was discussed above, theproximal nozzle 1201 may include mounts or mounting lugs that protrude inwardly from the nozzle portions and extend throughcorresponding openings 1266 in theouter tube 1260 to be seated in correspondingrecesses 1211 in theshaft spine 1210. Thus, to rotate theouter shaft 1260 andspine shaft 1210 and presumably an end effector (not shown) coupled thereto about the shaft axis SA-SA relative to thechassis 1240″, the clinician simply rotates thenozzle 1201. - When sensors are employed at the end effector or at locations within or on the shaft assembly for example, conductors such as wires and/or traces (not shown) may be received or mounted within the
outer tube 1260 or could even be routed along theouter tube 1260 from the sensors to a distalelectrical component 1800′″ mounted within thenozzle 1201. In the illustrated embodiment, for example, theelectrical component 1800″ is mounted in thenozzle 1201 such that it is substantially aligned with the shaft axis SA-SA. The distalelectrical component 1800″ is rotatable about the shaft axis SA-SA with thenozzle 1201 and the wires/traces attached thereto. Theelectrical component 1800″ may comprise a connector, a battery, etc. that includes fourcontacts 1802″, 1804″, 1806″, 1808″ that are laterally displaced from each other. - The
slip ring connector 1600″ further includes aslip ring assembly 1610″ that includes abase ring 1900 that is fabricated from a non-electrically conductive material and has a central mounting bore 1902 therethrough. The mountingbore 1902 has aflat surface 1904 and is configured for non-rotational attachment to a mountingflange assembly 1930 that is supported at a distal end of thechassis 1240″. Adistal side 1905 of thebase ring 1900 has a series of concentric electrical-conductive rings rings base ring 1900 by any suitable method. - The
base ring 1900 may further include a circuit trace extending therethrough that is coupled to each of the electrically-conductive rings FIGS. 28-30 , afirst circuit trace 1922 extends through afirst hole 1920 in thebase ring 1900 and is coupled to the first electricallyconductive ring 1906. Thefirst circuit trace 1922 terminates in a first proximal contact portion 1924 on theproximal side 1907 of thebase ring 1900. SeeFIG. 30 . Similarly, asecond circuit trace 1928 extends through asecond hole 1926 in thebase ring 1900 and is coupled to the second electrically-conductive ring 1908. Thesecond circuit trace 1928 terminates in a secondproximal contact 1930 on theproximal side 1907 of thebase ring 1900. Athird circuit trace 1934 extends through athird hole 1932 in the base ring and is attached to the third electrically-conductive ring 1910. Thethird circuit trace 1934 terminates in a thirdproximal contact 1936 on theproximal side 1907 of the base ring. Afourth circuit trace 1940 extends through afourth hole 1938 in thebase ring 1900 to be attached to the fourth electrically-conductive ring 1912. Thefourth circuit trace 1940 terminates in a fourthproximal contact 1942 on theproximal side 1907 of thebase ring 1900. - Referring now to
FIG. 27 , thebase ring 1900 is configured to be non-rotatably supported within thenozzle 1201 by a mountingflange 1950 that is non-rotatably coupled to the mountinghub portion 1241″ of thechassis 1240″. The mountinghub portion 1241″ may be formed with aflat surface 1243″ for supporting a transverse mounting member of the type, for example, described above that includes a plurality (preferably four) leads that may be coupled to, for example, a circuit board or other corresponding electrical components supported on the chassis in the various manners and arrangements described herein as well as in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541. The transverse support member has been omitted for clarity inFIGS. 26 and 27 . However, as can be seen inFIGS. 26 and 27 , the mountingflange 1950 has anotch 1952 therein that is adapted to engage a portion of theflat surface 1243″ on the mountinghub portion 1241″. As can be seen inFIG. 27 , the mountingflange 1950 may further include aflange hub portion 1954 that comprises a series ofspring tabs 1956 that serve to fixedly attach thebase ring 1900 to the mountingflange 1950. It will be understood that theclosure tube 1260 andspine 1210 extend through theflange hub 1954 and are rotatable relative thereto with thenozzle 1201. - In the depicted embodiment for example, the
electrical component 1800″ is mounted within thenozzle 1201 for rotation about theslip ring assembly 1610″ such that, for example,contact 1802″ in thecomponent 1800″ is in constant electrical contact withrings 1906;contact 1804″ is in contact withring 1908;contact 1806″ is in contact withring 1910; andcontact 1808″ is in contact withring 1912 even when thenozzle 1201 is rotated relative to thechassis 1240″. It will be understood however, that the various advantages of theslip ring connector 1600″ may also be obtained in applications wherein theslip ring assembly 1610″ is supported for rotation about the shaft axis SA-SA and theelectrical component 1800″ is fixedly mounted relative thereto. It will be further appreciated that theslip ring connector 1600″ may be effectively employed in connection with a variety of different components and applications outside the field of surgery wherein it is desirable to provide electrical connections between components that rotate relative to each other. - The
slip ring connector 1600″ comprises a radial slip ring that provides a conductive contact means of passing signal(s) and power to and from any radial position and after shaft rotation. In applications wherein the electrical component comprises a battery contact, the battery contact position can be situated relative to the mounting member to minimize any tolerance stack-up between those components. Theslip ring connector 1600″ represents a low cost and compact coupling arrangement that can be assembled with minimal manufacturing costs. The unique and novel contact arrangement facilitates complete clockwise and counterclockwise rotation about the shaft axis while remaining in electrical contact with the corresponding annular electrically-conductive rings. -
FIGS. 31-36 generally depict a motor-driven surgical fastening and cuttinginstrument 2000. As illustrated inFIGS. 31 and 32 , thesurgical instrument 2000 may include ahandle assembly 2002, ashaft assembly 2004, and a power assembly 2006 (or “power source” or “power pack”). Theshaft assembly 2004 may include anend effector 2008 which, in certain circumstances, can be configured to act as an endocutter for clamping, severing, and/or stapling tissue, although, in other instances, different types of end effectors may be used, such as end effectors for other types of surgical devices, graspers, cutters, staplers, clip appliers, access devices, drug/gene therapy devices, ultrasound devices, RF device, and/or laser devices, for example. Several RF devices may be found in U.S. Pat. No. 5,403,312, entitled ELECTROSURGICAL HEMOSTATIC DEVICE, which issued on Apr. 4, 1995, and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/031,573, entitled SURGICAL FASTENING AND CUTTING INSTRUMENT HAVING RF ELECTRODES, filed Feb. 14, 2008. The entire disclosures of U.S. Pat. No. 5,403,312, entitled ELECTROSURGICAL HEMOSTATIC DEVICE, which issued on Apr. 4, 1995, and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/031,573, entitled SURGICAL FASTENING AND CUTTING INSTRUMENT HAVING RF ELECTRODES, filed Feb. 14, 2008, are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. - Referring primarily to
FIGS. 32, 33A and 33B , thehandle assembly 2002 can be employed with a plurality of interchangeable shaft assemblies such as, for example, theshaft assembly 2004. Such interchangeable shaft assemblies may comprise surgical end effectors such as, for example, theend effector 2008 that can be configured to perform one or more surgical tasks or procedures. Examples of suitable interchangeable shaft assemblies are disclosed in U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/782,866, entitled CONTROL SYSTEM OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, filed Mar. 14, 2013. The entire disclosure of U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/782,866, entitled CONTROL SYSTEM OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, filed Mar. 14, 2013, is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. - Referring primarily to
FIG. 32 , thehandle assembly 2002 may comprise ahousing 2010 that consists of ahandle 2012 that may be configured to be grasped, manipulated and actuated by a clinician. However, it will be understood that the various unique and novel arrangements of the various forms of interchangeable shaft assemblies disclosed herein also may be effectively employed in connection with robotically-controlled surgical systems. Thus, the term “housing” also may encompass a housing or similar portion of a robotic system that houses or otherwise operably supports at least one drive system that is configured to generate and apply at least one control motion which could be used to actuate the interchangeable shaft assemblies disclosed herein and their respective equivalents. For example, the interchangeable shaft assemblies disclosed herein may be employed with various robotic systems, instruments, components and methods disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/118,241, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH ROTATABLE STAPLE DEPLOYMENT ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,072,535. U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/118,241, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH ROTATABLE STAPLE DEPLOYMENT ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,072,535, is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. - Referring again to
FIG. 32 , thehandle assembly 2002 may operably support a plurality of drive systems therein that can be configured to generate and apply various control motions to corresponding portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly that is operably attached thereto. For example, thehandle assembly 2002 can operably support a first or closure drive system, which may be employed to apply closing and opening motions to theshaft assembly 2004 while operably attached or coupled to thehandle assembly 2002. In at least one form, thehandle assembly 2002 may operably support a firing drive system that can be configured to apply firing motions to corresponding portions of the interchangeable shaft assembly attached thereto. - Referring primarily to
FIGS. 33A and 33B , thehandle assembly 2002 may include amotor 2014 which can be controlled by amotor driver 2015 and can be employed by the firing system of thesurgical instrument 2000. In various forms, themotor 2014 may be a DC brushed driving motor having a maximum rotation of, approximately, 25,000 RPM, for example. In other arrangements, themotor 2014 may include a brushless motor, a cordless motor, a synchronous motor, a stepper motor, or any other suitable electric motor. In certain circumstances, themotor driver 2015 may comprise an H-Bridge FETs 2019, as illustrated inFIGS. 33A and 33B , for example. Themotor 2014 can be powered by the power assembly 2006 (FIG. 35 ), which can be releasably mounted to thehandle assembly 2002,power assembly 2006 being configured to supply control power to thesurgical instrument 2000. Thepower assembly 2006 may comprise a battery 2007 (FIG. 36 ) which may include a number of battery cells connected in series that can be used as the power source to power thesurgical instrument 2000. In such configuration, thepower assembly 2006 may be referred to as a battery pack. In certain circumstances, the battery cells of thepower assembly 2006 may be replaceable and/or rechargeable. In at least one example, the battery cells can be Lithium-Ion batteries which can be separably couplable to thepower assembly 2006. - Examples of drive systems and closure systems that are suitable for use with the
surgical instrument 2000 are disclosed in U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/782,866, entitled CONTROL SYSTEM OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, and filed Mar. 14, 2013, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. For example, theelectric motor 2014 can include a rotatable shaft (not shown) that may operably interface with a gear reducer assembly that can be mounted in meshing engagement with a set, or rack, of drive teeth on a longitudinally-movable drive member. In use, a voltage polarity provided by the battery 2007 (FIG. 36 ) can operate theelectric motor 2014 to drive the longitudinally-movable drive member to effectuate theend effector 2008. For example, themotor 2014 can be configured to drive the longitudinally-movable drive member to advance a firing mechanism to fire staples into tissue captured by theend effector 2008 from a staple cartridge assembled with theend effector 2008 and/or advance a cutting member 2011 (FIG. 34 ) to cut tissue captured by theend effector 2008, for example. - In certain circumstances, the
surgical instrument 2000 may comprise a lockout mechanism to prevent a user from coupling incompatible handle assemblies and power assemblies. For example, as illustrated inFIG. 35 , thepower assembly 2006 may include amating element 2011. In certain circumstances, themating element 2011 can be a tab extending from thepower assembly 2006. In certain instances, thehandle assembly 2002 may comprise a corresponding mating element (not shown) for mating engagement with themating element 2011. Such an arrangement can be useful in preventing a user from coupling incompatible handle assemblies and power assemblies. - The reader will appreciate that different interchangeable shaft assemblies may possess different power requirements. The power required to advance a cutting member through an end effector and/or to fire staples may depend, for example, on the distance traveled by the cutting member, the staple cartridge being used, and/or the type of tissue being treated. That said, the
power assembly 2006 can be configured to meet the power requirements of various interchangeable shaft assemblies. For example, as illustrated inFIG. 34 , the cuttingmember 2011 of theshaft assembly 2004 can be configured to travel a distance D1 along theend effector 2008. On the other hand, anotherinterchangeable shaft assembly 2004′ may include a cuttingmember 2011′ which can be configured to travel a distance D2, different from the distance D1, along anend effector 2008′ of theinterchangeable shaft assembly 2004′. Thepower assembly 2006 can be configured to provide a first power output sufficient to power themotor 2014 to advance the cuttingmember 2011 the distance D1 while theinterchangeable shaft assembly 2004 is coupled to thehandle assembly 2002 and can be configured to provide a second power output, different from the first power output, which is sufficient to power themotor 2014 to advance the cuttingmember 2011′ the distance D2 while theinterchangeable shaft assembly 2004′ is coupled to thehandle assembly 2002, for example. As illustrated inFIGS. 33A and 33B and as described below in greater detail, thepower assembly 2006 may include a power management controller 2016 (FIG. 36 ) which can be configured to modulate the power output of thepower assembly 2006 to deliver a first power output to power themotor 2014 to advance the cuttingmember 2011 the distance D1 while theinterchangeable shaft assembly 2004 is coupled to thehandle assembly 2002 and to deliver a second power output to power themotor 2014 to advance the cuttingmember 2011′ the distance D2 while theinterchangeable shaft assembly 2004′ is coupled to thehandle assembly 2002, for example. Such modulation can be beneficial in avoiding transmission of excessive power to themotor 2014 beyond the requirements of an interchangeable shaft assembly that is coupled to thehandle assembly 2002. - Referring again to
FIGS. 32-36 , thehandle assembly 2002 can be releasably coupled or attached to an interchangeable shaft assembly such as, for example, theshaft assembly 2004. In certain instances, thehandle assembly 2002 can be releasably coupled or attached to thepower assembly 2006. Various coupling means can be utilized to releasably couple thehandle assembly 2002 to theshaft assembly 2004 and/or to thepower assembly 2006. Exemplary coupling mechanisms are described in U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/782,866, entitled CONTROL SYSTEM OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, and filed Mar. 14, 2013. For example, theshaft assembly 2004 may include a shaft attachment module 2018 (FIG. 32 ) which may further include a latch actuator assembly that may be configured to cooperate with a lock yoke that is pivotally coupled to theshaft attachment module 2018 for selective pivotal travel relative thereto, wherein the lock yoke may include proximally protruding lock lugs that are configured for releasable engagement with corresponding lock detents or grooves formed in a handassembly attachment module 2020 of thehandle assembly 2002. - Referring now primarily to
FIGS. 33A-36 , theshaft assembly 2004 may include ashaft assembly controller 2022 which can communicate with thepower management controller 2016 through aninterface 2024 while theshaft assembly 2004 and thepower assembly 2006 are coupled to thehandle assembly 2002. For example, theinterface 2024 may comprise afirst interface portion 2025 which may include one or moreelectric connectors 2026 for coupling engagement with corresponding shaft assemblyelectric connectors 2028 and asecond interface portion 2027 which may include one or moreelectric connectors 2030 for coupling engagement with corresponding power assemblyelectric connectors 2032 to permit electrical communication between theshaft assembly controller 2022 and thepower management controller 2016 while theshaft assembly 2004 and thepower assembly 2006 are coupled to thehandle assembly 2002. One or more communication signals can be transmitted through theinterface 2024 to communicate one or more of the power requirements of the attachedinterchangeable shaft assembly 2004 to thepower management controller 2016. In response, the power management controller may modulate the power output of thebattery 2007 of thepower assembly 2006, as described below in greater detail, in accordance with the power requirements of the attachedshaft assembly 2004. In certain circumstances, one or more of theelectric connectors handle assembly 2002 to theshaft assembly 2004 and/or to thepower assembly 2006 to allow electrical communication between theshaft assembly controller 2022 and thepower management controller 2016. - In certain circumstances, the
interface 2024 can facilitate transmission of the one or more communication signals between thepower management controller 2016 and theshaft assembly controller 2022 by routing such communication signals through a main controller 2017 (FIGS. 33A and 33B ) residing in thehandle assembly 2002, for example. In other circumstances, theinterface 2024 can facilitate a direct line of communication between thepower management controller 2016 and theshaft assembly controller 2022 through thehandle assembly 2002 while theshaft assembly 2004 and thepower assembly 2006 are coupled to thehandle assembly 2002. - In one instance, the
main microcontroller 2017 may be any single core or multicore processor such as those known under the trade name ARM Cortex by Texas Instruments. In one instance, thesurgical instrument 2000 may comprise apower management controller 2016 such as, for example, a safety microcontroller platform comprising two microcontroller-based families such as TMS570 and RM4x known under the trade name Hercules ARM Cortex R4, also by Texas Instruments. Nevertheless, other suitable substitutes for microcontrollers and safety processor may be employed, without limitation. In one instance, the safety processor 1004 may be configured specifically for IEC 61508 and ISO 26262 safety critical applications, among others, to provide advanced integrated safety features while delivering scalable performance, connectivity, and memory options. - In certain instances, the
microcontroller 2017 may be an LM 4F230H5QR, available from Texas Instruments, for example. In at least one example, the Texas Instruments LM4F230H5QR is an ARM Cortex-M4F Processor Core comprising on-chip memory of 256 KB single-cycle flash memory, or other non-volatile memory, up to 40 MHz, a prefetch buffer to improve performance above 40 MHz, a 32 KB single-cycle serial random access memory (SRAM), internal read-only memory (ROM) loaded with StellarisWare® software, 2 KB electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), one or more pulse width modulation (PWM) modules, one or more quadrature encoder inputs (QEI) analog, one or more 12-bit Analog-to-Digital Converters (ADC) with 12 analog input channels, among other features that are readily available for the product datasheet. The present disclosure should not be limited in this context. - Referring now primarily to
FIGS. 36 and 37 , thepower assembly 2006 may include apower management circuit 2034 which may comprise thepower management controller 2016, apower modulator 2038, and acurrent sense circuit 2036. Thepower management circuit 2034 can be configured to modulate power output of thebattery 2007 based on the power requirements of theshaft assembly 2004 while theshaft assembly 2004 and thepower assembly 2006 are coupled to thehandle assembly 2002. For example, thepower management controller 2016 can be programmed to control thepower modulator 2038 of the power output of thepower assembly 2006 and thecurrent sense circuit 2036 can be employed to monitor power output of thepower assembly 2006 to provide feedback to thepower management controller 2016 about the power output of thebattery 2007 so that thepower management controller 2016 may adjust the power output of thepower assembly 2006 to maintain a desired output, as illustrated inFIG. 37 . - It is noteworthy that the
power management controller 2016 and/or theshaft assembly controller 2022 each may comprise one or more processors and/or memory units which may store a number of software modules. Although certain modules and/or blocks of thesurgical instrument 2000 may be described by way of example, it can be appreciated that a greater or lesser number of modules and/or blocks may be used. Further, although various instances may be described in terms of modules and/or blocks to facilitate description, such modules and/or blocks may be implemented by one or more hardware components, e.g., processors, Digital Signal Processors (DSPs), Programmable Logic Devices (PLDs), Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), circuits, registers and/or software components, e.g., programs, subroutines, logic and/or combinations of hardware and software components. - In certain instances, the
surgical instrument 2000 may comprise anoutput device 2042 which may include one or more devices for providing a sensory feedback to a user. Such devices may comprise, for example, visual feedback devices (e.g., an LCD display screen, LED indicators), audio feedback devices (e.g., a speaker, a buzzer) or tactile feedback devices (e.g., haptic actuators). In certain circumstances, theoutput device 2042 may comprise adisplay 2043 which may be included in thehandle assembly 2002, as illustrated inFIG. 36 . Theshaft assembly controller 2022 and/or thepower management controller 2016 can provide feedback to a user of thesurgical instrument 2000 through theoutput device 2042. Theinterface 2024 can be configured to connect theshaft assembly controller 2022 and/or thepower management controller 2016 to theoutput device 2042. The reader will appreciate that theoutput device 2042 can instead be integrated with thepower assembly 2006. In such circumstances, communication between theoutput device 2042 and theshaft assembly controller 2022 may be accomplished through theinterface 2024 while theshaft assembly 2004 is coupled to thehandle assembly 2002. - Referring to
FIGS. 38 and 39 , asurgical instrument 2050 is illustrated. Thesurgical instrument 2050 is similar in many respects to the surgical fastening and cutting instrument 2000 (FIG. 31 ). For example, thesurgical instrument 2050 may include anend effector 2052 which is similar in many respects to theend effector 2008. For example, theend effector 2052 can be configured to act as an endocutter for clamping, severing, and/or stapling tissue. - Further to the above, the
surgical instrument 2050 may include aninterchangeable working assembly 2054 which may include ahandle assembly 2053 and ashaft 2055 extending between thehandle assembly 2053 and theend effector 2052, as illustrated inFIG. 38 . In certain instances, thesurgical instrument 2050 may include apower assembly 2056 which can be employed with a plurality of interchangeable working assemblies such as, for example, the interchangeable workingassembly 2054. Such interchangeable working assemblies may include surgical end effectors such as, for example, theend effector 2052 that can be configured to perform one or more surgical tasks or procedures. In certain circumstances, thehandle assembly 2053 and theshaft 2055 may be integrated into a single unit. In other circumstances, thehandle assembly 2053 and theshaft 2055 may be separably couplable to each other. - Similar to the
surgical instrument 2000, thesurgical instrument 2050 may operably support a plurality of drive systems which can be powered by thepower assembly 2056 while thepower assembly 2056 is coupled to the interchangeable workingassembly 2054. For example, the interchangeable workingassembly 2054 can operably support a closure drive system, which may be employed to apply closing and opening motions to theend effector 2052. In at least one form, the interchangeable workingassembly 2054 may operably support a firing drive system that can be configured to apply firing motions to theend effector 2052. Examples of drive systems suitable for use with thesurgical instrument 2050 are described in U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/782,866, entitled CONTROL SYSTEM OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, and filed Mar. 14, 2013, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. - Referring to
FIG. 39 , thepower assembly 2056 of thesurgical instrument 2050 can be separably coupled to an interchangeable working assembly such as, for example, the interchangeable workingassembly 2054. Various coupling means can be utilized to releasably couple thepower assembly 2056 to the interchangeable workingassembly 2054. Exemplary coupling mechanisms are described herein and are described in U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/782,866, entitled CONTROL SYSTEM OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, and filed Mar. 14, 2013, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. - Still referring to
FIG. 39 , thepower assembly 2056 may include apower source 2058 such as, for example, a battery which can be configured to power the interchangeable workingassembly 2054 while coupled to thepower assembly 2056. In certain instances, thepower assembly 2056 may include amemory 2060 which can be configured to receive and store information about thebattery 2058 and/or the interchangeable workingassembly 2054 such as, for example, the state of charge of thebattery 2058, the number of treatment cycles performed using thebattery 2058, and/or identification information for the interchangeable working assemblies coupled to thepower assembly 2056 during the life cycle of thebattery 2058. Further to the above, the interchangeable workingassembly 2054 may include acontroller 2062 which can be configured to provide thememory 2060 with such information about thebattery 2058 and/or the interchangeable workingassembly 2054. - Still referring to
FIG. 39 , thepower assembly 2056 may include aninterface 2064 which can be configured to facilitate electrical communication between thememory 2060 of thepower assembly 2056 and a controller of an interchangeable working assembly that is coupled to thepower assembly 2056 such as, for example, thecontroller 2062 of the interchangeable workingassembly 2054. For example, theinterface 2064 may comprise one ormore connectors 2066 for coupling engagement with corresponding workingassembly connectors 2068 to permit electrical communication between thecontroller 2062 and thememory 2060 while the interchangeable workingassembly 2054 is coupled to thepower assembly 2056. In certain circumstances, one or more of theelectric connectors 2066 and/or 2068 may comprise switches which can be activated after coupling engagement of the interchangeable workingassembly 2054 and thepower assembly 2056 to allow electric communication between thecontroller 2062 and thememory 2060. - Still referring to
FIG. 39 , thepower assembly 2056 may include a state ofcharge monitoring circuit 2070. In certain circumstances, the state ofcharge monitoring circuit 2070 may comprise a coulomb counter. Thecontroller 2062 can be in communication with the state ofcharge monitoring circuit 2070 while the interchangeable workingassembly 2054 is coupled to thepower assembly 2056. The state ofcharge monitoring circuit 2070 can be operable to provide for accurate monitoring of charge states of thebattery 2058. -
FIG. 40 depicts anexemplary module 2072 for use with a controller of an interchangeable working assembly such as, for example, thecontroller 2062 of the interchangeable workingassembly 2054 while coupled to thepower assembly 2056. For example, thecontroller 2062 may comprise one or more processors and/or memory units which may store a number of software modules such as, for example, themodule 2072. Although certain modules and/or blocks of thesurgical instrument 2050 may be described by way of example, it can be appreciated that a greater or lesser number of modules and/or blocks may be used. Further, although various instances may be described in terms of modules and/or blocks to facilitate description, such modules and/or blocks may be implemented by one or more hardware components, e.g., processors, DSPs, PLDs, ASICs, circuits, registers and/or software components, e.g., programs, subroutines, logic and/or combinations of hardware and software components. - In any event, upon coupling the interchangeable working
assembly 2054 to thepower assembly 2056, theinterface 2064 may facilitate communication between thecontroller 2062 and thememory 2060 and/or the state ofcharge monitoring circuit 2070 to execute themodule 2072, as illustrated inFIG. 40 . For example, thecontroller 2062 of the interchangeable workingassembly 2054 may utilize the state ofcharge monitoring circuit 2070 to measure the state of charge of thebattery 2058. Thecontroller 2062 may then access thememory 2060 and determine whether a previous value for the state of charge of thebattery 2058 is stored in thememory 2060. When a previous value is detected, thecontroller 2060 may compare the measured value to the previously stored value. When the measured value is different from the previously stored value, thecontroller 2060 may update the previously stored value. When no value is previously recorded, thecontroller 2060 may store the measured value into thememory 2060. In certain circumstances, thecontroller 2060 may provide visual feedback to a user of thesurgical instrument 2050 as to the measured state of charge of thebattery 2058. For example, thecontroller 2060 may display the measured value of the state of charge of thebattery 2058 on an LCD display screen which, in some circumstances, can be integrated with the interchangeable workingassembly 2054. - Further to the above, the
module 2072 also can be executed by other controllers upon coupling the interchangeable working assemblies of such other controllers to thepower assembly 2056. For example, a user may disconnect the interchangeable workingassembly 2054 from thepower assembly 2056. The user may then connect another interchangeable working assembly comprising another controller to thepower assembly 2056. Such controller may in turn utilize thecoulomb counting circuit 2070 to measure the state of charge of thebattery 2058 and may then access thememory 2060 and determine whether a previous value for the state of charge of thebattery 2058 is stored in thememory 2060 such as, for example, a value entered by thecontroller 2060 while the interchangeable workingassembly 2054 was coupled to thepower assembly 2056. When a previous value is detected, the controller may compare the measured value to the previously stored value. When the measured value is different from the previously stored value, the controller may update the previously stored value. -
FIG. 41 depicts a surgical instrument 2090 which is similar in many respects to the surgical instrument 2000 (FIG. 31 ) and/or the surgical instrument 2050 (FIG. 38 ). For example, the surgical instrument 2090 may include anend effector 2092 which is similar in many respects to theend effector 2008 and/or theend effector 2052. For example, theend effector 2092 can be configured to act as an endocutter for clamping, severing, and/or stapling tissue. - Further to the above, the surgical instrument 2090 may include an
interchangeable working assembly 2094 which may include ahandle assembly 2093 and ashaft 2095 which may extend between thehandle assembly 2093 and theend effector 2092. In certain instances, the surgical instrument 2090 may include apower assembly 2096 which can be employed with a plurality of interchangeable working assemblies such as, for example, the interchangeable workingassembly 2094. Such interchangeable working assemblies may comprise surgical end effectors such as, for example, theend effector 2092 that can be configured to perform one or more surgical tasks or procedures. In certain circumstances, thehandle assembly 2093 and theshaft 2095 may be integrated into a single unit. In other circumstances, thehandle assembly 2093 and theshaft 2095 can be separably couplable to each other. - Furthermore, the
power assembly 2096 of the surgical instrument 2090 can be separably couplable to an interchangeable working assembly such as, for example, the interchangeable workingassembly 2094. Various coupling means can be utilized to releasably couple thepower assembly 2096 to the interchangeable workingassembly 2094. Similar to thesurgical instrument 2050 and/or thesurgical instrument 2000, the surgical instrument 2090 may operably support one or more drive systems which can be powered by thepower assembly 2096 while thepower assembly 2096 is coupled to the interchangeable workingassembly 2094. For example, the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 may operably support a closure drive system, which may be employed to apply closing and/or opening motions to theend effector 2092. In at least one form, the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 may operably support a firing drive system that can be configured to apply firing motions to theend effector 2092. Exemplary drive systems and coupling mechanisms for use with the surgical instrument 2090 are described in greater detail U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/782,866, entitled CONTROL SYSTEM OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, and filed Mar. 14, 2013, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. - Referring to
FIGS. 41-45 , the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 may include a motor such as, for example, the motor 2014 (FIG. 44 ) and a motor driver such as, for example, the motor driver 2015 (FIG. 44 ) which can be employed to motivate the closure drive system and/or the firing drive system of the interchangeable workingassembly 2094, for example. Themotor 2014 can be powered by a battery 2098 (FIG. 42 ) which may reside in thepower assembly 2096. As illustrated inFIGS. 42 and 43 , thebattery 2098 may include a number of battery cells connected in series that can be used as a power source to power themotor 2014. In certain instances, the battery cells of thepower assembly 2096 may be replaceable and/or rechargeable. The battery cells can be Lithium-Ion batteries which can be separably couplable to thepower assembly 2096, for example. In use, a voltage polarity provided by thepower assembly 2096 can operate themotor 2014 to drive a longitudinally-movable drive member to effectuate theend effector 2092. For example, themotor 2014 can be configured to drive the longitudinally-movable drive member to advance a cutting member to cut tissue captured by theend effector 2092 and/or a firing mechanism to fire staples from a staple cartridge assembled with theend effector 2092, for example. The staples can be fired into tissue captured by theend effector 2092, for example. - Referring now to
FIGS. 41-45 , the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 may include a working assembly controller 2102 (FIGS. 44 and 45 ) and thepower assembly 2096 may include a power assembly controller 2100 (FIGS. 42 and 43 ). The workingassembly controller 2102 can be configured to generate one or more signals to communicate with thepower assembly controller 2100. In certain instances, the workingassembly controller 2102 may generate the one or more signals to communicate with thepower assembly controller 2100 by modulating power transmission from thepower assembly 2096 to the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 while thepower assembly 2096 is coupled to the interchangeable workingassembly 2094. - Furthermore, the
power assembly controller 2100 can be configured to perform one or more functions in response to receiving the one or more signals generated by the workingassembly controller 2102. For example, the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 may comprise a power requirement and the workingassembly controller 2102 may be configured to generate a signal to instruct thepower assembly controller 2100 to select a power output of thebattery 2098 in accordance with the power requirement of the interchangeable workingassembly 2094; the signal can be generated, as described above, by modulating power transmission from thepower assembly 2096 to the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 while thepower assembly 2096 is coupled to the interchangeable workingassembly 2094. In response to receiving the signal, thepower assembly controller 2100 may set the power output of thebattery 2098 to accommodate the power requirement of the interchangeable workingassembly 2094. The reader will appreciate that various interchangeable working assemblies may be utilized with thepower assembly 2096. The various interchangeable working assemblies may comprise various power requirements and may generate signals unique to their power requirements during their coupling engagement with thepower assembly 2096 to alert thepower assembly controller 2100 to set the power output of thebattery 2098 in accordance with their power requirements. - Referring now primarily to
FIGS. 42 and 43 , thepower assembly 2096 may include apower modulator control 2106 which may comprise, for example, one or more field-effect transistors (FETs), a Darlington array, an adjustable amplifier, and/or any other power modulator. Thepower assembly controller 2100 may actuate thepower modulator control 2106 to set the power output of thebattery 2098 to the power requirement of the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 in response to the signal generated by workingassembly controller 2102 while the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 is coupled to thepower assembly 2096. - Still referring primarily to
FIGS. 42 and 43 , thepower assembly controller 2100 can be configured to monitor power transmission from thepower assembly 2096 to the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 for the one or more signals generated by the workingassembly controller 2102 of the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 while he interchangeable workingassembly 2094 is coupled to thepower assembly 2096. As illustrated inFIG. 42 , thepower assembly controller 2100 may utilize a voltage monitoring mechanism for monitoring the voltage across thebattery 2098 to detect the one or more signals generated by the workingassembly controller 2102, for example. In certain instances, a voltage conditioner can be utilized to scale the voltage of thebattery 2098 to be readable by an Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) of thepower assembly controller 2100. As illustrated inFIG. 42 , the voltage conditioner may comprise avoltage divider 2108 which can create a reference voltage or a low voltage signal proportional to the voltage of thebattery 2098 which can be measured and reported to thepower assembly controller 2100 through the ADC, for example. - In other circumstances, as illustrated in
FIG. 43 , thepower assembly 2096 may comprise a current monitoring mechanism for monitoring current transmitted to the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 to detect the one or more signals generated by the workingassembly controller 2102, for example. In certain instances, thepower assembly 2096 may comprise acurrent sensor 2110 which can be utilized to monitor current transmitted to the interchangeable workingassembly 2094. The monitored current can be reported to thepower assembly controller 2100 through an ADC, for example. In other circumstances, thepower assembly controller 2100 may be configured to simultaneously monitor both of the current transmitted to the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 and the corresponding voltage across thebattery 2098 to detect the one or more signals generated by the workingassembly controller 2102. The reader will appreciate that various other mechanisms for monitoring current and/or voltage can be utilized by thepower assembly controller 2100 to detect the one or more signals generated by the workingassembly controller 2102; all such mechanisms are contemplated by the present disclosure. - As illustrated in
FIG. 44 , the workingassembly controller 2102 can be configured to generate the one or more signals for communication with thepower assembly controller 2100 by effectuating themotor driver 2015 to modulate the power transmitted to themotor 2014 from thebattery 2098. In result, the voltage across thebattery 2098 and/or the current drawn from thebattery 2098 to power themotor 2014 may form discrete patterns or waveforms that represent the one or more signals. As described above, thepower assembly controller 2100 can be configured to monitor the voltage across thebattery 2098 and/or the current drawn from thebattery 2098 for the one or more signals generated by the workingassembly controller 2102. - Upon detecting a signal, the
power assembly controller 2100 can be configured to perform one or more functions that correspond to the detected signal. In at least one example, upon detecting a first signal, thepower assembly controller 2100 can be configured to actuate thepower modulator control 2106 to set the power output of thebattery 2098 to a first duty cycle. In at least one example, upon detecting a second signal, thepower assembly controller 2100 can be configured to actuate thepower modulator control 2106 to set the power output of thebattery 2098 to a second duty cycle different from the first duty cycle. - In certain circumstances, as illustrated in
FIG. 45 , the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 may include apower modulation circuit 2012 which may comprise one or more field-effect transistors (FETs) which can be controlled by the workingassembly controller 2102 to generate a signal or a waveform recognizable by thepower assembly controller 2100. For example, in certain circumstances, the workingassembly controller 2102 may operate thepower modulation circuit 2012 to amplify the voltage higher than the voltage of thebattery 2098 to trigger a new power mode of thepower assembly 2096, for example. - Referring now primarily to
FIGS. 42 and 43 , thepower assembly 2096 may comprise aswitch 2104 which can be switchable between an open position and a closed position. Theswitch 2104 can be transitioned from the open position to the closed positioned when thepower assembly 2096 is coupled with the interchangeable workingassembly 2094, for example. In certain instances, theswitch 2104 can be manually transitioned from the open position to the closed position after thepower assembly 2096 is coupled with the interchangeable workingassembly 2094, for example. While theswitch 2104 is in the open position, components of thepower assembly 2096 may draw sufficiently low or no power to retain capacity of thebattery 2098 for clinical use. Theswitch 2104 can be a mechanical, reed, hall, or any other suitable switching mechanism. Furthermore, in certain circumstances, thepower assembly 2096 may include anoptional power supply 2105 which may be configured to provide sufficient power to various components of thepower assembly 2096 during use of thebattery 2098. Similarly, the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 also may include anoptional power supply 2107 which can be configured to provide sufficient power to various components of the interchangeable workingassembly 2094. - In use, as illustrated in
FIG. 46 , thepower assembly 2096 can be coupled to the interchangeable workingassembly 2094. In certain instances, as described above, theswitch 2104 can be transitioned to the closed configuration to electrically connect the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 to thepower assembly 2096. In response, the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 may power up and may, at least initially, draw relatively low current from thebattery 2098. For example, the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 may draw less than or equal to 1 ampere to power various components of the interchangeable workingassembly 2094. In certain instances, thepower assembly 2096 also may power up as theswitch 2014 is transitioned to the closed position. In response, thepower assembly controller 2100 may begin to monitor current draw from the interchangeable workingassembly 2094, as described in greater detail above, by monitoring voltage across thebattery 2098 and/or current transmission from thebattery 2098 to the interchangeable workingassembly 2094, for example. - To generate and transmit a communication signal to the
power assembly controller 2100 via power modulation, the workingassembly controller 2102 may employ themotor drive 2015 to pulse power to themotor 2014 in patterns or waveforms of power spikes, for example. In certain circumstances, the workingassembly controller 2102 can be configured to communicate with themotor driver 2015 to rapidly switch the direction of motion of themotor 2014 by rapidly switching the voltage polarity across the windings of themotor 2014 to limit the effective current transmission to themotor 2014 resulting from the power spikes. In result, as illustrated inFIG. 47C , the effective motor displacement resulting from the power spikes can be reduced to minimize effective displacement of a drive system of the surgical instrument 2090 that is coupled to themotor 2014 in response to the power spikes. - Further to the above, the working
assembly controller 2102 may communicate with thepower assembly controller 2100 by employing themotor driver 2015 to draw power from thebattery 2098 in spikes arranged in predetermined packets or groups which can be repeated over predetermined time periods to form patterns detectable by thepower assembly controller 2100. For example, as illustrated inFIGS. 47A and 47B , thepower assembly controller 2100 can be configured to monitor voltage across thebattery 2100 for predetermined voltage patterns such as, for example, the voltage pattern 2103 (FIG. 47A ) and/or predetermined current patterns such as, for example, the current pattern 2109 (FIG. 47B ) using voltage and/or current monitoring mechanisms as described in greater detail above. Furthermore, thepower assembly controller 2100 can be configured to perform one or more functions upon detecting of a pattern. The reader will appreciate that the communication between thepower assembly controller 2100 and the workingassembly controller 2102 via power transmission modulation may reduce the number of connection lines needed between the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 and thepower assembly 2096. - In certain circumstances, the
power assembly 2096 can be employed with various interchangeable working assemblies of multiple generations which may comprise different power requirements. Some of the various interchangeable workings assemblies may comprise communication systems, as described above, while others may lack such communication systems. For example, thepower assembly 2096 can be utilized with a first generation interchangeable working assembly which lacks the communication system described above. Alternatively, thepower assembly 2096 can be utilized with a second generation interchangeable working assembly such as, for example, the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 which comprises a communication system, as described above. - Further to the above, the first generation interchangeable working assembly may comprise a first power requirement and the second generation interchangeable working assembly may comprise a second power requirement which can be different from the first power requirement. For example, the first power requirement may be less than the second power requirement. To accommodate the first power requirement of the first generation interchangeable working assembly and the second power requirement of the second generation interchangeable working assembly, the
power assembly 2096 may comprise a first power mode for use with the first generation interchangeable working assembly and a second power mode for use with the second generation interchangeable working assembly. In certain instances, thepower assembly 2096 can be configured to operate at a default first power mode corresponding to the power requirement of the first generation interchangeable working assembly. As such, when a first generation interchangeable working assembly is connected to thepower assembly 2096, the default first power mode of thepower assembly 2096 may accommodate the first power requirement of the first generation interchangeable working assembly. However, when a second generation interchangeable working assembly such as, for example, the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 is connected to thepower assembly 2096, the workingassembly controller 2102 of the interchangeable workingassembly 2094 may communicate, as described above, with thepower assembly controller 2100 of thepower assembly 2096 to switch thepower assembly 2096 to the second power mode to accommodate the second power requirement of the interchangeable workingassembly 2094. The reader will appreciate that since the first generation interchangeable working assembly lacks the ability to generate a communication signal, thepower assembly 2096 will remain in the default first power mode while connected to the first generation interchangeable working assembly. - As described above, the
battery 2098 can be rechargeable. In certain circumstances, it may be desirable to drain thebattery 2098 prior to shipping thepower assembly 2096. A dedicated drainage circuit can be activated to drain thebattery 2098 in preparation for shipping of thepower assembly 2096. Upon reaching its final destination, thebattery 2098 can be recharged for use during a surgical procedure. However, the drainage circuit may continue to consume energy from thebattery 2098 during clinical use. In certain circumstances, the interchangeable workingassembly controller 2102 can be configured to transmit a drainage circuit deactivation signal to thepower assembly controller 2100 by modulating power transmission from thebattery 2098 to themotor 2014, as described in greater detail above. Thepower assembly controller 2100 can be programmed to deactivate the drainage circuit to prevent drainage of thebattery 2098 by the drainage circuit in response to the drainage circuit deactivation signal, for example. The reader will appreciate that various communication signals can be generated by the workingassembly controller 2102 to instruct thepower assembly controller 2100 to perform various functions while thepower assembly 2096 is coupled to the interchangeable workingassembly 2094. - Referring again to
FIGS. 42-45 , thepower assembly controller 2100 and/or the workingassembly controller 2102 may comprise one or more processors and/or memory units which may store a number of software modules. Although certain modules and/or blocks of thesurgical instrument 2050 may be described by way of example, it can be appreciated that a greater or lesser number of modules and/or blocks may be used. Further, although various instances may be described in terms of modules and/or blocks to facilitate description, such modules and/or blocks may be implemented by one or more hardware components, e.g., processors, DSPs, PLDs, ASICs, circuits, registers and/or software components, e.g., programs, subroutines, logic and/or combinations of hardware and software components. -
FIG. 48 generally depicts a motor-drivensurgical instrument 2200. In certain circumstances, thesurgical instrument 2200 may include ahandle assembly 2202, ashaft assembly 2204, and a power assembly 2206 (or “power source” or “power pack”). Theshaft assembly 2204 may include anend effector 2208 which, in certain circumstances, can be configured to act as an endocutter for clamping, severing, and/or stapling tissue, although, in other circumstances, different types of end effectors may be used, such as end effectors for other types of surgical devices, graspers, cutters, staplers, clip appliers, access devices, drug/gene therapy devices, ultrasound, RF and/or laser devices, etc. Several RF devices may be found in U.S. Pat. No. 5,403,312, entitled ELECTROSURGICAL HEMOSTATIC DEVICE, which issued on Apr. 4, 1995, and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/031,573, entitled SURGICAL FASTENING AND CUTTING INSTRUMENT HAVING RF ELECTRODES, filed Feb. 14, 2008, the entire disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. - In certain circumstances, the
handle assembly 2202 can be separably couplable to theshaft assembly 2204, for example. In such circumstances, thehandle assembly 2202 can be employed with a plurality of interchangeable shaft assemblies which may comprise surgical end effectors such as, for example, theend effector 2208 that can be configured to perform one or more surgical tasks or procedures. For example, one or more of the interchangeable shaft assemblies may employ end effectors that are adapted to support different sizes and types of staple cartridges, have different shaft lengths, sizes, and types, etc. Examples of suitable interchangeable shaft assemblies are disclosed in U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/782,866, entitled CONTROL SYSTEM OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, and filed Mar. 14, 2013, the entire disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. - Referring still to
FIG. 48 , thehandle assembly 2202 may comprise ahousing 2210 that consists of ahandle 2212 that may be configured to be grasped, manipulated, and/or actuated by a clinician. However, it will be understood that the various unique and novel arrangements of thehousing 2210 also may be effectively employed in connection with robotically-controlled surgical systems. Thus, the term “housing” also may encompass a housing or similar portion of a robotic system that houses or otherwise operably supports at least one drive system that is configured to generate and apply at least one control motion which could be used to actuate theshaft assembly 2204 disclosed herein and its respective equivalents. For example, thehousing 2210 disclosed herein may be employed with various robotic systems, instruments, components and methods disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/118,241, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH ROTATABLE STAPLE DEPLOYMENT ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,072,535, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. - In at least one form, the
surgical instrument 2200 may be a surgical fastening and cutting instrument. Furthermore, thehousing 2210 may operably support one or more drive systems. For example, as illustrated inFIG. 50 , thehousing 2210 may support a drive system referred to herein as firingdrive system 2214 that is configured to apply firing motions to theend effector 2208. The firingdrive system 2214 may employ anelectric motor 2216, which can be located in thehandle 2212, for example. In various forms, themotor 2216 may be a DC brushed driving motor having a maximum rotation of, approximately, 25,000 RPM, for example. In other arrangements, the motor may include a brushless motor, a cordless motor, a synchronous motor, a stepper motor, or any other suitable electric motor. A battery 2218 (or “power source” or “power pack”), such as a Li ion battery, for example, may be coupled to thehandle 2212 to supply power to a controlcircuit board assembly 2220 and ultimately to themotor 2216. - In certain circumstances, referring still to
FIG. 50 , theelectric motor 2216 can include a rotatable shaft (not shown) that may operably interface with a gear reducer assembly 2222 that may be mounted in meshing engagement with a with a set, or rack, ofdrive teeth 2224 on a longitudinally-movable drive member 2226. In use, a voltage polarity provided by thebattery 2218 can operate theelectric motor 2216 in a clockwise direction wherein the voltage polarity applied to the electric motor by thebattery 2218 can be reversed in order to operate theelectric motor 2216 in a counter-clockwise direction. When theelectric motor 2216 is rotated in one direction, thedrive member 2226 will be axially driven in a distal direction “D”, for example, and when themotor 2216 is driven in the opposite rotary direction, thedrive member 2226 will be axially driven in a proximal direction “P”, for example, as illustrated inFIG. 50 . Thehandle 2212 can include a switch which can be configured to reverse the polarity applied to theelectric motor 2216 by thebattery 2218. As with the other forms described herein, thehandle 2212 also can include a sensor that is configured to detect the position of thedrive member 2226 and/or the direction in which thedrive member 2226 is being moved. - As indicated above, in at least one form, the longitudinally
movable drive member 2226 may include a rack ofdrive teeth 2224 formed thereon for meshing engagement with the gear reducer assembly 2222. In certain circumstances, as illustrated inFIG. 50 , thesurgical instrument 2200 may include a manually-actuatable “bailout”assembly 2228 that can be configured to enable a clinician to manually retract the longitudinallymovable drive member 2226 when a bailout error is detected such as, for example, when themotor 2216 malfunctions during operation of thesurgical instrument 2200 which may cause tissue captured by theend effector 2208 to be trapped. - Further to the above, as illustrated in
FIG. 50 , thebailout assembly 2228 may include a lever or bailout handle 2230 configured to be manually moved or pivoted into ratcheting engagement with theteeth 2224 in thedrive member 2226. In such circumstances, the clinician can manually retract thedrive member 2226 by using thebailout handle 2230 to ratchet thedrive member 2226 in the proximal direction “P”, for example, to release the trapped tissue from theend effector 2208, for example. Exemplary bailout arrangements and other components, arrangements and systems that may be employed with the various instruments disclosed herein are disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/249,117, entitled POWERED SURGICAL CUTTING AND STAPLING APPARATUS WITH MANUALLY RETRACTABLE FIRING SYSTEM, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,608,045, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. - Further to the above, referring now primarily to
FIGS. 48 and 50 , thebailout handle 2230 of thebailout assembly 2228 may reside within thehousing 2210 of thehandle assembly 2202. In certain circumstances, access to thebailout handle 2230 can be controlled by abailout door 2232. Thebailout door 2232 can be releasably locked to thehousing 2210 to control access to thebailout handle 2230. As illustrated inFIG. 48 , thebailout door 2232 may include a locking mechanism such as, for example, a snap-type locking mechanism 2234 for locking engagement with thehousing 2210. Other locking mechanisms for locking thebailout door 2232 to thehousing 2210 are contemplated by the present disclosure. In use, a clinician may obtain access to thebailout handle 2230 by unlocking thelocking mechanism 2234 and opening thebailout door 2232. In at least one example, thebailout door 2232 can be separably coupled to thehousing 2232 and can be detached from thehousing 2210 to provide access to thebailout handle 2230, for example. In another example, thebailout door 2232 can be pivotally coupled to thehousing 2210 via hinges (not shown) and can be pivoted relative to thehousing 2210 to provide access to thebailout handle 2230, for example. In yet another example, thebailout door 2232 can be a sliding door which can be slidably movable relative to thehousing 2210 to provide access to thebailout handle 2230. - Referring now to
FIG. 51 , thesurgical instrument 2200 may include abailout feedback system 2236 which can be configured to guide and/or provide feedback to a clinician through the various steps of utilizing thebailout assembly 2228, as described below in greater detail. In certain instances, thebailout feedback system 2236 may include amicrocontroller 2238 and/or one or more bailout feedback elements. The electrical and electronic circuit elements associated with thebailout feedback system 2236 and/or the bailout feedback elements may be supported by the controlcircuit board assembly 2220, for example. Themicrocontroller 2238 may generally comprise amemory 2240 and a microprocessor 2242 (“processor”) operationally coupled to thememory 2240. Theprocessor 2242 may control amotor driver 2244 circuit generally utilized to control the position and velocity of themotor 2216. In certain instances, theprocessor 2242 can signal themotor driver 2244 to stop and/or disable themotor 2216, as described in greater detail below. In certain instances, theprocessor 2242 may control a separate motor override circuit which may comprise a motor override switch that can stop and/or disable themotor 2216 during operation of thesurgical instrument 2200 in response to an override signal from theprocessor 2242. It should be understood that the term processor as used herein includes any suitable microprocessor, microcontroller, or other basic computing device that incorporates the functions of a computer's central processing unit (CPU) on an integrated circuit or at most a few integrated circuits. The processor is a multipurpose, programmable device that accepts digital data as input, processes it according to instructions stored in its memory, and provides results as output. It is an example of sequential digital logic, as it has internal memory. Processors operate on numbers and symbols represented in the binary numeral system. - In one instance, the
processor 2242 may be any single core or multicore processor such as those known under the trade name ARM Cortex by Texas Instruments. In one instance, thesurgical instrument 2200 may comprise a safety processor such as, for example, a safety microcontroller platform comprising two microcontroller-based families such as TMS570 and RM4x known under the trade name Hercules ARM Cortex R4, also by Texas Instruments. Nevertheless, other suitable substitutes for microcontrollers and safety processor may be employed, without limitation. In one instance, the safety processor 1004 may be configured specifically for IEC 61508 and ISO 26262 safety critical applications, among others, to provide advanced integrated safety features while delivering scalable performance, connectivity, and memory options. - In certain instances, the
microcontroller 2238 may be an LM 4F230H5QR, available from Texas Instruments, for example. In at least one example, the Texas Instruments LM4F230H5QR is an ARM Cortex-M4F Processor Core comprising on-chip memory 2240 of 256 KB single-cycle flash memory, or other non-volatile memory, up to 40 MHz, a prefetch buffer to improve performance above 40 MHz, a 32 KB single-cycle serial random access memory (SRAM), internal read-only memory (ROM) loaded with StellarisWare® software, 2 KB electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), one or more pulse width modulation (PWM) modules, one or more quadrature encoder inputs (QEI) analog, one or more 12-bit Analog-to-Digital Converters (ADC) with 12 analog input channels, among other features that are readily available for the product datasheet. Other microcontrollers may be readily substituted for use in thebailout feedback system 2236. Accordingly, the present disclosure should not be limited in this context. - Referring again to
FIG. 51 , thebailout feedback system 2236 may include a bailoutdoor feedback element 2246, for example. In certain instances, the bailoutdoor feedback element 2246 can be configured to alert theprocessor 2242 that thelocking mechanism 2234 is unlocked. In at least one example, the bailoutdoor feedback element 2246 may comprise a switch circuit (not shown) operably coupled to theprocessor 2242; the switch circuit can be configured to be transitioned to an open configuration when thelocking mechanism 2234 is unlocked by a clinician and/or transitioned to a closed configuration when thelocking mechanism 2234 is locked by the clinician, for example. In at least one example, the bailoutdoor feedback element 2246 may comprise at least one sensor (not shown) operably coupled to theprocessor 2242; the sensor can be configured to be triggered when thelocking mechanism 2234 is transitioned to unlocked and/or locked configurations by the clinician, for example. The reader will appreciate that the bailoutdoor feedback element 2246 may include other means for detecting the locking and/or unlocking of thelocking mechanism 2234 by the clinician. - In certain instances, the bailout
door feedback element 2246 may comprise a switch circuit (not shown) operably coupled to theprocessor 2242; the switch circuit can be configured to be transitioned to an open configuration when thebailout door 2232 is removed or opened, for example, and/or transitioned to a closed configuration when thebailout door 2232 is installed or closed, for example. In at least one example, the bailoutdoor feedback element 2246 may comprise at least one sensor (not shown) operably coupled to theprocessor 2242; the sensor can be configured to be triggered when thebailout door 2232 is removed or opened, for example, and/or when thebailout door 2232 is closed or installed, for example. The reader will appreciate that the bailoutdoor feedback element 2246 may include other means for detecting the locking and/or unlocking of thelocking mechanism 2234 and/or the opening and/or closing of thebailout door 2232 by the clinician. - In certain instances, as illustrated in
FIG. 51 , thebailout feedback system 2236 may comprise one or moreadditional feedback elements 2248 which may comprise additional switch circuits and/or sensors in operable communication with theprocessor 2242; the additional switch circuits and/or sensors may be employed by theprocessor 2242 to measure other parameters associated with thebailout feedback system 2236. In certain instances, thebailout feedback system 2236 may comprise one or more interfaces which may include one or more devices for providing a sensory feedback to a user. Such devices may comprise, for example, visual feedback devices such as display screens and/or LED indicators, for example. In certain instances, such devices may comprise audio feedback devices such as speakers and/or buzzers, for example. In certain instances, such devices may comprise tactile feedback devices such as haptic actuators, for example. In certain instances, such devices may comprise combinations of visual feedback devices, audio feedback devices, and/or tactile feedback devices. In certain circumstances, as illustrated inFIG. 48 , the one or more interfaces may comprise adisplay 2250 which may be included in thehandle assembly 2202, for example. In certain instances, theprocessor 2242 may employ thedisplay 2250 to alert, guide, and/or provide feedback to a user of thesurgical instrument 2200 with regard to performing a manual bailout of thesurgical instrument 2200 using thebailout assembly 2228. - In certain instances, the
bailout feedback system 2236 may comprise one or more embedded applications implemented as firmware, software, hardware, or any combination thereof. In certain instances, thebailout feedback system 2236 may comprise various executable modules such as software, programs, data, drivers, and/or application program interfaces (APIs), for example.FIG. 52 depicts anexemplary module 2252 that can be stored in thememory 2240, for example. Themodule 2252 can be executed by theprocessor 2242, for example, to alert, guide, and/or provide feedback to a user of thesurgical instrument 2200 with regard to performing a manual bailout of thesurgical instrument 2200 using thebailout assembly 2228. - As illustrated in
FIG. 52 , themodule 2252 may be executed by theprocessor 2242 to provide the user with instructions as to how to access and/or use thebailout assembly 2228 to perform the manual bailout of thesurgical instrument 2200, for example. In various instances, themodule 2252 may comprise one or more decision-making steps such as, for example, a decision-making step 2254 with regard to the detection of one or more errors requiring the manual bailout of thesurgical instrument 2200. - In various instances, the
processor 2242 may be configured to detect a bailout error in response to the occurrence of one or more intervening events during the normal operation of thesurgical instrument 2200, for example. In certain instances, theprocessor 2242 may be configured to detect a bailout error when one or more bailout error signals are received by theprocessor 2242; the bailout error signals can be communicated to theprocessor 2242 by other processors and/or sensors of thesurgical instrument 2200, for example. In certain instances, a bailout error can be detected by theprocessor 2242 when a temperature of thesurgical instrument 2200, as detected by a sensor (not shown), exceeds a threshold, for example. In certain instances, thesurgical instrument 2200 may comprise a positioning system (not shown) for sensing and recording the position of the longitudinally-movable drive member 2226 during a firing stroke of thefiring drive system 2214. In at least one example, theprocessor 2242 can be configured to detect a bailout error when one or more of the recorded positions of the longitudinally-movable drive member 2226 is not are accordance with a predetermined threshold, for example. - In any event, referring again to
FIG. 52 , when theprocessor 2242 detects a bailout error in the decision-making step 2254, theprocessor 2242 may respond by stopping and/or disabling themotor 2216, for example. In addition, in certain instances, theprocessor 2242 also may store a bailed out state in thememory 2240 after detecting the bailout error, as illustrated inFIG. 52 . In other words, theprocessor 2242 may store in the memory 2240 a status indicating that a bailout error has been detected. As described above, thememory 2240 can be a non-volatile memory which may preserve the stored status that a bailout error has been detected when thesurgical instrument 2200 is reset by the user, for example. - In various instances, the
motor 2216 can be stopped and/or disabled by disconnecting thebattery 2218 from themotor 2216, for example. In various instances, theprocessor 2242 may employ thedriver 2244 to stop and/or disable themotor 2216. In certain instances, when the motor override circuit is utilized, theprocessor 2242 may employ the motor override circuit to stop and/or disable themotor 2216. In certain instances, stopping and/or disabling themotor 2216 may prevent a user of thesurgical instrument 2200 from using themotor 2216 at least until the manual bailout is performed, for example. The reader will appreciate that stopping and/or disabling themotor 2216 in response to the detection of a bailout error can be advantageous in protecting tissue captured by thesurgical instrument 2200. - Further to the above, referring still to
FIG. 52 , themodule 2252 may include a decision-making step 2256 for detecting whether thebailout door 2232 is removed. As described above, theprocessor 2242 can be operationally coupled to the bailoutdoor feedback element 2246 which can be configured to alert theprocessor 2242 as to whether thebailout door 2232 is removed. In certain instances, theprocessor 2242 can be programmed to detect that thebailout door 2232 is removed when the bailoutdoor feedback element 2246 reports that thelocking mechanism 2234 is unlocked, for example. In certain instances, theprocessor 2242 can be programmed to detect that thebailout door 2232 is removed when the bailoutdoor feedback element 2246 reports that thebailout door 2232 is opened, for example. In certain instances, theprocessor 2242 can be programmed to detect that thebailout door 2232 is removed when the bailoutdoor feedback element 2246 reports that thelocking mechanism 2234 is unlocked and that thebailout door 2232 is opened, for example. - In various instances, referring still to
FIG. 52 , when theprocessor 2242 does not detect a bailout error in the decision-making step 2254 and does not detect that thebailout door 2232 is removed in the decision-making step 2256, theprocessor 2242 may not interrupt the normal operation of thesurgical instrument 2200 and may proceed with various clinical algorithms. In certain instances, when theprocessor 2242 does not detect a bailout error in the decision-making step 2254 but detects that thebailout door 2232 is removed in the decision-making step 2256, theprocessor 2242 may respond by stopping and/or disabling themotor 2216, as described above. In addition, in certain instances, theprocessor 2242 also may provide the user with instructions to reinstall thebailout door 2232, as described in greater detail below. In certain instances, when theprocessor 2242 detects that thebailout door 2232 is reinstalled, while no bailout error is detected, theprocessor 2242 can be configured to reconnect the power to themotor 2216 and allow the user to continue with clinical algorithms, as illustrated inFIG. 52 . - In certain instances, when the user does not reinstall the
bailout door 2232, theprocessor 2242 may not reconnect power to themotor 2216 and may continue providing the user with the instructions to reinstall thebailout door 2232. In certain instances, when the user does not reinstall thebailout door 2232, theprocessor 2242 may provide the user with a warning that thebailout door 2232 needs to be reinstalled in order to continue with the normal operation of thesurgical instrument 2200. In certain instances, thesurgical instrument 2200 can be equipped with an override mechanism (not shown) to permit the user to reconnect power to themotor 2216 even when thebailout door 2216 is not installed. - In various instances, the
processor 2242 can be configured to provide the user with a sensory feedback when theprocessor 2242 detects that thebailout door 2232 is removed. In various instances, theprocessor 2242 can be configured to provide the user with a sensory feedback when theprocessor 2242 detects that thebailout door 2232 is reinstalled. Various devices can be employed by theprocessor 2242 to provide the sensory feedback to the user. Such devices may comprise, for example, visual feedback devices such as display screens and/or LED indicators, for example. In certain instances, such devices may comprise audio feedback devices such as speakers and/or buzzers, for example. In certain instances, such devices may comprise tactile feedback devices such as haptic actuators, for example. In certain instances, such devices may comprise combinations of visual feedback devices, audio feedback devices, and/or tactile feedback devices. In certain instances, theprocessor 2242 may employ thedisplay 2250 to instruct the user to reinstall thebailout door 2232. For example, theprocessor 2242 may present an alert symbol next to an image of thebailout door 2232 to the user through thedisplay 2250, for example. In certain instances, theprocessor 2242 may present an animated image of thebailout door 2232 being installed, for example. Other images, symbols, and/or words can be displayed through thedisplay 2250 to alert the user of thesurgical instrument 2200 to reinstall thebailout door 2232. - Referring again to
FIG. 52 , when a bailout error is detected, theprocessor 2242 may signal the user of thesurgical instrument 2200 to perform the manual bailout using thebailout handle 2230. In various instances, theprocessor 2242 can signal the user to perform the manual bailout by providing the user with a visual, audio, and/or tactile feedback, for example. In certain instances, as illustrated inFIG. 52 , theprocessor 2242 can signal the user of thesurgical instrument 2200 to perform the manual bailout by flashing a backlight of thedisplay 2250. In any event, theprocessor 2242 may then provide the user with instructions to perform the manual bailout. In various instances, as illustrated inFIG. 52 , the instructions may depend on whether thebailout door 2232 is installed; adecision making step 2258 may determine the type of instructions provided to the user. In certain instances, when theprocessor 2242 detects that thebailout door 2232 is installed, theprocessor 2242 may provide the user with instructions to remove thebailout door 2232 and instructions to operate thebailout handle 2230, for example. However, when theprocessor 2242 detects that thebailout door 2232 is removed, theprocessor 2242 may provide the user with the instructions to operate thebailout handle 2230 but not the instructions to remove thebailout door 2232, for example. - Referring again to
FIG. 52 , in various instances, the instructions provided by theprocessor 2242 to the user to remove thebailout door 2232 and/or to operate thebailout handle 2230 may comprise one or more steps; the steps may be presented to the user in a chronological order. In certain instances, the steps may comprise actions to be performed by the user. In such instances, the user may proceed through the steps of the manual bailout by performing the actions presented in each of the steps. In certain instances, the actions required in one or more of the steps can be presented to the user in the form of animated images displayed on thedisplay 2250, for example. In certain instances, one or more of the steps can be presented to the user as messages which may include words, symbols, and/or images that guide the user through the manual bailout. In certain instances, one or more of the steps of performing the manual bailout can be combined in one or more messages, for example. In certain instances, each message may comprise a separate step, for example. - In certain instances, the steps and/or the messages providing the instructions for the manual bailout can be presented to the user in predetermined time intervals to allow the user sufficient time to comply with the presented steps and/or messages, for example. In certain instances, the
processor 2242 can be programed to continue presenting a step and/or a message until feedback is received by theprocessor 2242 that the step has been performed. In certain instances, the feedback can be provided to theprocessor 2242 by the bailoutdoor feedback element 2246, for example. Other mechanisms and/or sensors can be employed by theprocessor 2242 to obtain feedback that a step has been completed. In at least one example, the user can be instructed to alert thatprocessor 2242 when a step is completed by pressing an alert button, for example. In certain instances, thedisplay 2250 may comprise a capacitive screen which may provide the user with an interface to alert theprocessor 2242 when a step is completed. For example, the user may press the capacitive screen to move to the next step of the manual bailout instructions after a current step is completed. - In certain instances, as illustrated in
FIG. 52 , after detecting that thebailout door 2232 is installed, theprocessor 2242 can be configured to employ thedisplay 2250 to present ananimated image 2260 depicting a hand moving toward thebailout door 2232. Theprocessor 2242 may continue to display theanimated image 2260 for a time interval sufficient for the user to engage thebailout door 2232, for example. In certain instances, theprocessor 2242 may then replace theanimated image 2260 with ananimated image 2262 depicting a finger engaging the bailoutdoor locking mechanism 2234, for example. Theprocessor 2242 may continue to display theanimated image 2262 for a time interval sufficient for the user to unlock thelocking mechanism 2234, for example. In certain instances, theprocessor 2242 may continue to display theanimated image 2262 until the bailoutdoor feedback element 2246 reports that thelocking mechanism 2234 is unlocked, for example. In certain instances, theprocessor 2242 may continue to display theanimated image 2262 until the user alerts theprocessor 2242 that the step of unlocking thelocking mechanism 2234 is completed. - In any event, the
processor 2242 may then replace theanimated image 2262 with ananimated image 2264 depicting a finger removing thebailout door 2232, for example. Theprocessor 2242 may continue to display theanimated image 2264 for a time interval sufficient for the user to remove thebailout door 2232, for example. In certain instances, theprocessor 2242 may continue to display theanimated image 2264 until the bailoutdoor feedback element 2246 reports that thebailout door 2232 is removed, for example. In certain instances, theprocessor 2242 may continue to display theanimated image 2264 until the user alerts theprocessor 2242 that the step of removing thebailout door 2232 has been removed, for example. In certain instances, theprocessor 2242 can be configured to continue to repeat displaying theanimated images processor 2242 continues to detect that the bailout door is installed at thedecision making step 2258, for example. - Further to the above, after detecting that the
bailout door 2232 is removed, theprocessor 2242 may proceed to guide the user through the steps of operating thebailout handle 2230. In certain instances, theprocessor 2242 may replace theanimated image 2264 with ananimated image 2266 depicting a finger lifting thebailout handle 2230, for example, into ratcheting engagement with theteeth 2224 in thedrive member 2226, as described above. Theprocessor 2242 may continue to display theanimated image 2266 for a time interval sufficient for the user to lift thebailout handle 2230, for example. In certain instances, theprocessor 2242 may continue to display theanimated image 2266 until the processor receives feedback that thebailout handle 2230 has been lifted. For example, theprocessor 2242 may continue to display theanimated image 2266 until the user alerts theprocessor 2242 that the step of lifting thebailout handle 2230 has been removed. - In certain instances, as described above, the user can manually retract the
drive member 2226 by using thebailout handle 2230 to ratchet thedrive member 2226 in the proximal direction “P,” for example, to release tissue trapped by theend effector 2208, for example. In such instances, theprocessor 2242 may replace theanimated image 2266 with ananimated image 2268 depicting a finger repeatedly pulling then pushing thebailout handle 2230, for example, to simulate the ratcheting of thebailout handle 2230. Theprocessor 2242 may continue to display theanimated image 2268 for a time interval sufficient for the user to ratchet thedrive member 2226 to default position, for example. In certain instances, theprocessor 2242 may continue to display theanimated image 2268 until theprocessor 2242 receives feedback that thedrive member 2226 has been retracted. -
FIG. 53 depicts amodule 2270 which is similar in many respects to themodule 2258. For example, themodule 2252 also can be stored in thememory 2240 and/or executed by theprocessor 2242, for example, to alert, guide, and/or provide feedback to a user of thesurgical instrument 2200 with regard to performing a manual bailout of thesurgical instrument 2200. In certain instances, thesurgical instrument 2200 may not comprise a bailout door. In such circumstances, themodule 2270 can be employed by theprocessor 2242 to provide the user with instructions as to how to operate thebailout handle 2230, for example. - Referring again to the
module 2270 depicted inFIG. 53 , when theprocessor 2242 does not detect a bailout error in the decision-making step 2254 of themodule 2270, theprocessor 2242 may not interrupt the normal operation of thesurgical instrument 2200 and may proceed with various clinical algorithms. However, when theprocessor 2242 detects a bailout error in the decision-making step 2254 of themodule 2270, theprocessor 2242 may respond by stopping and/or disabling themotor 2216, for example. In addition, in certain instances, theprocessor 2242 also may store a bailed out state in thememory 2240 after detecting the bailout error, as illustrated inFIG. 53 . In the absence of a bailout door, theprocessor 2242 may signal the user of thesurgical instrument 2200 to perform the manual bailout, for example, by flashing the backlight of thedisplay 2250; theprocessor 2242 may then proceed directly to providing the user with the instructions to operate thebailout handle 2230, as described above. - The reader will appreciate that the steps depicted in
FIGS. 52 and/or 53 are illustrative examples of the instructions that can be provided to the user of thesurgical instrument 2200 to perform a manual bailout. Themodules 2252 and/or 2270 can be configured to provide more or less steps than those illustrated inFIGS. 52 and 53 . The reader will also appreciate that themodules 2252 and/or 2270 are exemplary modules; various other modules can be executed by theprocessor 2242 to provide the user of thesurgical instrument 2200 with instructions to perform the manual bailout. - In various instances, as described above, the
processor 2242 can be configured to present to the user of thesurgical instrument 2200 the steps and/or messages for performing a manual bailout in predetermined time intervals. Such time intervals may be the same or may vary depending on the complexity of the task to be performed by the user, for example. In certain instances, such time intervals can be any time interval in the range of about 1 second, for example, to about 10 minutes, for example. In certain instances, such time intervals can be any time interval in the range of about 1 second, for example, to about 1 minute, for example. Other time intervals are contemplated by the present disclosure. - In some instances, a power assembly, such as, for example the
power assembly 2006 illustrated inFIGS. 31-33B , is configured to monitor the number of uses of thepower assembly 2006 and/or asurgical instrument 2000 coupled to thepower assembly 2006. Thepower assembly 2006 maintains a usage cycle count corresponding to the number of uses. Thepower assembly 2006 and/or thesurgical instrument 2000 performs one or more actions based on the usage cycle count. For example, in some instances, when the usage cycle count exceeds a predetermined usage limit, thepower assembly 2006 and/or asurgical instrument 2000 may disable thepower assembly 2006, disable thesurgical instrument 2000, indicate that a reconditioning or service cycle is required, provide a usage cycle count to an operator and/or a remote system, and/or perform any other suitable action. The usage cycle count is determined by any suitable system, such as, for example, a mechanical limiter, a usage cycle circuit, and/or any other suitable system coupled to thebattery 2006 and/or thesurgical instrument 2000. -
FIG. 54 illustrates one example of apower assembly 2400 comprising ausage cycle circuit 2402 configured to monitor a usage cycle count of thepower assembly 2400. Thepower assembly 2400 may be coupled to asurgical instrument 2410. Theusage cycle circuit 2402 comprises aprocessor 2404 and ause indicator 2406. Theuse indicator 2406 is configured to provide a signal to theprocessor 2404 to indicate a use of the battery back 2400 and/or asurgical instrument 2410 coupled to thepower assembly 2400. A “use” may comprise any suitable action, condition, and/or parameter such as, for example, changing a modular component of asurgical instrument 2410, deploying or firing a disposable component coupled to thesurgical instrument 2410, delivering electrosurgical energy from thesurgical instrument 2410, reconditioning thesurgical instrument 2410 and/or thepower assembly 2400, exchanging thepower assembly 2400, recharging thepower assembly 2400, and/or exceeding a safety limitation of thesurgical instrument 2410 and/or the battery back 2400. - In some instances, a usage cycle, or use, is defined by one or
more power assembly 2400 parameters. For example, in one instance, a usage cycle comprises using more than 5% of the total energy available from thepower assembly 2400 when thepower assembly 2400 is at a full charge level. In another instance, a usage cycle comprises a continuous energy drain from thepower assembly 2400 exceeding a predetermined time limit. For example, a usage cycle may correspond to five minutes of continuous and/or total energy draw from thepower assembly 2400. In some instances, thepower assembly 2400 comprises ausage cycle circuit 2402 having a continuous power draw to maintain one or more components of theusage cycle circuit 2402, such as, for example, theuse indicator 2406 and/or acounter 2408, in an active state. - The
processor 2404 maintains a usage cycle count. The usage cycle count indicates the number of uses detected by theuse indicator 2406 for thepower assembly 2400 and/or thesurgical instrument 2410. Theprocessor 2404 may increment and/or decrement the usage cycle count based on input from theuse indicator 2406. The usage cycle count is used to control one or more operations of thepower assembly 2400 and/or thesurgical instrument 2410. For example, in some instances, apower assembly 2400 is disabled when the usage cycle count exceeds a predetermined usage limit. Although the instances discussed herein are discussed with respect to incrementing the usage cycle count above a predetermined usage limit, those skilled in the art will recognize that the usage cycle count may start at a predetermined amount and may be decremented by theprocessor 2404. In this instance, theprocessor 2404 initiates and/or prevents one or more operations of thepower assembly 2400 when the usage cycle count falls below a predetermined usage limit. - The usage cycle count is maintained by a
counter 2408. Thecounter 2408 comprises any suitable circuit, such as, for example, a memory module, an analog counter, and/or any circuit configured to maintain a usage cycle count. In some instances, thecounter 2408 is formed integrally with theprocessor 2404. In other instances, thecounter 2408 comprises a separate component, such as, for example, a solid state memory module. In some instances, the usage cycle count is provided to a remote system, such as, for example, a central database. The usage cycle count is transmitted by acommunications module 2412 to the remote system. Thecommunications module 2412 is configured to use any suitable communications medium, such as, for example, wired and/or wireless communication. In some instances, thecommunications module 2412 is configured to receive one or more instructions from the remote system, such as, for example, a control signal when the usage cycle count exceeds the predetermined usage limit. - In some instances, the
use indicator 2406 is configured to monitor the number of modular components used with asurgical instrument 2410 coupled to thepower assembly 2400. A modular component may comprise, for example, a modular shaft, a modular end effector, and/or any other modular component. In some instances, theuse indicator 2406 monitors the use of one or more disposable components, such as, for example, insertion and/or deployment of a staple cartridge within an end effector coupled to thesurgical instrument 2410. Theuse indicator 2406 comprises one or more sensors for detecting the exchange of one or more modular and/or disposable components of thesurgical instrument 2410. - In some instances, the
use indicator 2406 is configured to monitor single patient surgical procedures performed while thepower assembly 2400 is installed. For example, theuse indicator 2406 may be configured to monitor firings of thesurgical instrument 2410 while thepower assembly 2400 is coupled to thesurgical instrument 2410. A firing may correspond to deployment of a staple cartridge, application of electrosurgical energy, and/or any other suitable surgical event. Theuse indicator 2406 may comprise one or more circuits for measuring the number of firings while thepower assembly 2400 is installed. Theuse indicator 2406 provides a signal to theprocessor 2404 when a single patient procedure is performed and theprocessor 2404 increments the usage cycle count. - In some instances, the
use indicator 2406 comprises a circuit configured to monitor one or more parameters of thepower source 2414, such as, for example, a current draw from thepower source 2414. The one or more parameters of thepower source 2414 correspond to one or more operations performable by thesurgical instrument 2410, such as, for example, a cutting and sealing operation. Theuse indicator 2406 provides the one or more parameters to theprocessor 2404, which increments the usage cycle count when the one or more parameters indicate that a procedure has been performed. - In some instances, the
use indicator 2406 comprises a timing circuit configured to increment a usage cycle count after a predetermined time period. The predetermined time period corresponds to a single patient procedure time, which is the time required for an operator to perform a procedure, such as, for example, a cutting and sealing procedure. When thepower assembly 2400 is coupled to thesurgical instrument 2410, theprocessor 2404 polls theuse indicator 2406 to determine when the single patient procedure time has expired. When the predetermined time period has elapsed, theprocessor 2404 increments the usage cycle count. After incrementing the usage cycle count, theprocessor 2404 resets the timing circuit of theuse indicator 2406. - In some instances, the
use indicator 2406 comprises a time constant that approximates the single patient procedure time.FIG. 55 illustrates one instance ofpower assembly 2500 comprising ausage cycle circuit 2502 having a resistor-capacitor (RC)timing circuit 2506. TheRC timing circuit 2506 comprises a time constant defined by a resistor-capacitor pair. The time constant is defined by the values of theresistor 2516 and thecapacitor 2518. When thepower assembly 2500 is installed in a surgical instrument, aprocessor 2504 polls theRC timing circuit 2506. When one or more parameters of theRC timing circuit 2506 are below a predetermined threshold, theprocessor 2504 increments the usage cycle count. For example, theprocessor 2504 may poll the voltage of thecapacitor 2518 of the resistor-capacitor pair 2506. When the voltage of thecapacitor 2518 is below a predetermined threshold, theprocessor 2504 increment the usage cycle count. Theprocessor 2504 may be coupled to theRC timing circuit 2506 by, for example, anND 2520. After incrementing the usage cycle count, theprocessor 2504 turns on atransistor 2522 to connect theRC timing circuit 2506 to apower source 2514 to charge thecapacitor 2518 of theRC timing circuit 2506. Once thecapacitor 2518 is fully charged, thetransistor 2522 is opened and theRC timing circuit 2506 is allowed to discharge, as governed by the time constant, to indicate a subsequent single patient procedure. -
FIG. 56 illustrates one instance of apower assembly 2550 comprising ausage cycle circuit 2552 having arechargeable battery 2564 and aclock 2560. When thepower assembly 2550 is installed in a surgical instrument, therechargeable battery 2564 is charged by thepower source 2558. Therechargeable battery 2564 comprises enough power to run theclock 2560 for at least the single patient procedure time. Theclock 2560 may comprise a real time clock, a processor configured to implement a time function, or any other suitable timing circuit. Theprocessor 2554 receives a signal from theclock 2560 and increments the usage cycle count when theclock 2560 indicates that the single patient procedure time has been exceeded. Theprocessor 2554 resets theclock 2560 after incrementing the usage cycle count. For example, in one instance, theprocessor 2554 closes atransistor 2562 to recharge therechargeable battery 2564. Once therechargeable battery 2564 is fully charged, theprocessor 2554 opens thetransistor 2562, and allows theclock 2560 to run while therechargeable battery 2564 discharges. - Referring back to
FIG. 54 , in some instances, theuse indicator 2406 comprises a sensor configured to monitor one or more environmental conditions experienced by thepower assembly 2400. For example, theuse indicator 2406 may comprise an accelerometer. The accelerometer is configured to monitor acceleration of thepower assembly 2400. Thepower assembly 2400 comprises a maximum acceleration tolerance. Acceleration above a predetermined threshold indicates, for example, that thepower assembly 2400 has been dropped. When theuse indicator 2406 detects acceleration above the maximum acceleration tolerance, theprocessor 2404 increments a usage cycle count. In some instances, theuse indicator 2406 comprises a moisture sensor. The moisture sensor is configured to indicate when thepower assembly 2400 has been exposed to moisture. The moisture sensor may comprise, for example, an immersion sensor configured to indicate when thepower assembly 2400 has been fully immersed in a cleaning fluid, a moisture sensor configured to indicate when moisture is in contact with thepower assembly 2400 during use, and/or any other suitable moisture sensor. - In some instances, the
use indicator 2406 comprises a chemical exposure sensor. The chemical exposure sensor is configured to indicate when thepower assembly 2400 has come into contact with harmful and/or dangerous chemicals. For example, during a sterilization procedure, an inappropriate chemical may be used that leads to degradation of thepower assembly 2400. Theprocessor 2404 increments the usage cycle count when theuse indicator 2406 detects an inappropriate chemical. - In some instances, the
usage cycle circuit 2402 is configured to monitor the number of reconditioning cycles experienced by thepower assembly 2400. A reconditioning cycle may comprise, for example, a cleaning cycle, a sterilization cycle, a charging cycle, routine and/or preventative maintenance, and/or any other suitable reconditioning cycle. Theuse indicator 2406 is configured to detect a reconditioning cycle. For example, theuse indicator 2406 may comprise a moisture sensor to detect a cleaning and/or sterilization cycle. In some instances, theusage cycle circuit 2402 monitors the number of reconditioning cycles experienced by thepower assembly 2400 and disables thepower assembly 2400 after the number of reconditioning cycles exceeds a predetermined threshold. - The
usage cycle circuit 2402 may be configured to monitor the number ofpower assembly 2400 exchanges. Theusage cycle circuit 2402 increments the usage cycle count each time thepower assembly 2400 is exchanged. When the maximum number of exchanges is exceeded, theusage cycle circuit 2402 locks out thepower assembly 2400 and/or thesurgical instrument 2410. In some instances, when thepower assembly 2400 is coupled thesurgical instrument 2410, theusage cycle circuit 2402 identifies the serial number of thepower assembly 2400 and locks thepower assembly 2400 such that thepower assembly 2400 is usable only with thesurgical instrument 2410. In some instances, theusage cycle circuit 2402 increments the usage cycle each time thepower assembly 2400 is removed from and/or coupled to thesurgical instrument 2410. - In some instances, the usage cycle count corresponds to sterilization of the
power assembly 2400. Theuse indicator 2406 comprises a sensor configured to detect one or more parameters of a sterilization cycle, such as, for example, a temperature parameter, a chemical parameter, a moisture parameter, and/or any other suitable parameter. Theprocessor 2404 increments the usage cycle count when a sterilization parameter is detected. Theusage cycle circuit 2402 disables thepower assembly 2400 after a predetermined number of sterilizations. In some instances, theusage cycle circuit 2402 is reset during a sterilization cycle, a voltage sensor to detect a recharge cycle, and/or any suitable sensor. Theprocessor 2404 increments the usage cycle count when a reconditioning cycle is detected. Theusage cycle circuit 2402 is disabled when a sterilization cycle is detected. Theusage cycle circuit 2402 is reactivated and/or reset when thepower assembly 2400 is coupled to thesurgical instrument 2410. In some instances, the use indicator comprises a zero power indicator. The zero power indicator changes state during a sterilization cycle and is checked by theprocessor 2404 when thepower assembly 2400 is coupled to asurgical instrument 2410. When the zero power indicator indicates that a sterilization cycle has occurred, theprocessor 2404 increments the usage cycle count. - A
counter 2408 maintains the usage cycle count. In some instances, thecounter 2408 comprises a non-volatile memory module. Theprocessor 2404 increments the usage cycle count stored in the non-volatile memory module each time a usage cycle is detected. The memory module may be accessed by theprocessor 2404 and/or a control circuit, such as, for example, the control circuit 1100. When the usage cycle count exceeds a predetermined threshold, theprocessor 2404 disables thepower assembly 2400. In some instances, the usage cycle count is maintained by a plurality of circuit components. For example, in one instance, thecounter 2408 comprises a resistor (or fuse) pack. After each use of thepower assembly 2400, a resistor (or fuse) is burned to an open position, changing the resistance of the resistor pack. Thepower assembly 2400 and/or thesurgical instrument 2410 reads the remaining resistance. When the last resistor of the resistor pack is burned out, the resistor pack has a predetermined resistance, such as, for example, an infinite resistance corresponding to an open circuit, which indicates that thepower assembly 2400 has reached its usage limit. In some instances, the resistance of the resistor pack is used to derive the number of uses remaining. - In some instances, the
usage cycle circuit 2402 prevents further use of thepower assembly 2400 and/or thesurgical instrument 2410 when the usage cycle count exceeds a predetermined usage limit. In one instance, the usage cycle count associated with thepower assembly 2400 is provided to an operator, for example, utilizing a screen formed integrally with thesurgical instrument 2410. Thesurgical instrument 2410 provides an indication to the operator that the usage cycle count has exceeded a predetermined limit for thepower assembly 2400, and prevents further operation of thesurgical instrument 2410. - In some instances, the
usage cycle circuit 2402 is configured to physically prevent operation when the predetermined usage limit is reached. For example, thepower assembly 2400 may comprise a shield configured to deploy over contacts of thepower assembly 2400 when the usage cycle count exceeds the predetermined usage limit. The shield prevents recharge and use of thepower assembly 2400 by covering the electrical connections of thepower assembly 2400. - In some instances, the
usage cycle circuit 2402 is located at least partially within thesurgical instrument 2410 and is configured to maintain a usage cycle count for thesurgical instrument 2410.FIG. 54 illustrates one or more components of theusage cycle circuit 2402 within thesurgical instrument 2410 in phantom, illustrating the alternative positioning of theusage cycle circuit 2402. When a predetermined usage limit of thesurgical instrument 2410 is exceeded, theusage cycle circuit 2402 disables and/or prevents operation of thesurgical instrument 2410. The usage cycle count is incremented by theusage cycle circuit 2402 when theuse indicator 2406 detects a specific event and/or requirement, such as, for example, firing of thesurgical instrument 2410, a predetermined time period corresponding to a single patient procedure time, based on one or more motor parameters of thesurgical instrument 2410, in response to a system diagnostic indicating that one or more predetermined thresholds are met, and/or any other suitable requirement. As discussed above, in some instances, theuse indicator 2406 comprises a timing circuit corresponding to a single patient procedure time. In other instances, theuse indicator 2406 comprises one or more sensors configured to detect a specific event and/or condition of thesurgical instrument 2410. - In some instances, the
usage cycle circuit 2402 is configured to prevent operation of thesurgical instrument 2410 after the predetermined usage limit is reached. In some instances, thesurgical instrument 2410 comprises a visible indicator to indicate when the predetermined usage limit has been reached and/or exceeded. For example, a flag, such as a red flag, may pop-up from thesurgical instrument 2410, such as from the handle, to provide a visual indication to the operator that thesurgical instrument 2410 has exceeded the predetermined usage limit. As another example, theusage cycle circuit 2402 may be coupled to a display formed integrally with thesurgical instrument 2410. Theusage cycle circuit 2402 displays a message indicating that the predetermined usage limit has been exceeded. Thesurgical instrument 2410 may provide an audible indication to the operator that the predetermined usage limit has been exceeded. For example, in one instance, thesurgical instrument 2410 emits an audible tone when the predetermined usage limit is exceeded and thepower assembly 2400 is removed from thesurgical instrument 2410. The audible tone indicates the last use of thesurgical instrument 2410 and indicates that thesurgical instrument 2410 should be disposed or reconditioned. - In some instances, the
usage cycle circuit 2402 is configured to transmit the usage cycle count of thesurgical instrument 2410 to a remote location, such as, for example, a central database. Theusage cycle circuit 2402 comprises acommunications module 2412 configured to transmit the usage cycle count to the remote location. Thecommunications module 2412 may utilize any suitable communications system, such as, for example, wired or wireless communications system. The remote location may comprise a central database configured to maintain usage information. In some instances, when thepower assembly 2400 is coupled to thesurgical instrument 2410, thepower assembly 2400 records a serial number of thesurgical instrument 2410. The serial number is transmitted to the central database, for example, when thepower assembly 2400 is coupled to a charger. In some instances, the central database maintains a count corresponding to each use of thesurgical instrument 2410. For example, a bar code associated with thesurgical instrument 2410 may be scanned each time thesurgical instrument 2410 is used. When the use count exceeds a predetermined usage limit, the central database provides a signal to thesurgical instrument 2410 indicating that thesurgical instrument 2410 should be discarded. - The
surgical instrument 2410 may be configured to lock and/or prevent operation of thesurgical instrument 2410 when the usage cycle count exceeds a predetermined usage limit. In some instances, thesurgical instrument 2410 comprises a disposable instrument and is discarded after the usage cycle count exceeds the predetermined usage limit. In other instances, thesurgical instrument 2410 comprises a reusable surgical instrument which may be reconditioned after the usage cycle count exceeds the predetermined usage limit. Thesurgical instrument 2410 initiates a reversible lockout after the predetermined usage limit is met. A technician reconditions thesurgical instrument 2410 and releases the lockout, for example, utilizing a specialized technician key configured to reset theusage cycle circuit 2402. - In some instances, the
power assembly 2400 is charged and sterilized simultaneously prior to use.FIG. 57 illustrates one instance of a combined sterilization andcharging system 2600 configured to charge and sterilize abattery 2602 simultaneously. The combined sterilization andcharging system 2600 comprises asterilization chamber 2604. Abattery 2602 is placed within thesterilization chamber 2604. In some instances, thebattery 2602 is coupled to a surgical instrument. A chargingcable 2606 is mounted through awall 2608 of thesterilization chamber 2604. Thewall 2608 is sealed around the chargingcable 2606 to maintain a sterile environment within thesterilization chamber 2604 during sterilization. The chargingcable 2606 comprises a first end configured to couple to thepower assembly 2602 within thesterilization chamber 2604 and a second end coupled to abattery charger 2610 located outside of thesterilization chamber 2604. Because the chargingcable 2606 passes through thewall 2608 of thesterilization chamber 2604 while maintaining a sterile environment within thesterilization chamber 2604, thepower assembly 2602 may be charged and sterilized simultaneously. - The charging profile applied by the
battery charger 2610 is configured to match the sterilization cycle of thesterilization chamber 2604. For example, in one instance, a sterilization procedure time is about 28 to 38 minutes. Thebattery charger 2610 is configured to provide a charging profile that charges the battery during the sterilization procedure time. In some instances, the charging profile may extend over a cooling-off period following the sterilization procedure. The charging profile may be adjusted by thebattery charger 2610 based on feedback from thepower assembly 2602 and/or thesterilization chamber 2604. For example, in one instance, asensor 2612 is located within thesterilization chamber 2604. Thesensor 2612 is configured to monitor one or more characteristics of thesterilization chamber 2604, such as, for example, chemicals present in thesterilization chamber 2604, temperature of thesterilization chamber 2604, and/or any other suitable characteristic of thesterilization chamber 2604. Thesensor 2612 is coupled to thebattery charger 2610 by acable 2614 extending through thewall 2608 of thesterilization chamber 2604. Thecable 2614 is sealed such that thesterilization chamber 2604 may maintain a sterile environment. Thebattery charger 2610 adjusts the charging profile based on feedback from thesensor 2614. For example, in one instance, thebattery charger 2610 receives temperature data from thesensor 2612 and adjusts the charging profile when the temperature of thesterilization chamber 2604 and/or thepower assembly 2602 exceeds a predetermined temperature. As another example, thebattery charger 2610 receives chemical composition information from thesensor 2612 and prevents charging of thepower assembly 2602 when a chemical, such as, for example, H2O2, approaches explosive limits. -
FIG. 58 illustrates one instance of a combination sterilization andcharging system 2650 configured for apower assembly 2652 having abattery charger 2660 formed integrally therewith. An alternating current (AC)source 2666 is located outside of thesterilization chamber 2654 and is coupled thebattery charger 2660 by anAC cable 2656 mounted through awall 2658 of thesterilization chamber 2654. Thewall 2658 is sealed around theAC cable 2656. Thebattery charger 2660 operates similar to thebattery charger 2610 illustrated inFIG. 57 . In some instances, thebattery charger 2660 receives feedback from asensor 2662 located within thesterilization chamber 2654 and coupled to thebattery charger 2660 by acable 2664. - In various instances, a surgical system can include a magnet and a sensor. In combination, the magnet and the sensor can cooperate to detect various conditions of a fastener cartridge, such as the presence of a fastener cartridge in an end effector of the surgical instrument, the type of fastener cartridge loaded in the end effector, and/or the firing state of a loaded fastener cartridge, for example. Referring now to
FIG. 62 , ajaw 902 of anend effector 900 can comprise amagnet 910, for example, and afastener cartridge 920 can comprise asensor 930, for example. In various instances, themagnet 910 can be positioned at thedistal end 906 of anelongate channel 904 sized and configured to receive thefastener cartridge 920. Furthermore, thesensor 930 can be at least partially embedded or retained in thedistal end 926 of thenose 924 of thefastener cartridge 920, for example. In various instances, thesensor 924 can be in signal communication with the microcontroller of the surgical instrument. - In various circumstances, the
sensor 930 can detect the presence of themagnet 910 when thefastener cartridge 920 is positioned in theelongate channel 904 of thejaw 902. Thesensor 930 can detect when thefastener cartridge 920 is improperly positioned in theelongate channel 904 and/or not loaded into theelongate channel 904, for example, and can communicate the cartridge loading state to the microcontroller of the surgical system, for example. In certain instances, themagnet 910 can be positioned in thefastener cartridge 920, for example, and thesensor 930 can be positioned in theend effector 900, for example. In various instances, thesensor 930 can detect the type offastener cartridge 920 loaded in theend effector 900. For example, different types of fastener cartridges can have different magnetic arrangements, such as different placement(s) relative to the cartridge body or other cartridge components, different polarities, and/or different magnetic strengths, for example. In such instances, thesensor 930 can detect the type of cartridge, e.g., the cartridge length, the number of fasteners and/or the fastener height(s), positioned in thejaw 902 based on the detected magnetic signal. Additionally or alternatively, thesensor 930 can detect if thefastener cartridge 920 is properly seated in theend effector 900. For example, theend effector 900 and thefastener cartridge 920 can comprise a plurality of magnets and/or a plurality of sensors and, in certain instances, the sensor(s) can detect whether thefastener cartridge 920 is properly positioned and/or aligned based on the position of multiple magnets relative to the sensor(s), for example. - Referring now to
FIG. 63 , in certain instances, anend effector 3000 can include a plurality of magnets and a plurality of sensors. For example, ajaw 3002 can include a plurality ofmagnets distal end 3006 thereof. Moreover, the fastener cartridge 3020 can include a plurality ofsensors distal end 3026 of thenose 3024, for example. In certain instances, thesensors elongate channel 3004 of thejaw 3002. In various instances, thesensors jaw 3002, for example. - In various instances, a magnet can be positioned on a moveable component of a fastener cartridge. For example, a magnet can be positioned on a component of the fastener cartridge that moves during a firing stroke. In such instances, a sensor in the end effector can detect the firing state of the fastener cartridge. For example, referring now to
FIG. 64 , amagnet 3130 can be positioned on thesled 3122 of afastener cartridge 3120. Moreover, a sensor 1110 can be positioned in thejaw 3102 of theend effector 3100. In various circumstances, thesled 3122 can translate during a firing stroke. Moreover, in certain instances, thesled 3120 can remain at the distal end of thefastener cartridge 3120 after the firing stroke. Stated differently, after the cartridge has been fired, thesled 3120 can remain at the distal end of thefastener cartridge 3120. Accordingly, thesensor 3110 can detect the position of themagnet 3130 and thecorresponding sled 3120 to determine the firing state of thefastener cartridge 3120. For example, when thesensor 3110 detects the proximal position of themagnet 3130, thefastener cartridge 3120 can be unfired and ready to fire, for example, and when thesensor 3110 detects the distal position of themagnet 3130, thefastener cartridge 3120 can be spent, for example. Referring now toFIG. 65 , in various instances, ajaw 3202 of anend effector 3200 can include a plurality ofsensors proximal sensor 3212 can be positioned in the proximal portion of thejaw 3202, and adistal sensor 3210 can be positioned in the distal portion of thejaw 3202, for example. In such instances, thesensors sled 3122 as thesled 3122 moves during a firing stroke, for example. In various instances, thesensors - Additionally or alternatively, an end effector can include a plurality of electrical contacts, which can detect the presence and/or firing state of a fastener cartridge. Referring now to
FIG. 66 , anend effector 3300 can include ajaw 3302 defining achannel 3304 configured to receive afastener cartridge 3320. In various instances, thejaw 3302 and thefastener cartridge 3320 can comprise electrical contacts. For example, theelongate channel 3304 can define abottom surface 3306, and anelectrical contact 3310 can be positioned on thebottom surface 3306. In various instances, a plurality ofelectrical contacts 3310 can be defined in theelongate channel 3304. Theelectrical contacts 3310 can form part of a firing-state circuit 3340, which can be in signal communication with a microcontroller of the surgical system. For example, theelectrical contacts 3310 can be electrically coupled to and/or in communication with a power supply, and can form electrically active ends of an open circuit, for example. In some instances, one of theelectrical contacts 3310 can be powered such that a voltage potential is created intermediate theelectrical contacts 3310. In certain instances, one of the contacts can be coupled to an output channel of the microprocessor, for example, which can apply a voltage potential to the contact. Another contact can be coupled to an input channel of the microprocessor, for example. In certain instances, theelectrical contacts 3310 can be insulated from theframe 3306 of thejaw 3302. Referring still toFIG. 66 , thefastener cartridge 3320 can also include anelectrical contact 3330, or a plurality of electrical contacts, for example. In various instances, theelectrical contact 3330 can be positioned on a moveable element of thefastener cartridge 3320. For example, theelectrical contact 3330 can be positioned on thesled 3322 of thefastener cartridge 3320, and thus, theelectrical contact 3330 can move in thefastener cartridge 3320 during a firing stroke. - In various instances, the
electrical contact 3330 can comprise a metallic bar or plate on thesled 3320, for example. Theelectrical contact 3330 in thefastener cartridge 3320 can cooperate with the electrical contact(s) 3310 in theend effector 3300, for example. In certain circumstances, theelectrical contact 3330 can contact the electrical contact(s) 3310 when thesled 3322 is positioned in a particular position, or a range of positions, in thefastener cartridge 3320. For example, theelectrical contact 3330 can contact theelectrical contacts 3310 when thesled 3322 is unfired, and thus, positioned in a proximal position in thefastener cartridge 3320. In such circumstances, theelectrical contact 3330 can close the circuit between theelectrical contacts 3310, for example. Moreover, the firing-state circuit 3340 can communicate the closed circuit, i.e., the unfired cartridge indication, to the microcontroller of the surgical system. In such instances, when thesled 3322 is fired distally during a firing stroke, theelectrical contact 3330 can move out of electrically contact with theelectrical contacts 3310, for example. Accordingly, the firing-state circuit 3340 can communicate the open circuit, i.e., the fired cartridge indication, to the microcontroller of the surgical system. In certain circumstances, the microcontroller may only initiate a firing stroke when an unspent cartridge is indicated by the firing-state circuit 3340, for example. In various instances, theelectrical contact 3330 can comprise an electromechanical fuse. In such instances, the fuse can break or short when thesled 3322 is fired through a firing stroke, for example. - Additionally or alternatively, referring now to
FIG. 67 , anend effector 3400 can include ajaw 3402 and a cartridge-present circuit 3440. In various instances, thejaw 3402 can comprise anelectrical contact 3410, or a plurality ofelectrical contacts 3410, in anelongate channel 3404 thereof, for example. Furthermore, afastener cartridge 3420 can include anelectrical contact 3430, or a plurality ofelectrical contacts 3430, on an outer surface of thefastener cartridge 3420. In various instances, theelectrical contacts 3430 can be positioned and/or mounted to a fixed or stationary component of thefastener cartridge 3420, for example. In various circumstances, theelectrical contacts 3430 of thefastener cartridge 3420 can contact theelectrical contacts 3410 of theend effector 3400 when thefastener cartridge 3420 is loaded into theelongate channel 3404, for example. Prior to placement of thefastener cartridge 3420 in theelongate channel 3404, the cartridge-present circuit 3440 can be an open circuit, for example. When thefastener cartridge 3420 is properly seated in thejaw 3402, theelectrical contacts present circuit 3440. In instances where thejaw 3402 and/or thefastener cartridge 3420 comprise a plurality ofelectrical contacts present circuit 3440 can comprise a plurality of circuits. Moreover, in certain instances, the cartridge-present circuit 3440 can identify the type of cartridge loaded in thejaw 3402 based on the number and/or arrangement ofelectrical contacts 3430 on thefastener cartridge 3420, for example, and the corresponding open and/or closed circuits of the cartridge-present circuit 3440, for example. - Moreover, the
electrical contacts 3410 in thejaw 3402 can be in signal communication with the microcontroller of the surgical system. Theelectrical contacts 3410 can be wired to a power source, for example, and/or can communicate with the microcontroller via a wired and/or wireless connection, for example. In various instances, the cartridge-present circuit 3440 can communicate the cartridge presence or absence to the microcontroller of the surgical system. In various instances, a firing stroke may be prevented when the cartridge-present circuit 3440 indicates the absence of a fastener cartridge in theend effector jaw 3402, for example. Moreover, a firing stroke may be permitted when the cartridge—present circuit 3440 indicates the presence of afastener cartridge 3420 in theend effector jaw 3402. - As described throughout the present disclosure, various sensors, programs, and circuits can detect and measure numerous characteristics of the surgical instrument and/or components thereof, surgical use or operation, and/or the tissue and/or operating site. For example, tissue thickness, the identification of the instrument components, usage and feedback data from surgical functions, and error or fault indications can be detected by the surgical instrument. In certain instances, the fastener cartridge can include a nonvolatile memory unit, which can be embedded or removably coupled to the fastener cartridge, for example. Such a nonvolatile memory unit can be in signal communication with the microcontroller via hardware, such as the electrical contacts described herein, radio frequency, or various other suitable forms of data transmission. In such instances, the microcontroller can communicate data and feedback to the nonvolatile memory unit in the fastener cartridge, and thus, the fastener cartridge can store information. In various instances, the information can be securely stored and access thereto can be restricted as suitable and appropriate for the circumstances.
- In certain instances, the nonvolatile memory unit can comprise information regarding the fastener cartridge characteristics and/or the compatibility thereof with various other components of the modular surgical system. For example, when the fastener cartridge is loaded into an end effector, the nonvolatile memory unit can provide compatibility information to the microcontroller of the surgical system. In such instances, the microcontroller can verify the validity or compatibility of the modular assembly. For example, the microcontroller can confirm that the handle component can fire the fastener cartridge and/or that the fastener cartridge appropriate fits the end effector, for example. In certain circumstances, the microcontroller can communicate the compatibility or lack thereof to the operator of the surgical system, and/or may prevent a surgical function if the modular components are incompatible, for example.
- As described herein, the surgical instrument can include a sensor, which can cooperate with a magnet to detect various characteristics of the surgical instrument, operation, and surgical site. In certain instances, the sensor can comprise a Hall Effect sensor and, in other instances, the sensor can comprise a magnetoresistive sensor as depicted in
FIGS. 68(A)-68(C) , for example. As described in greater detail herein, a surgical end effector can comprise a first jaw, which can be configured to receive a fastener cartridge, and a second jaw. The first jaw and/or the fastener cartridge can comprise a magnetic element, such as a permanent magnet, for example, and the second jaw can comprise a magnetoresistive sensor, for example. In other instances, the first jaw and/or the fastener cartridge can comprise a magnetoresistive sensor, for example, and the second jaw can comprise a magnetic element. The magnetoresistive sensor may have various characteristics listed in the table inFIG. 68(C) , for example, and/or similar specifications, for example. In certain instances, the change in resistance caused by movement of the magnetic element relative to the magnetoresistive sensor can affect and/or vary the properties of the magnetic circuit depicted inFIG. 68(B) , for example. - In various instances, the magnetoresistive sensor can detect the position of the magnetic element, and thus, can detect the thickness of tissue clamped between the opposing first and second jaws, for example. The magnetoresistive sensor can be in signal communication with the microcontroller, and the magnetoresistive sensor can wirelessly transmit data to an antenna in signal communication with the microcontroller, for example. In various instances, a passive circuit can comprise the magnetoresistive sensor. Moreover, the antenna can be positioned in the end effector, and can detect a wireless signal from the magnetoresistive sensor and/or microprocessor operably coupled thereto, for example. In such circumstances, an exposed electrical connection between the end effector comprising the antenna, for example, and the fastener cartridge comprising the magnetoresistive sensor, for example, can be avoided. Furthermore, in various instances, the antenna can be wired and/or in wireless communication with the microcontroller of the surgical instrument.
- Tissue can contain fluid and, when the tissue is compressed, the fluid may be pressed from the compressed tissue. For example, when tissue is clamped between opposing jaws of a surgical end effector, fluid may flow and/or be displaced from the clamped tissue. Fluid flow or displacement in clamped tissue can depend on various characteristics of the tissue, such as the thickness and/or type of tissue, as well as various characteristics of the surgical operation, such as the desired tissue compression and/or the elapsed clamping time, for example. In various instances, fluid displacement between the opposing jaws of an end effector may contribute to malformation of staples formed between the opposing jaws. For example, the displacement of fluid during and/or following staple formation can induce bending and/or other uncontrolled movement of a staple away from its desired or intended formation. Accordingly, in various instances, it may be desirable to control the firing stroke, e.g., to control the firing speed, in relationship to the detected fluid flow, or lack thereof, intermediate opposing jaws of a surgical end effector.
- In various instances, the fluid displacement in clamped tissue can be determined or approximated by various measurable and/or detectable tissue characteristics. For example, the degree of tissue compression can correspond to the degree of fluid displacement in the clamped tissue. In various instances, a higher degree of tissue compression can correspond to more fluid flow, for example, and a reduced degree of tissue compression can correspond to less fluid flow, for example. In various circumstances, a sensor positioned in the end effector jaws can detect the force exerted on the jaws by the compressed tissue. Additionally or alternatively, a sensor on or operably associated with the cutting element can detect the resistance on the cutting element as the cutting element is advanced through, and transects, the clamped tissue. In such circumstances, the detected cutting and/or firing resistance can correspond to the degree of tissue compression. When tissue compression is high, for example, the cutting element resistance can be greater, and when tissue compression is lower, for example, the cutting element resistance can be reduced. Correspondingly, the cutting element resistance can indicate the amount of fluid displacement.
- In certain instances, the fluid displacement in clamped tissue can be determined or approximated by the force required to fire the cutting element, i.e., the force-to-fire. The force-to-fire can correspond to the cutting element resistance, for example. Furthermore, the force-to-fire can be measured or approximated by a microcontroller in signal communication with the electric motor that drives the cutting element. For example, where the cutting element resistance is higher, the electric motor can require more current to drive the cutting element through the tissue. Similarly, if the cutting element resistance is lower, the electric motor can require less current to drive the cutting element through the tissue. In such instances, the microcontroller can detect the amount of current drawn by the electric motor during the firing stroke. For example, the microcontroller can include a current sensor, which can detect the current utilized to fire the cutting element through the tissue, for example.
- Referring now to
FIG. 60 , a surgical instrument assembly or system can be configured to detect the compressive force in the clamped tissue. For example, in various instances, an electric motor can drive the firing element, and a microcontroller can be in signal communication with the electric motor. As the electric motor drives the firing element, the microcontroller can determine the current drawn by the electric motor, for example. In such instances, the force-to-fire can correspond to the current drawn by the electric motor throughout the firing stroke, as described above. Referring still toFIG. 60 , atstep 3501, the microcontroller of the surgical instrument can determine if the current drawn by the electric motor increases during the firing stroke and, if so, can calculate the percentage increase of the current. - In various instances, the microcontroller can compare the current draw increase during the firing stroke to a predefined threshold value. For example, the predefined threshold value can be 5%, 10%, 25%, 50% and/or 100%, for example, and the microcontroller can compare the current increase detected during a firing stroke to the predefined threshold value. In other instances, the threshold increase can be a value or range of values between 5% and 100%, and, in still other instances, the threshold increase can be less than 5% or greater than 100%, for example. For example, if the predefined threshold value is 50%, the microcontroller can compare the percentage of current draw change to 50%, for example. In certain instances, the microcontroller can determine if the current drawn by the electric motor during the firing stroke exceeds a percentage of the maximum current or a baseline value. For example, the microcontroller can determine if the current exceeds 5%, 10%, 25%, 50% and/or 100% of the maximum motor current. In other instances, the microcontroller can compare the current drawn by the electric motor during the firing stroke to a predefined baseline value, for example.
- In various instances, the microcontroller can utilize an algorithm to determine the change in current drawn by the electric motor during a firing stroke. For example, the current sensor can detect the current drawn by the electric motor at various times and/or intervals during the firing stroke. The current sensor can continually detect the current drawn by the electric motor and/or can intermittently detect the current draw by the electric motor. In various instances, the algorithm can compare the most recent current reading to the immediately proceeding current reading, for example. Additionally or alternatively, the algorithm can compare a sample reading within a time period X to a previous current reading. For example, the algorithm can compare the sample reading to a previous sample reading within a previous time period X, such as the immediately proceeding time period X, for example. In other instances, the algorithm can calculate the trending average of current drawn by the motor. The algorithm can calculate the average current draw during a time period X that includes the most recent current reading, for example, and can compare that average current draw to the average current draw during an immediately proceeding time period time X, for example.
- Referring still to
FIG. 60 , if the microcontroller detects a current increase that is greater than the threshold change or value, the microcontroller can proceed to step 3503, and the firing speed of the firing element can be reduced. For example, the microcontroller can communicate with the electric motor to slow the firing speed of the firing element. For example, the firing speed can be reduced by a predefined step unit and/or a predefined percentage. In various instances, the microcontroller can comprise a velocity control module, which can affect changes in the cutting element speed and/or can maintain the cutting element speed. The velocity control module can comprise a resistor, a variable resistor, a pulse width modulation circuit, and/or a frequency modulation circuit, for example. Referring still toFIG. 60 , if the current increase is less than the threshold value, the microcontroller can proceed to step 3505, wherein the firing speed of the firing element can be maintained, for example. In various circumstances, the microcontroller can continue to monitor the current drawn by the electric motor and changes thereto during at least a portion of the firing stroke. Moreover, the microcontroller and/or velocity control module thereof can adjust the firing element velocity throughout the firing stroke in accordance with the detected current draw. In such instances, controlling the firing speed based on the approximated fluid flow or displacement in the clamped tissue, for example, can reduce the incidence of staple malformation in the clamped tissue. - Referring now to
FIG. 61 , in various instances, the microcontroller can adjust the firing element velocity by pausing the firing element for a predefined period of time. For example, similar to the embodiment depicted inFIG. 60 , if the microcontroller detects a current draw that exceeds a predefined threshold value atstep 3511, the microcontroller can proceed to step 3513 and the firing element can be paused. For example, the microcontroller can pause movement and/or translation of the firing element for one second if the current increase measured by the microcontroller exceeds the threshold value. In other instances, the firing stroke can be paused for a fraction of a second and/or more than one second, for example. Similar to the process described above, if the current draw increase is less than the threshold value, the microcontroller can proceed to step 3515 and the firing element can continue to progress through the firing stroke without adjusting the velocity of the firing element. In certain instances, the microcontroller can be configured to pause and slow the firing element during a firing stroke. For example, for a first increase in current draw, the firing element can be paused, and for a second, different increase in current draw, the velocity of the firing element can be reduced. In still other circumstances, the microcontroller can command an increase in the velocity of the firing element if the current draw decreases below a threshold value, for example. - The entire disclosures of:
- U.S. Pat. No. 5,403,312, entitled ELECTROSURGICAL HEMOSTATIC DEVICE, which issued on Apr. 4, 1995;
- U.S. Pat. No. 7,000,818, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT HAVING SEPARATE DISTINCT CLOSING AND FIRING SYSTEMS, which issued on Feb. 21, 2006;
- U.S. Pat. No. 7,422,139, entitled MOTOR-DRIVEN SURGICAL CUTTING AND FASTENING INSTRUMENT WITH TACTILE POSITION FEEDBACK, which issued on Sep. 9, 2008;
- U.S. Pat. No. 7,464,849, entitled ELECTRO-MECHANICAL SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH CLOSURE SYSTEM AND ANVIL ALIGNMENT COMPONENTS, which issued on Dec. 16, 2008;
- U.S. Pat. No. 7,670,334, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT HAVING AN ARTICULATING END EFFECTOR, which issued on Mar. 2, 2010;
- U.S. Pat. No. 7,753,245, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS, which issued on Jul. 13, 2010;
- U.S. Pat. No. 8,393,514, entitled SELECTIVELY ORIENTABLE IMPLANTABLE FASTENER CARTRIDGE, which issued on Mar. 12, 2013;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/343,803, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT HAVING RECORDING CAPABILITIES, now U.S. Pat. No. 7,845,537;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/031,573, entitled SURGICAL CUTTING AND FASTENING INSTRUMENT HAVING RF ELECTRODES, filed Feb. 14, 2008;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/031,873, entitled END EFFECTORS FOR A SURGICAL CUTTING AND STAPLING INSTRUMENT, filed Feb. 15, 2008, now U.S. Pat. No. 7,980,443;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/235,782, entitled MOTOR-DRIVEN SURGICAL CUTTING INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,210,411;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/249,117, entitled POWERED SURGICAL CUTTING AND STAPLING APPARATUS WITH MANUALLY RETRACTABLE FIRING SYSTEM, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,608,045;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/647,100, entitled MOTOR-DRIVEN SURGICAL CUTTING INSTRUMENT WITH ELECTRIC ACTUATOR DIRECTIONAL CONTROL ASSEMBLY, filed Dec. 24, 2009, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,220,688;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/893,461, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE, filed Sep. 29, 2012, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,733,613;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/036,647, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT, filed Feb. 28, 2011, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,561,870;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/118,241, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH ROTATABLE STAPLE DEPLOYMENT ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,072,535;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/524,049, entitled ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A FIRING DRIVE, filed on Jun. 15, 2012, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,101,358;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/800,025, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE TISSUE THICKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM, filed on Mar. 13, 2013, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,345,481;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/800,067, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE TISSUE THICKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM, filed on Mar. 13, 2013, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263552;
- U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0175955, entitled SURGICAL CUTTING AND FASTENING INSTRUMENT WITH CLOSURE TRIGGER LOCKING MECHANISM, filed Jan. 31, 2006; and
- U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2010/0264194, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT WITH AN ARTICULATABLE END EFFECTOR, filed Apr. 22, 2010, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,308,040, are hereby incorporated by reference herein.
- In accordance with various embodiments, the surgical instruments described herein may comprise one or more processors (e.g., microprocessor, microcontroller) coupled to various sensors. In addition, to the processor(s), a storage (having operating logic) and communication interface, are coupled to each other.
- The processor may be configured to execute the operating logic. The processor may be any one of a number of single or multi-core processors known in the art. The storage may comprise volatile and non-volatile storage media configured to store persistent and temporal (working) copy of the operating logic.
- In various embodiments, the operating logic may be configured to process the collected biometric associated with motion data of the user, as described above. In various embodiments, the operating logic may be configured to perform the initial processing, and transmit the data to the computer hosting the application to determine and generate instructions. For these embodiments, the operating logic may be further configured to receive information from and provide feedback to a hosting computer. In alternate embodiments, the operating logic may be configured to assume a larger role in receiving information and determining the feedback. In either case, whether determined on its own or responsive to instructions from a hosting computer, the operating logic may be further configured to control and provide feedback to the user.
- In various embodiments, the operating logic may be implemented in instructions supported by the instruction set architecture (ISA) of the processor, or in higher level languages and compiled into the supported ISA. The operating logic may comprise one or more logic units or modules. The operating logic may be implemented in an object oriented manner. The operating logic may be configured to be executed in a multi-tasking and/or multi-thread manner. In other embodiments, the operating logic may be implemented in hardware such as a gate array.
- In various embodiments, the communication interface may be configured to facilitate communication between a peripheral device and the computing system. The communication may include transmission of the collected biometric data associated with position, posture, and/or movement data of the user's body part(s) to a hosting computer, and transmission of data associated with the tactile feedback from the host computer to the peripheral device. In various embodiments, the communication interface may be a wired or a wireless communication interface. An example of a wired communication interface may include, but is not limited to, a Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface. An example of a wireless communication interface may include, but is not limited to, a Bluetooth interface.
- For various embodiments, the processor may be packaged together with the operating logic. In various embodiments, the processor may be packaged together with the operating logic to form a System in Package (SiP). In various embodiments, the processor may be integrated on the same die with the operating logic. In various embodiments, the processor may be packaged together with the operating logic to form a System on Chip (SoC).
- Various embodiments may be described herein in the general context of computer executable instructions, such as software, program modules, and/or engines being executed by a processor. Generally, software, program modules, and/or engines include any software element arranged to perform particular operations or implement particular abstract data types. Software, program modules, and/or engines can include routines, programs, objects, components, data structures and the like that perform particular tasks or implement particular abstract data types. An implementation of the software, program modules, and/or engines components and techniques may be stored on and/or transmitted across some form of computer-readable media. In this regard, computer-readable media can be any available medium or media useable to store information and accessible by a computing device. Some embodiments also may be practiced in distributed computing environments where operations are performed by one or more remote processing devices that are linked through a communications network. In a distributed computing environment, software, program modules, and/or engines may be located in both local and remote computer storage media including memory storage devices. A memory such as a random access memory (RAM) or other dynamic storage device may be employed for storing information and instructions to be executed by the processor. The memory also may be used for storing temporary variables or other intermediate information during execution of instructions to be executed by the processor.
- Although some embodiments may be illustrated and described as comprising functional components, software, engines, and/or modules performing various operations, it can be appreciated that such components or modules may be implemented by one or more hardware components, software components, and/or combination thereof. The functional components, software, engines, and/or modules may be implemented, for example, by logic (e.g., instructions, data, and/or code) to be executed by a logic device (e.g., processor). Such logic may be stored internally or externally to a logic device on one or more types of computer-readable storage media. In other embodiments, the functional components such as software, engines, and/or modules may be implemented by hardware elements that may include processors, microprocessors, circuits, circuit elements (e.g., transistors, resistors, capacitors, inductors, and so forth), integrated circuits, application specific integrated circuits (ASIC), programmable logic devices (PLD), digital signal processors (DSP), field programmable gate array (FPGA), logic gates, registers, semiconductor device, chips, microchips, chip sets, and so forth.
- Examples of software, engines, and/or modules may include software components, programs, applications, computer programs, application programs, system programs, machine programs, operating system software, middleware, firmware, software modules, routines, subroutines, functions, methods, procedures, software interfaces, application program interfaces (API), instruction sets, computing code, computer code, code segments, computer code segments, words, values, symbols, or any combination thereof. Determining whether an embodiment is implemented using hardware elements and/or software elements may vary in accordance with any number of factors, such as desired computational rate, power levels, heat tolerances, processing cycle budget, input data rates, output data rates, memory resources, data bus speeds and other design or performance constraints.
- One or more of the modules described herein may comprise one or more embedded applications implemented as firmware, software, hardware, or any combination thereof. One or more of the modules described herein may comprise various executable modules such as software, programs, data, drivers, application program interfaces (APIs), and so forth. The firmware may be stored in a memory of the
controller 2016 and/or thecontroller 2022 which may comprise a nonvolatile memory (NVM), such as in bit-masked read-only memory (ROM) or flash memory. In various implementations, storing the firmware in ROM may preserve flash memory. The nonvolatile memory (NVM) may comprise other types of memory including, for example, programmable ROM (PROM), erasable programmable ROM (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM), or battery backed random-access memory (RAM) such as dynamic RAM (DRAM), Double-Data-Rate DRAM (DDRAM), and/or synchronous DRAM (SDRAM). - In some cases, various embodiments may be implemented as an article of manufacture. The article of manufacture may include a computer readable storage medium arranged to store logic, instructions and/or data for performing various operations of one or more embodiments. In various embodiments, for example, the article of manufacture may comprise a magnetic disk, optical disk, flash memory or firmware containing computer program instructions suitable for execution by a general purpose processor or application specific processor. The embodiments, however, are not limited in this context.
- The functions of the various functional elements, logical blocks, modules, and circuits elements described in connection with the embodiments disclosed herein may be implemented in the general context of computer executable instructions, such as software, control modules, logic, and/or logic modules executed by the processing unit. Generally, software, control modules, logic, and/or logic modules comprise any software element arranged to perform particular operations. Software, control modules, logic, and/or logic modules can comprise routines, programs, objects, components, data structures and the like that perform particular tasks or implement particular abstract data types. An implementation of the software, control modules, logic, and/or logic modules and techniques may be stored on and/or transmitted across some form of computer-readable media. In this regard, computer-readable media can be any available medium or media useable to store information and accessible by a computing device. Some embodiments also may be practiced in distributed computing environments where operations are performed by one or more remote processing devices that are linked through a communications network. In a distributed computing environment, software, control modules, logic, and/or logic modules may be located in both local and remote computer storage media including memory storage devices.
- Additionally, it is to be appreciated that the embodiments described herein illustrate example implementations, and that the functional elements, logical blocks, modules, and circuits elements may be implemented in various other ways which are consistent with the described embodiments. Furthermore, the operations performed by such functional elements, logical blocks, modules, and circuits elements may be combined and/or separated for a given implementation and may be performed by a greater number or fewer number of components or modules. As will be apparent to those of skill in the art upon reading the present disclosure, each of the individual embodiments described and illustrated herein has discrete components and features which may be readily separated from or combined with the features of any of the other several aspects without departing from the scope of the present disclosure. Any recited method can be carried out in the order of events recited or in any other order which is logically possible.
- It is worthy to note that any reference to “one embodiment” or “an embodiment” means that a particular feature, structure, or characteristic described in connection with the embodiment is comprised in at least one embodiment. The appearances of the phrase “in one embodiment” or “in one aspect” in the specification are not necessarily all referring to the same embodiment.
- Unless specifically stated otherwise, it may be appreciated that terms such as “processing,” “computing,” “calculating,” “determining,” or the like, refer to the action and/or processes of a computer or computing system, or similar electronic computing device, such as a general purpose processor, a DSP, ASIC, FPGA or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof designed to perform the functions described herein that manipulates and/or transforms data represented as physical quantities (e.g., electronic) within registers and/or memories into other data similarly represented as physical quantities within the memories, registers or other such information storage, transmission or display devices.
- It is worthy to note that some embodiments may be described using the expression “coupled” and “connected” along with their derivatives. These terms are not intended as synonyms for each other. For example, some embodiments may be described using the terms “connected” and/or “coupled” to indicate that two or more elements are in direct physical or electrical contact with each other. The term “coupled,” however, also may mean that two or more elements are not in direct contact with each other, but yet still co-operate or interact with each other. With respect to software elements, for example, the term “coupled” may refer to interfaces, message interfaces, application program interface (API), exchanging messages, and so forth.
- It should be appreciated that any patent, publication, or other disclosure material, in whole or in part, that is said to be incorporated by reference herein is incorporated herein only to the extent that the incorporated material does not conflict with existing definitions, statements, or other disclosure material set forth in this disclosure. As such, and to the extent necessary, the disclosure as explicitly set forth herein supersedes any conflicting material incorporated herein by reference. Any material, or portion thereof, that is said to be incorporated by reference herein, but which conflicts with existing definitions, statements, or other disclosure material set forth herein will only be incorporated to the extent that no conflict arises between that incorporated material and the existing disclosure material.
- The disclosed embodiments have application in conventional endoscopic and open surgical instrumentation as well as application in robotic-assisted surgery.
- Embodiments of the devices disclosed herein can be designed to be disposed of after a single use, or they can be designed to be used multiple times. Embodiments may, in either or both cases, be reconditioned for reuse after at least one use. Reconditioning may include any combination of the steps of disassembly of the device, followed by cleaning or replacement of particular pieces, and subsequent reassembly. In particular, embodiments of the device may be disassembled, and any number of the particular pieces or parts of the device may be selectively replaced or removed in any combination. Upon cleaning and/or replacement of particular parts, embodiments of the device may be reassembled for subsequent use either at a reconditioning facility, or by a surgical team immediately prior to a surgical procedure. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that reconditioning of a device may utilize a variety of techniques for disassembly, cleaning/replacement, and reassembly. Use of such techniques, and the resulting reconditioned device, are all within the scope of the present application.
- By way of example only, embodiments described herein may be processed before surgery. First, a new or used instrument may be obtained and when necessary cleaned. The instrument may then be sterilized. In one sterilization technique, the instrument is placed in a closed and sealed container, such as a plastic or TYVEK bag. The container and instrument may then be placed in a field of radiation that can penetrate the container, such as gamma radiation, x-rays, or high-energy electrons. The radiation may kill bacteria on the instrument and in the container. The sterilized instrument may then be stored in the sterile container. The sealed container may keep the instrument sterile until it is opened in a medical facility. A device also may be sterilized using any other technique known in the art, including but not limited to beta or gamma radiation, ethylene oxide, or steam.
- One skilled in the art will recognize that the herein described components (e.g., operations), devices, objects, and the discussion accompanying them are used as examples for the sake of conceptual clarity and that various configuration modifications are contemplated. Consequently, as used herein, the specific exemplars set forth and the accompanying discussion are intended to be representative of their more general classes. In general, use of any specific exemplar is intended to be representative of its class, and the non-inclusion of specific components (e.g., operations), devices, and objects should not be taken limiting.
- With respect to the use of substantially any plural and/or singular terms herein, those having skill in the art can translate from the plural to the singular and/or from the singular to the plural as is appropriate to the context and/or application. The various singular/plural permutations are not expressly set forth herein for sake of clarity.
- The herein described subject matter sometimes illustrates different components contained within, or connected with, different other components. It is to be understood that such depicted architectures are merely examples and that in fact many other architectures may be implemented which achieve the same functionality. In a conceptual sense, any arrangement of components to achieve the same functionality is effectively “associated” such that the desired functionality is achieved. Hence, any two components herein combined to achieve a particular functionality can be seen as “associated with” each other such that the desired functionality is achieved, irrespective of architectures or intermedial components. Likewise, any two components so associated also can be viewed as being “operably connected,” or “operably coupled,” to each other to achieve the desired functionality, and any two components capable of being so associated also can be viewed as being “operably couplable,” to each other to achieve the desired functionality. Specific examples of operably couplable include but are not limited to physically mateable and/or physically interacting components, and/or wirelessly interactable, and/or wirelessly interacting components, and/or logically interacting, and/or logically interactable components.
- Some aspects may be described using the expression “coupled” and “connected” along with their derivatives. It should be understood that these terms are not intended as synonyms for each other. For example, some aspects may be described using the term “connected” to indicate that two or more elements are in direct physical or electrical contact with each other. In another example, some aspects may be described using the term “coupled” to indicate that two or more elements are in direct physical or electrical contact. The term “coupled,” however, also may mean that two or more elements are not in direct contact with each other, but yet still co-operate or interact with each other.
- In some instances, one or more components may be referred to herein as “configured to,” “configurable to,” “operable/operative to,” “adapted/adaptable,” “able to,” “conformable/conformed to,” etc. Those skilled in the art will recognize that “configured to” can generally encompass active-state components and/or inactive-state components and/or standby-state components, unless context requires otherwise.
- While particular aspects of the present subject matter described herein have been shown and described, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that, based upon the teachings herein, changes and modifications may be made without departing from the subject matter described herein and its broader aspects and, therefore, the appended claims are to encompass within their scope all such changes and modifications as are within the true scope of the subject matter described herein. It will be understood by those within the art that, in general, terms used herein, and especially in the appended claims (e.g., bodies of the appended claims) are generally intended as “open” terms (e.g., the term “including” should be interpreted as “including but not limited to,” the term “having” should be interpreted as “having at least,” the term “includes” should be interpreted as “includes but is not limited to,” etc.). It will be further understood by those within the art that when a specific number of an introduced claim recitation is intended, such an intent will be explicitly recited in the claim, and in the absence of such recitation no such intent is present. For example, as an aid to understanding, the following appended claims may contain usage of the introductory phrases “at least one” and “one or more” to introduce claim recitations. However, the use of such phrases should not be construed to imply that the introduction of a claim recitation by the indefinite articles “a” or “an” limits any particular claim containing such introduced claim recitation to claims containing only one such recitation, even when the same claim includes the introductory phrases “one or more” or “at least one” and indefinite articles such as “a” or “an” (e.g., “a” and/or “an” should typically be interpreted to mean “at least one” or “one or more”); the same holds true for the use of definite articles used to introduce claim recitations.
- In addition, even when a specific number of an introduced claim recitation is explicitly recited, those skilled in the art will recognize that such recitation should typically be interpreted to mean at least the recited number (e.g., the bare recitation of “two recitations,” without other modifiers, typically means at least two recitations, or two or more recitations). Furthermore, in those instances where a convention analogous to “at least one of A, B, and C, etc.” is used, in general such a construction is intended in the sense one having skill in the art would understand the convention (e.g., “a system having at least one of A, B, and C” would include but not be limited to systems that have A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B together, A and C together, B and C together, and/or A, B, and C together, etc.). In those instances where a convention analogous to “at least one of A, B, or C, etc.” is used, in general such a construction is intended in the sense one having skill in the art would understand the convention (e.g., “a system having at least one of A, B, or C” would include but not be limited to systems that have A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B together, A and C together, B and C together, and/or A, B, and C together, etc.). It will be further understood by those within the art that typically a disjunctive word and/or phrase presenting two or more alternative terms, whether in the description, claims, or drawings, should be understood to contemplate the possibilities of including one of the terms, either of the terms, or both terms unless context dictates otherwise. For example, the phrase “A or B” will be typically understood to include the possibilities of “A” or “B” or “A and B.”
- With respect to the appended claims, those skilled in the art will appreciate that recited operations therein may generally be performed in any order. Also, although various operational flows are presented in a sequence(s), it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently. Examples of such alternate orderings may include overlapping, interleaved, interrupted, reordered, incremental, preparatory, supplemental, simultaneous, reverse, or other variant orderings, unless context dictates otherwise. Furthermore, terms like “responsive to,” “related to,” or other past-tense adjectives are generally not intended to exclude such variants, unless context dictates otherwise.
- In summary, numerous benefits have been described which result from employing the concepts described herein. The foregoing description of the one or more embodiments has been presented for purposes of illustration and description. It is not intended to be exhaustive or limiting to the precise form disclosed. Modifications or variations are possible in light of the above teachings. The one or more embodiments were chosen and described in order to illustrate principles and practical application to thereby enable one of ordinary skill in the art to utilize the various embodiments and with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated. It is intended that the claims submitted herewith define the overall scope.
Claims (20)
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US17/710,288 US20220218381A1 (en) | 2014-03-26 | 2022-03-31 | Feedback algorithms for manual bailout systems for surgical instruments |
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US14/226,093 US10028761B2 (en) | 2014-03-26 | 2014-03-26 | Feedback algorithms for manual bailout systems for surgical instruments |
US16/041,145 US20180333169A1 (en) | 2014-03-26 | 2018-07-20 | Feedback algorithms for manual bailout systems for surgical instruments |
US16/587,803 US20200093506A1 (en) | 2014-03-26 | 2019-09-30 | Feedback algorithms for manual bailout systems for surgical instruments |
US17/710,288 US20220218381A1 (en) | 2014-03-26 | 2022-03-31 | Feedback algorithms for manual bailout systems for surgical instruments |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US16/587,803 Continuation US20200093506A1 (en) | 2014-03-26 | 2019-09-30 | Feedback algorithms for manual bailout systems for surgical instruments |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20220218381A1 true US20220218381A1 (en) | 2022-07-14 |
Family
ID=58091943
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US17/710,439 Abandoned US20220218382A1 (en) | 2014-03-26 | 2022-03-31 | Feedback algorithms for manual bailout systems for surgical instruments |
US17/710,288 Pending US20220218381A1 (en) | 2014-03-26 | 2022-03-31 | Feedback algorithms for manual bailout systems for surgical instruments |
Family Applications Before (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US17/710,439 Abandoned US20220218382A1 (en) | 2014-03-26 | 2022-03-31 | Feedback algorithms for manual bailout systems for surgical instruments |
Country Status (4)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | US20220218382A1 (en) |
JP (1) | JP6518686B2 (en) |
CN (1) | CN106456167B (en) |
BR (1) | BR112016021974B1 (en) |
Cited By (157)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US11547404B2 (en) | 2014-12-18 | 2023-01-10 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument assembly comprising a flexible articulation system |
US11553916B2 (en) | 2015-09-30 | 2023-01-17 | Cilag Gmbh International | Compressible adjunct with crossing spacer fibers |
US11559302B2 (en) | 2007-06-04 | 2023-01-24 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument including a firing member movable at different speeds |
US11564682B2 (en) | 2007-06-04 | 2023-01-31 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapler device |
US11564686B2 (en) | 2017-06-28 | 2023-01-31 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical shaft assemblies with flexible interfaces |
US11571207B2 (en) | 2014-12-18 | 2023-02-07 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical system including lateral supports for a flexible drive member |
US11576673B2 (en) | 2005-08-31 | 2023-02-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling assembly for forming staples to different heights |
US11576672B2 (en) | 2019-12-19 | 2023-02-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument comprising a closure system including a closure member and an opening member driven by a drive screw |
US11583279B2 (en) | 2008-10-10 | 2023-02-21 | Cilag Gmbh International | Powered surgical cutting and stapling apparatus with manually retractable firing system |
US11602340B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2023-03-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Adhesive film laminate |
US11612394B2 (en) | 2011-05-27 | 2023-03-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Automated end effector component reloading system for use with a robotic system |
US11612395B2 (en) | 2008-02-14 | 2023-03-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical system including a control system having an RFID tag reader |
US11612393B2 (en) | 2006-01-31 | 2023-03-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Robotically-controlled end effector |
US11617575B2 (en) | 2008-09-23 | 2023-04-04 | Cilag Gmbh International | Motor-driven surgical cutting instrument |
US11617577B2 (en) | 2020-10-29 | 2023-04-04 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument comprising a sensor configured to sense whether an articulation drive of the surgical instrument is actuatable |
US11622785B2 (en) | 2006-09-29 | 2023-04-11 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical staples having attached drivers and stapling instruments for deploying the same |
US11622763B2 (en) | 2013-04-16 | 2023-04-11 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling assembly comprising a shiftable drive |
US11627959B2 (en) | 2019-06-28 | 2023-04-18 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instruments including manual and powered system lockouts |
US11627960B2 (en) | 2020-12-02 | 2023-04-18 | Cilag Gmbh International | Powered surgical instruments with smart reload with separately attachable exteriorly mounted wiring connections |
US11638587B2 (en) | 2019-06-28 | 2023-05-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | RFID identification systems for surgical instruments |
US11642125B2 (en) | 2016-04-15 | 2023-05-09 | Cilag Gmbh International | Robotic surgical system including a user interface and a control circuit |
US11642128B2 (en) | 2017-06-28 | 2023-05-09 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method for articulating a surgical instrument |
US11648008B2 (en) | 2006-01-31 | 2023-05-16 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument having force feedback capabilities |
US11648024B2 (en) | 2006-01-31 | 2023-05-16 | Cilag Gmbh International | Motor-driven surgical cutting and fastening instrument with position feedback |
US11648005B2 (en) | 2008-09-23 | 2023-05-16 | Cilag Gmbh International | Robotically-controlled motorized surgical instrument with an end effector |
US11653918B2 (en) | 2014-09-05 | 2023-05-23 | Cilag Gmbh International | Local display of tissue parameter stabilization |
US11653914B2 (en) | 2017-06-20 | 2023-05-23 | Cilag Gmbh International | Systems and methods for controlling motor velocity of a surgical stapling and cutting instrument according to articulation angle of end effector |
US11653920B2 (en) | 2020-12-02 | 2023-05-23 | Cilag Gmbh International | Powered surgical instruments with communication interfaces through sterile barrier |
US11653915B2 (en) | 2020-12-02 | 2023-05-23 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instruments with sled location detection and adjustment features |
US11660163B2 (en) | 2019-06-28 | 2023-05-30 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical system with RFID tags for updating motor assembly parameters |
US11666332B2 (en) | 2007-01-10 | 2023-06-06 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument comprising a control circuit configured to adjust the operation of a motor |
US11672536B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2023-06-13 | Cilag Gmbh International | Layer of material for a surgical end effector |
US11672532B2 (en) | 2017-06-20 | 2023-06-13 | Cilag Gmbh International | Techniques for adaptive control of motor velocity of a surgical stapling and cutting instrument |
US11678880B2 (en) | 2017-06-28 | 2023-06-20 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument comprising a shaft including a housing arrangement |
US11678877B2 (en) | 2014-12-18 | 2023-06-20 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument including a flexible support configured to support a flexible firing member |
US11678882B2 (en) | 2020-12-02 | 2023-06-20 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instruments with interactive features to remedy incidental sled movements |
US11684369B2 (en) | 2019-06-28 | 2023-06-27 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method of using multiple RFID chips with a surgical assembly |
US11684434B2 (en) | 2019-06-28 | 2023-06-27 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical RFID assemblies for instrument operational setting control |
US11684365B2 (en) | 2004-07-28 | 2023-06-27 | Cilag Gmbh International | Replaceable staple cartridges for surgical instruments |
US11684360B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2023-06-27 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising a variable thickness compressible portion |
US11696757B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2023-07-11 | Cilag Gmbh International | Monitoring of internal systems to detect and track cartridge motion status |
US11696761B2 (en) | 2019-03-25 | 2023-07-11 | Cilag Gmbh International | Firing drive arrangements for surgical systems |
US11701113B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2023-07-18 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling instrument comprising a separate power antenna and a data transfer antenna |
US11701115B2 (en) | 2016-12-21 | 2023-07-18 | Cilag Gmbh International | Methods of stapling tissue |
US11701111B2 (en) | 2019-12-19 | 2023-07-18 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method for operating a surgical stapling instrument |
US11701110B2 (en) | 2013-08-23 | 2023-07-18 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument including a drive assembly movable in a non-motorized mode of operation |
US11707273B2 (en) | 2012-06-15 | 2023-07-25 | Cilag Gmbh International | Articulatable surgical instrument comprising a firing drive |
US11717297B2 (en) | 2014-09-05 | 2023-08-08 | Cilag Gmbh International | Smart cartridge wake up operation and data retention |
US11717291B2 (en) | 2021-03-22 | 2023-08-08 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising staples configured to apply different tissue compression |
US11717294B2 (en) | 2014-04-16 | 2023-08-08 | Cilag Gmbh International | End effector arrangements comprising indicators |
US11717289B2 (en) | 2020-10-29 | 2023-08-08 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument comprising an indicator which indicates that an articulation drive is actuatable |
US11723658B2 (en) | 2021-03-22 | 2023-08-15 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising a firing lockout |
US11723662B2 (en) | 2021-05-28 | 2023-08-15 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling instrument comprising an articulation control display |
US11723657B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2023-08-15 | Cilag Gmbh International | Adjustable communication based on available bandwidth and power capacity |
US11730471B2 (en) | 2016-02-09 | 2023-08-22 | Cilag Gmbh International | Articulatable surgical instruments with single articulation link arrangements |
US11730473B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2023-08-22 | Cilag Gmbh International | Monitoring of manufacturing life-cycle |
US11737754B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2023-08-29 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapler with floating anvil |
US11737751B2 (en) | 2020-12-02 | 2023-08-29 | Cilag Gmbh International | Devices and methods of managing energy dissipated within sterile barriers of surgical instrument housings |
US11737749B2 (en) | 2021-03-22 | 2023-08-29 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling instrument comprising a retraction system |
US11744583B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2023-09-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Distal communication array to tune frequency of RF systems |
US11744581B2 (en) | 2020-12-02 | 2023-09-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Powered surgical instruments with multi-phase tissue treatment |
US11744603B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2023-09-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Multi-axis pivot joints for surgical instruments and methods for manufacturing same |
US11744588B2 (en) | 2015-02-27 | 2023-09-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling instrument including a removably attachable battery pack |
US11749877B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2023-09-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling instrument comprising a signal antenna |
US11751869B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2023-09-12 | Cilag Gmbh International | Monitoring of multiple sensors over time to detect moving characteristics of tissue |
US11751867B2 (en) | 2017-12-21 | 2023-09-12 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument comprising sequenced systems |
US11759208B2 (en) | 2015-12-30 | 2023-09-19 | Cilag Gmbh International | Mechanisms for compensating for battery pack failure in powered surgical instruments |
US11759202B2 (en) | 2021-03-22 | 2023-09-19 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising an implantable layer |
US11766258B2 (en) | 2017-06-27 | 2023-09-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical anvil arrangements |
US11771419B2 (en) | 2019-06-28 | 2023-10-03 | Cilag Gmbh International | Packaging for a replaceable component of a surgical stapling system |
US11779420B2 (en) | 2012-06-28 | 2023-10-10 | Cilag Gmbh International | Robotic surgical attachments having manually-actuated retraction assemblies |
US11779330B2 (en) | 2020-10-29 | 2023-10-10 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument comprising a jaw alignment system |
US11779336B2 (en) | 2016-02-12 | 2023-10-10 | Cilag Gmbh International | Mechanisms for compensating for drivetrain failure in powered surgical instruments |
US11786239B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2023-10-17 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument articulation joint arrangements comprising multiple moving linkage features |
US11786243B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2023-10-17 | Cilag Gmbh International | Firing members having flexible portions for adapting to a load during a surgical firing stroke |
US11793518B2 (en) | 2006-01-31 | 2023-10-24 | Cilag Gmbh International | Powered surgical instruments with firing system lockout arrangements |
US11793511B2 (en) | 2005-11-09 | 2023-10-24 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instruments |
US11793512B2 (en) | 2005-08-31 | 2023-10-24 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridges for forming staples having differing formed staple heights |
US11793513B2 (en) | 2017-06-20 | 2023-10-24 | Cilag Gmbh International | Systems and methods for controlling motor speed according to user input for a surgical instrument |
US11793516B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2023-10-24 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical staple cartridge comprising longitudinal support beam |
US11793514B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2023-10-24 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising sensor array which may be embedded in cartridge body |
US11793509B2 (en) | 2012-03-28 | 2023-10-24 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge including an implantable layer |
US11801047B2 (en) | 2008-02-14 | 2023-10-31 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling system comprising a control circuit configured to selectively monitor tissue impedance and adjust control of a motor |
US11801051B2 (en) | 2006-01-31 | 2023-10-31 | Cilag Gmbh International | Accessing data stored in a memory of a surgical instrument |
US11806013B2 (en) | 2012-06-28 | 2023-11-07 | Cilag Gmbh International | Firing system arrangements for surgical instruments |
US11806011B2 (en) | 2021-03-22 | 2023-11-07 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling instrument comprising tissue compression systems |
US11811253B2 (en) | 2016-04-18 | 2023-11-07 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical robotic system with fault state detection configurations based on motor current draw |
US11812954B2 (en) | 2008-09-23 | 2023-11-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Robotically-controlled motorized surgical instrument with an end effector |
US11812958B2 (en) | 2014-12-18 | 2023-11-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Locking arrangements for detachable shaft assemblies with articulatable surgical end effectors |
US11812964B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2023-11-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising a power management circuit |
US11826132B2 (en) | 2015-03-06 | 2023-11-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Time dependent evaluation of sensor data to determine stability, creep, and viscoelastic elements of measures |
US11826042B2 (en) | 2021-03-22 | 2023-11-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument comprising a firing drive including a selectable leverage mechanism |
US11826012B2 (en) | 2021-03-22 | 2023-11-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling instrument comprising a pulsed motor-driven firing rack |
US11832816B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2023-12-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling assembly comprising nonplanar staples and planar staples |
US11839352B2 (en) | 2007-01-11 | 2023-12-12 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling device with an end effector |
US11839375B2 (en) | 2005-08-31 | 2023-12-12 | Cilag Gmbh International | Fastener cartridge assembly comprising an anvil and different staple heights |
US11844518B2 (en) | 2020-10-29 | 2023-12-19 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method for operating a surgical instrument |
US11844520B2 (en) | 2019-12-19 | 2023-12-19 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising driver retention members |
US11849945B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2023-12-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Rotary-driven surgical stapling assembly comprising eccentrically driven firing member |
US11850310B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2023-12-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge including an adjunct |
US11849952B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2023-12-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising staples positioned within a compressible portion thereof |
US11849946B2 (en) | 2015-09-23 | 2023-12-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapler having downstream current-based motor control |
US11849943B2 (en) | 2020-12-02 | 2023-12-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument with cartridge release mechanisms |
US11849944B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2023-12-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Drivers for fastener cartridge assemblies having rotary drive screws |
US11849941B2 (en) | 2007-06-29 | 2023-12-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge having staple cavities extending at a transverse angle relative to a longitudinal cartridge axis |
US11857187B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2024-01-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | Tissue thickness compensator comprising controlled release and expansion |
US11857183B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2024-01-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling assembly components having metal substrates and plastic bodies |
US11871923B2 (en) | 2008-09-23 | 2024-01-16 | Cilag Gmbh International | Motorized surgical instrument |
US11871925B2 (en) | 2020-07-28 | 2024-01-16 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instruments with dual spherical articulation joint arrangements |
US11871939B2 (en) | 2017-06-20 | 2024-01-16 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method for closed loop control of motor velocity of a surgical stapling and cutting instrument |
US11877748B2 (en) | 2006-10-03 | 2024-01-23 | Cilag Gmbh International | Robotically-driven surgical instrument with E-beam driver |
US11883025B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2024-01-30 | Cilag Gmbh International | Tissue thickness compensator comprising a plurality of layers |
US11883026B2 (en) | 2014-04-16 | 2024-01-30 | Cilag Gmbh International | Fastener cartridge assemblies and staple retainer cover arrangements |
USD1013170S1 (en) | 2020-10-29 | 2024-01-30 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument assembly |
US11883020B2 (en) | 2006-01-31 | 2024-01-30 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument having a feedback system |
US11890010B2 (en) | 2020-12-02 | 2024-02-06 | Cllag GmbH International | Dual-sided reinforced reload for surgical instruments |
US11890005B2 (en) | 2017-06-29 | 2024-02-06 | Cilag Gmbh International | Methods for closed loop velocity control for robotic surgical instrument |
US11890015B2 (en) | 2015-09-30 | 2024-02-06 | Cilag Gmbh International | Compressible adjunct with crossing spacer fibers |
US11890012B2 (en) | 2004-07-28 | 2024-02-06 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising cartridge body and attached support |
US11896222B2 (en) | 2017-12-15 | 2024-02-13 | Cilag Gmbh International | Methods of operating surgical end effectors |
US11896217B2 (en) | 2020-10-29 | 2024-02-13 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument comprising an articulation lock |
US11896218B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2024-02-13 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method of using a powered stapling device |
US11896219B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2024-02-13 | Cilag Gmbh International | Mating features between drivers and underside of a cartridge deck |
US11903581B2 (en) | 2019-04-30 | 2024-02-20 | Cilag Gmbh International | Methods for stapling tissue using a surgical instrument |
US11903582B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2024-02-20 | Cilag Gmbh International | Leveraging surfaces for cartridge installation |
US11911032B2 (en) | 2019-12-19 | 2024-02-27 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising a seating cam |
US11918215B2 (en) | 2016-12-21 | 2024-03-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge with array of staple pockets |
US11918212B2 (en) | 2015-03-31 | 2024-03-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument with selectively disengageable drive systems |
US11918220B2 (en) | 2012-03-28 | 2024-03-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Tissue thickness compensator comprising tissue ingrowth features |
US11918222B2 (en) | 2014-04-16 | 2024-03-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling assembly having firing member viewing windows |
US11918210B2 (en) | 2014-10-16 | 2024-03-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising a cartridge body including a plurality of wells |
US11925349B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2024-03-12 | Cilag Gmbh International | Adjustment to transfer parameters to improve available power |
US11931034B2 (en) | 2016-12-21 | 2024-03-19 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling instruments with smart staple cartridges |
USD1018577S1 (en) | 2017-06-28 | 2024-03-19 | Cilag Gmbh International | Display screen or portion thereof with a graphical user interface for a surgical instrument |
US11931028B2 (en) | 2016-04-15 | 2024-03-19 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument with multiple program responses during a firing motion |
US11931025B2 (en) | 2020-10-29 | 2024-03-19 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument comprising a releasable closure drive lock |
US11931038B2 (en) | 2014-10-29 | 2024-03-19 | Cilag Gmbh International | Cartridge assemblies for surgical staplers |
US11937816B2 (en) | 2021-10-28 | 2024-03-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Electrical lead arrangements for surgical instruments |
US11944300B2 (en) | 2017-08-03 | 2024-04-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method for operating a surgical system bailout |
US11944296B2 (en) | 2020-12-02 | 2024-04-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | Powered surgical instruments with external connectors |
US11944336B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2024-04-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | Joint arrangements for multi-planar alignment and support of operational drive shafts in articulatable surgical instruments |
US11944338B2 (en) | 2015-03-06 | 2024-04-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | Multiple level thresholds to modify operation of powered surgical instruments |
US11950779B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2024-04-09 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method of powering and communicating with a staple cartridge |
US11950777B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2024-04-09 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising an information access control system |
US11957339B2 (en) | 2018-08-20 | 2024-04-16 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method for fabricating surgical stapler anvils |
US11957345B2 (en) | 2013-03-01 | 2024-04-16 | Cilag Gmbh International | Articulatable surgical instruments with conductive pathways for signal communication |
US11963680B2 (en) | 2017-10-31 | 2024-04-23 | Cilag Gmbh International | Cartridge body design with force reduction based on firing completion |
US11974746B2 (en) | 2014-04-16 | 2024-05-07 | Cilag Gmbh International | Anvil for use with a surgical stapling assembly |
US11974747B2 (en) | 2011-05-27 | 2024-05-07 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling instruments with rotatable staple deployment arrangements |
US11974742B2 (en) | 2017-08-03 | 2024-05-07 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical system comprising an articulation bailout |
US11980362B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2024-05-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument system comprising a power transfer coil |
US11980366B2 (en) | 2006-10-03 | 2024-05-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument |
US11980363B2 (en) | 2021-10-18 | 2024-05-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Row-to-row staple array variations |
US11986183B2 (en) | 2008-02-14 | 2024-05-21 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical cutting and fastening instrument comprising a plurality of sensors to measure an electrical parameter |
US11992214B2 (en) | 2013-03-14 | 2024-05-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Control systems for surgical instruments |
US11992213B2 (en) | 2016-12-21 | 2024-05-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling instruments with replaceable staple cartridges |
US11998206B2 (en) | 2021-01-29 | 2024-06-04 | Cilag Gmbh International | Detachable motor powered surgical instrument |
Families Citing this family (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US10028761B2 (en) * | 2014-03-26 | 2018-07-24 | Ethicon Llc | Feedback algorithms for manual bailout systems for surgical instruments |
US11058477B2 (en) * | 2017-06-28 | 2021-07-13 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical cutting and fastening instruments with dual power sources |
US11298128B2 (en) * | 2017-06-28 | 2022-04-12 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical system couplable with staple cartridge and radio frequency cartridge, and method of using same |
US11129666B2 (en) * | 2017-06-28 | 2021-09-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Shaft module circuitry arrangements |
US20210393318A1 (en) * | 2018-10-24 | 2021-12-23 | Conmed Corporation | Continuous rotation of a surgical instrument |
US20200405306A1 (en) * | 2019-06-28 | 2020-12-31 | Ethicon Llc | Surgical instrument including a firing system bailout |
Citations (41)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5036576A (en) * | 1988-06-06 | 1991-08-06 | Cherry Division Of Textron, Inc. | Method of installing a fastener |
US5230457A (en) * | 1987-11-16 | 1993-07-27 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Sheet stapler |
CA2762156A1 (en) * | 1999-10-01 | 2001-04-12 | Sd3, Llc | Safety systems for power equipment |
US20020026126A1 (en) * | 2000-08-02 | 2002-02-28 | Burdorff Mark A. | Calibration method for an automated surgical biopsy device |
US20030050628A1 (en) * | 1999-06-02 | 2003-03-13 | Whitman Michael P. | Electro-mechanical surgical device |
US20040111081A1 (en) * | 1999-06-02 | 2004-06-10 | Whitman Michael P. | Electro-mechanical surgical device |
US20050044705A1 (en) * | 2002-08-01 | 2005-03-03 | Watkins Gregory D. | Core element fastening and assembly method |
US20050195517A1 (en) * | 2004-03-05 | 2005-09-08 | Spectra Logic Corporation | Data Cartridge Library |
US20060278680A1 (en) * | 2005-06-03 | 2006-12-14 | Viola Frank J | Surgical stapler with timer and feedback display |
US20070270790A1 (en) * | 2006-05-19 | 2007-11-22 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Electrical surgical instrument with optimized power supply and drive |
US20090057369A1 (en) * | 2005-07-26 | 2009-03-05 | Smith Kevin W | Electrically Self-Powered Surgical Instrument With Manual Release |
CA2935353A1 (en) * | 2007-10-05 | 2009-04-05 | Covidien Lp | Powered surgical stapling device |
US20090179062A1 (en) * | 2008-01-15 | 2009-07-16 | Hitachi Koki Co., Ltd. | Fastener driving tool |
US20100089970A1 (en) * | 2008-10-10 | 2010-04-15 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Powered surgical cutting and stapling apparatus with manually retractable firing system |
US20100237126A1 (en) * | 2007-10-04 | 2010-09-23 | Makita Corporation | Drive tool |
US20100264194A1 (en) * | 2007-06-22 | 2010-10-21 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Surgical stapling instrument with an articulatable end effector |
US20100270355A1 (en) * | 2009-04-27 | 2010-10-28 | Whitman Michael P | Device and method for controlling compression of tissue |
US20100327041A1 (en) * | 2003-06-20 | 2010-12-30 | Tyco Healthcare Gropu Lp | Surgical stapling device |
US20110139851A1 (en) * | 2007-10-05 | 2011-06-16 | Tyco Healthcare Group Lp | Method and apparatus for determining parameters of linear motion in a surgical instrument |
US20110155785A1 (en) * | 2009-12-24 | 2011-06-30 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Motor-driven surgical cutting instrument with electric actuator directional control assembly |
US20110204119A1 (en) * | 2007-10-05 | 2011-08-25 | Tyco Healthcare Group Lp | Method and apparatus for determining parameters of linear motion in a surgical instrument |
US20120055972A1 (en) * | 2008-07-17 | 2012-03-08 | Tyco Healthcare Group Lp | Surgical retraction mechanism |
US20120080491A1 (en) * | 2010-09-30 | 2012-04-05 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Staple cartridge comprising compressible distortion resistant components |
US20120080477A1 (en) * | 2010-10-01 | 2012-04-05 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Surgical instrument having a power control circuit |
US20120138658A1 (en) * | 2010-12-07 | 2012-06-07 | Immersion Corporation | Surgical stapler having haptic feedback |
US20120199632A1 (en) * | 2006-03-23 | 2012-08-09 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Robotically-controlled surgical instrument with selectively articulatable end effector |
CA2765623A1 (en) * | 2011-02-23 | 2012-08-23 | Tyco Healthcare Group Lp | Controlled tissue compression systems and methods |
US20120223121A1 (en) * | 2001-10-20 | 2012-09-06 | Viola Frank J | Surgical stapler with timer and feedback display |
US20120241497A1 (en) * | 2010-09-30 | 2012-09-27 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Tissue thickness compensator comprising a reservoir |
US20140012289A1 (en) * | 2012-07-09 | 2014-01-09 | Covidien Lp | Apparatus for endoscopic procedures |
US8657173B2 (en) * | 2004-03-31 | 2014-02-25 | Japan Power Fastening Co,. Ltd. | Portable type fastener driving tool |
US20140166727A1 (en) * | 2012-12-17 | 2014-06-19 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Circular stapler with selectable motorized and manual control |
US20140200612A1 (en) * | 2013-01-14 | 2014-07-17 | Intuitive Surgical Operations, Inc. | Clamping instrument |
US20140246476A1 (en) * | 2013-03-01 | 2014-09-04 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Surgical instrument soft stop |
CA2844035A1 (en) * | 2013-03-07 | 2014-09-07 | Covidien Lp | Powered surgical stapling device |
US20150282825A1 (en) * | 2014-04-08 | 2015-10-08 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery | Methods and devices for controlling motorized surgical devices |
US20150305729A1 (en) * | 2014-04-28 | 2015-10-29 | Covidien Lp | Systems and methods for determining an end of life state for surgical devices |
US20150320203A1 (en) * | 2014-05-09 | 2015-11-12 | Apple Inc. | Table with electrical ports |
US20160256184A1 (en) * | 2015-03-06 | 2016-09-08 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Llc | Powered surgical instrument |
US20190125384A1 (en) * | 2017-10-30 | 2019-05-02 | Ethicon Llc | Surgical instrument with rotary drive selectively actuating multiple end effector functions |
US20210196350A1 (en) * | 2019-12-30 | 2021-07-01 | Ethicon Llc | Electrosurgical instrument with variable control mechanisms |
Family Cites Families (12)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
DE69228410T2 (en) * | 1991-08-21 | 1999-07-08 | Smith & Nephew Inc | Liquid treatment system |
US6017354A (en) * | 1996-08-15 | 2000-01-25 | Stryker Corporation | Integrated system for powered surgical tools |
US6726651B1 (en) * | 1999-08-04 | 2004-04-27 | Cardeon Corporation | Method and apparatus for differentially perfusing a patient during cardiopulmonary bypass |
US11291443B2 (en) * | 2005-06-03 | 2022-04-05 | Covidien Lp | Surgical stapler with timer and feedback display |
DE602006015661D1 (en) * | 2005-06-28 | 2010-09-02 | Stryker Corp | DRIVEN SURGICAL TOOL WITH CONTROL MODULE AND A SENSOR FOR REMOTELY MONITORING THE POWER GENERATOR TOOL FOR THE TOOL |
WO2011052391A1 (en) * | 2009-10-28 | 2011-05-05 | オリンパスメディカルシステムズ株式会社 | Medical device |
US10542978B2 (en) * | 2011-05-27 | 2020-01-28 | Covidien Lp | Method of internally potting or sealing a handheld medical device |
EP3213697B1 (en) * | 2011-09-02 | 2020-03-11 | Stryker Corporation | Surgical instrument including a housing, a cutting accessory that extends from the housing and actuators that establish the position of the cutting accessory relative to the housing |
US20130253552A1 (en) * | 2012-03-20 | 2013-09-26 | Cardiovascular Systems, Inc. | Controller for an atherectomy device |
US9804618B2 (en) * | 2014-03-26 | 2017-10-31 | Ethicon Llc | Systems and methods for controlling a segmented circuit |
US20200078117A1 (en) * | 2018-09-07 | 2020-03-12 | Ethicon Llc | Energy module for drivig multiple energy modalities through a port |
US11219495B2 (en) * | 2019-05-31 | 2022-01-11 | Ethicon Llc | Disabling surgical tools due to manual bailout |
-
2015
- 2015-03-11 CN CN201580027529.5A patent/CN106456167B/en active Active
- 2015-03-11 BR BR112016021974-0A patent/BR112016021974B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2015-03-11 JP JP2016558592A patent/JP6518686B2/en active Active
-
2022
- 2022-03-31 US US17/710,439 patent/US20220218382A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2022-03-31 US US17/710,288 patent/US20220218381A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (43)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5230457A (en) * | 1987-11-16 | 1993-07-27 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Sheet stapler |
US5036576A (en) * | 1988-06-06 | 1991-08-06 | Cherry Division Of Textron, Inc. | Method of installing a fastener |
US20030050628A1 (en) * | 1999-06-02 | 2003-03-13 | Whitman Michael P. | Electro-mechanical surgical device |
US20040111081A1 (en) * | 1999-06-02 | 2004-06-10 | Whitman Michael P. | Electro-mechanical surgical device |
CA2762156A1 (en) * | 1999-10-01 | 2001-04-12 | Sd3, Llc | Safety systems for power equipment |
US20020026126A1 (en) * | 2000-08-02 | 2002-02-28 | Burdorff Mark A. | Calibration method for an automated surgical biopsy device |
US20120223121A1 (en) * | 2001-10-20 | 2012-09-06 | Viola Frank J | Surgical stapler with timer and feedback display |
US20050044705A1 (en) * | 2002-08-01 | 2005-03-03 | Watkins Gregory D. | Core element fastening and assembly method |
US20100327041A1 (en) * | 2003-06-20 | 2010-12-30 | Tyco Healthcare Gropu Lp | Surgical stapling device |
US20050195517A1 (en) * | 2004-03-05 | 2005-09-08 | Spectra Logic Corporation | Data Cartridge Library |
US8657173B2 (en) * | 2004-03-31 | 2014-02-25 | Japan Power Fastening Co,. Ltd. | Portable type fastener driving tool |
US20060278680A1 (en) * | 2005-06-03 | 2006-12-14 | Viola Frank J | Surgical stapler with timer and feedback display |
US20090057369A1 (en) * | 2005-07-26 | 2009-03-05 | Smith Kevin W | Electrically Self-Powered Surgical Instrument With Manual Release |
US20110210156A1 (en) * | 2005-07-26 | 2011-09-01 | Smith Kevin W | Electrically Self-Powered Surgical Instrument With Manual Release |
US20120199632A1 (en) * | 2006-03-23 | 2012-08-09 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Robotically-controlled surgical instrument with selectively articulatable end effector |
US20070270790A1 (en) * | 2006-05-19 | 2007-11-22 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Electrical surgical instrument with optimized power supply and drive |
US20130168435A1 (en) * | 2007-06-22 | 2013-07-04 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Surgical stapling instrument with an articulatable end effector |
US20100264194A1 (en) * | 2007-06-22 | 2010-10-21 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Surgical stapling instrument with an articulatable end effector |
US20100237126A1 (en) * | 2007-10-04 | 2010-09-23 | Makita Corporation | Drive tool |
US20110139851A1 (en) * | 2007-10-05 | 2011-06-16 | Tyco Healthcare Group Lp | Method and apparatus for determining parameters of linear motion in a surgical instrument |
US20110204119A1 (en) * | 2007-10-05 | 2011-08-25 | Tyco Healthcare Group Lp | Method and apparatus for determining parameters of linear motion in a surgical instrument |
CA2935353A1 (en) * | 2007-10-05 | 2009-04-05 | Covidien Lp | Powered surgical stapling device |
US20090179062A1 (en) * | 2008-01-15 | 2009-07-16 | Hitachi Koki Co., Ltd. | Fastener driving tool |
US20120055972A1 (en) * | 2008-07-17 | 2012-03-08 | Tyco Healthcare Group Lp | Surgical retraction mechanism |
US20100089970A1 (en) * | 2008-10-10 | 2010-04-15 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Powered surgical cutting and stapling apparatus with manually retractable firing system |
US20100270355A1 (en) * | 2009-04-27 | 2010-10-28 | Whitman Michael P | Device and method for controlling compression of tissue |
US20110155785A1 (en) * | 2009-12-24 | 2011-06-30 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Motor-driven surgical cutting instrument with electric actuator directional control assembly |
US20120241497A1 (en) * | 2010-09-30 | 2012-09-27 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Tissue thickness compensator comprising a reservoir |
US20120080491A1 (en) * | 2010-09-30 | 2012-04-05 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Staple cartridge comprising compressible distortion resistant components |
US20120080477A1 (en) * | 2010-10-01 | 2012-04-05 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Surgical instrument having a power control circuit |
US20120138658A1 (en) * | 2010-12-07 | 2012-06-07 | Immersion Corporation | Surgical stapler having haptic feedback |
CA2765623A1 (en) * | 2011-02-23 | 2012-08-23 | Tyco Healthcare Group Lp | Controlled tissue compression systems and methods |
US20140012289A1 (en) * | 2012-07-09 | 2014-01-09 | Covidien Lp | Apparatus for endoscopic procedures |
US20140166727A1 (en) * | 2012-12-17 | 2014-06-19 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Circular stapler with selectable motorized and manual control |
US20140200612A1 (en) * | 2013-01-14 | 2014-07-17 | Intuitive Surgical Operations, Inc. | Clamping instrument |
US20140246476A1 (en) * | 2013-03-01 | 2014-09-04 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. | Surgical instrument soft stop |
CA2844035A1 (en) * | 2013-03-07 | 2014-09-07 | Covidien Lp | Powered surgical stapling device |
US20150282825A1 (en) * | 2014-04-08 | 2015-10-08 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery | Methods and devices for controlling motorized surgical devices |
US20150305729A1 (en) * | 2014-04-28 | 2015-10-29 | Covidien Lp | Systems and methods for determining an end of life state for surgical devices |
US20150320203A1 (en) * | 2014-05-09 | 2015-11-12 | Apple Inc. | Table with electrical ports |
US20160256184A1 (en) * | 2015-03-06 | 2016-09-08 | Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Llc | Powered surgical instrument |
US20190125384A1 (en) * | 2017-10-30 | 2019-05-02 | Ethicon Llc | Surgical instrument with rotary drive selectively actuating multiple end effector functions |
US20210196350A1 (en) * | 2019-12-30 | 2021-07-01 | Ethicon Llc | Electrosurgical instrument with variable control mechanisms |
Cited By (214)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US11963679B2 (en) | 2004-07-28 | 2024-04-23 | Cilag Gmbh International | Articulating surgical stapling instrument incorporating a two-piece E-beam firing mechanism |
US11896225B2 (en) | 2004-07-28 | 2024-02-13 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising a pan |
US11890012B2 (en) | 2004-07-28 | 2024-02-06 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising cartridge body and attached support |
US11882987B2 (en) | 2004-07-28 | 2024-01-30 | Cilag Gmbh International | Articulating surgical stapling instrument incorporating a two-piece E-beam firing mechanism |
US11684365B2 (en) | 2004-07-28 | 2023-06-27 | Cilag Gmbh International | Replaceable staple cartridges for surgical instruments |
US11812960B2 (en) | 2004-07-28 | 2023-11-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method of segmenting the operation of a surgical stapling instrument |
US11730474B2 (en) | 2005-08-31 | 2023-08-22 | Cilag Gmbh International | Fastener cartridge assembly comprising a movable cartridge and a staple driver arrangement |
US11839375B2 (en) | 2005-08-31 | 2023-12-12 | Cilag Gmbh International | Fastener cartridge assembly comprising an anvil and different staple heights |
US11771425B2 (en) | 2005-08-31 | 2023-10-03 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling assembly for forming staples to different formed heights |
US11576673B2 (en) | 2005-08-31 | 2023-02-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling assembly for forming staples to different heights |
US11793512B2 (en) | 2005-08-31 | 2023-10-24 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridges for forming staples having differing formed staple heights |
US11793511B2 (en) | 2005-11-09 | 2023-10-24 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instruments |
US11944299B2 (en) | 2006-01-31 | 2024-04-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument having force feedback capabilities |
US11612393B2 (en) | 2006-01-31 | 2023-03-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Robotically-controlled end effector |
US11801051B2 (en) | 2006-01-31 | 2023-10-31 | Cilag Gmbh International | Accessing data stored in a memory of a surgical instrument |
US11883020B2 (en) | 2006-01-31 | 2024-01-30 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument having a feedback system |
US11793518B2 (en) | 2006-01-31 | 2023-10-24 | Cilag Gmbh International | Powered surgical instruments with firing system lockout arrangements |
US11890029B2 (en) | 2006-01-31 | 2024-02-06 | Cilag Gmbh International | Motor-driven surgical cutting and fastening instrument |
US11660110B2 (en) | 2006-01-31 | 2023-05-30 | Cilag Gmbh International | Motor-driven surgical cutting and fastening instrument with tactile position feedback |
US11890008B2 (en) | 2006-01-31 | 2024-02-06 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument with firing lockout |
US11648008B2 (en) | 2006-01-31 | 2023-05-16 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument having force feedback capabilities |
US11648024B2 (en) | 2006-01-31 | 2023-05-16 | Cilag Gmbh International | Motor-driven surgical cutting and fastening instrument with position feedback |
US11622785B2 (en) | 2006-09-29 | 2023-04-11 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical staples having attached drivers and stapling instruments for deploying the same |
US11877748B2 (en) | 2006-10-03 | 2024-01-23 | Cilag Gmbh International | Robotically-driven surgical instrument with E-beam driver |
US11980366B2 (en) | 2006-10-03 | 2024-05-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument |
US11666332B2 (en) | 2007-01-10 | 2023-06-06 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument comprising a control circuit configured to adjust the operation of a motor |
US11931032B2 (en) | 2007-01-10 | 2024-03-19 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument with wireless communication between a control unit of a robotic system and remote sensor |
US11812961B2 (en) | 2007-01-10 | 2023-11-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument including a motor control system |
US11844521B2 (en) | 2007-01-10 | 2023-12-19 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument for use with a robotic system |
US11849947B2 (en) | 2007-01-10 | 2023-12-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical system including a control circuit and a passively-powered transponder |
US11771426B2 (en) | 2007-01-10 | 2023-10-03 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument with wireless communication |
US11918211B2 (en) | 2007-01-10 | 2024-03-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling instrument for use with a robotic system |
US11937814B2 (en) | 2007-01-10 | 2024-03-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument for use with a robotic system |
US11839352B2 (en) | 2007-01-11 | 2023-12-12 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling device with an end effector |
US11857181B2 (en) | 2007-06-04 | 2024-01-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | Robotically-controlled shaft based rotary drive systems for surgical instruments |
US11564682B2 (en) | 2007-06-04 | 2023-01-31 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapler device |
US11911028B2 (en) | 2007-06-04 | 2024-02-27 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instruments for use with a robotic surgical system |
US11672531B2 (en) | 2007-06-04 | 2023-06-13 | Cilag Gmbh International | Rotary drive systems for surgical instruments |
US11992208B2 (en) | 2007-06-04 | 2024-05-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Rotary drive systems for surgical instruments |
US11648006B2 (en) | 2007-06-04 | 2023-05-16 | Cilag Gmbh International | Robotically-controlled shaft based rotary drive systems for surgical instruments |
US11559302B2 (en) | 2007-06-04 | 2023-01-24 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument including a firing member movable at different speeds |
US11849941B2 (en) | 2007-06-29 | 2023-12-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge having staple cavities extending at a transverse angle relative to a longitudinal cartridge axis |
US11801047B2 (en) | 2008-02-14 | 2023-10-31 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling system comprising a control circuit configured to selectively monitor tissue impedance and adjust control of a motor |
US11612395B2 (en) | 2008-02-14 | 2023-03-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical system including a control system having an RFID tag reader |
US11986183B2 (en) | 2008-02-14 | 2024-05-21 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical cutting and fastening instrument comprising a plurality of sensors to measure an electrical parameter |
US11617575B2 (en) | 2008-09-23 | 2023-04-04 | Cilag Gmbh International | Motor-driven surgical cutting instrument |
US11684361B2 (en) | 2008-09-23 | 2023-06-27 | Cilag Gmbh International | Motor-driven surgical cutting instrument |
US11871923B2 (en) | 2008-09-23 | 2024-01-16 | Cilag Gmbh International | Motorized surgical instrument |
US11648005B2 (en) | 2008-09-23 | 2023-05-16 | Cilag Gmbh International | Robotically-controlled motorized surgical instrument with an end effector |
US11812954B2 (en) | 2008-09-23 | 2023-11-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Robotically-controlled motorized surgical instrument with an end effector |
US11617576B2 (en) | 2008-09-23 | 2023-04-04 | Cilag Gmbh International | Motor-driven surgical cutting instrument |
US11583279B2 (en) | 2008-10-10 | 2023-02-21 | Cilag Gmbh International | Powered surgical cutting and stapling apparatus with manually retractable firing system |
US11730477B2 (en) | 2008-10-10 | 2023-08-22 | Cilag Gmbh International | Powered surgical system with manually retractable firing system |
US11925354B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2024-03-12 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising staples positioned within a compressible portion thereof |
US11672536B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2023-06-13 | Cilag Gmbh International | Layer of material for a surgical end effector |
US11911027B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2024-02-27 | Cilag Gmbh International | Adhesive film laminate |
US11944292B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2024-04-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | Anvil layer attached to a proximal end of an end effector |
US11857187B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2024-01-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | Tissue thickness compensator comprising controlled release and expansion |
US11812965B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2023-11-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Layer of material for a surgical end effector |
US11602340B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2023-03-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Adhesive film laminate |
US11737754B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2023-08-29 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapler with floating anvil |
US11957795B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2024-04-16 | Cilag Gmbh International | Tissue thickness compensator configured to redistribute compressive forces |
US11849952B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2023-12-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising staples positioned within a compressible portion thereof |
US11883025B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2024-01-30 | Cilag Gmbh International | Tissue thickness compensator comprising a plurality of layers |
US11684360B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2023-06-27 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising a variable thickness compressible portion |
US11850310B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2023-12-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge including an adjunct |
US11974747B2 (en) | 2011-05-27 | 2024-05-07 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling instruments with rotatable staple deployment arrangements |
US11612394B2 (en) | 2011-05-27 | 2023-03-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Automated end effector component reloading system for use with a robotic system |
US11918208B2 (en) | 2011-05-27 | 2024-03-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Robotically-controlled shaft based rotary drive systems for surgical instruments |
US11793509B2 (en) | 2012-03-28 | 2023-10-24 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge including an implantable layer |
US11918220B2 (en) | 2012-03-28 | 2024-03-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Tissue thickness compensator comprising tissue ingrowth features |
US11707273B2 (en) | 2012-06-15 | 2023-07-25 | Cilag Gmbh International | Articulatable surgical instrument comprising a firing drive |
US11918213B2 (en) | 2012-06-28 | 2024-03-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapler including couplers for attaching a shaft to an end effector |
US11857189B2 (en) | 2012-06-28 | 2024-01-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument including first and second articulation joints |
US11806013B2 (en) | 2012-06-28 | 2023-11-07 | Cilag Gmbh International | Firing system arrangements for surgical instruments |
US11779420B2 (en) | 2012-06-28 | 2023-10-10 | Cilag Gmbh International | Robotic surgical attachments having manually-actuated retraction assemblies |
US11957345B2 (en) | 2013-03-01 | 2024-04-16 | Cilag Gmbh International | Articulatable surgical instruments with conductive pathways for signal communication |
US11992214B2 (en) | 2013-03-14 | 2024-05-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Control systems for surgical instruments |
US11690615B2 (en) | 2013-04-16 | 2023-07-04 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical system including an electric motor and a surgical instrument |
US11638581B2 (en) | 2013-04-16 | 2023-05-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | Powered surgical stapler |
US11633183B2 (en) | 2013-04-16 | 2023-04-25 | Cilag International GmbH | Stapling assembly comprising a retraction drive |
US11622763B2 (en) | 2013-04-16 | 2023-04-11 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling assembly comprising a shiftable drive |
US11701110B2 (en) | 2013-08-23 | 2023-07-18 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument including a drive assembly movable in a non-motorized mode of operation |
US11918209B2 (en) | 2013-08-23 | 2024-03-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Torque optimization for surgical instruments |
US11963678B2 (en) | 2014-04-16 | 2024-04-23 | Cilag Gmbh International | Fastener cartridges including extensions having different configurations |
US11717294B2 (en) | 2014-04-16 | 2023-08-08 | Cilag Gmbh International | End effector arrangements comprising indicators |
US11974746B2 (en) | 2014-04-16 | 2024-05-07 | Cilag Gmbh International | Anvil for use with a surgical stapling assembly |
US11944307B2 (en) | 2014-04-16 | 2024-04-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling system including jaw windows |
US11918222B2 (en) | 2014-04-16 | 2024-03-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling assembly having firing member viewing windows |
US11925353B2 (en) | 2014-04-16 | 2024-03-12 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling instrument comprising internal passage between stapling cartridge and elongate channel |
US11883026B2 (en) | 2014-04-16 | 2024-01-30 | Cilag Gmbh International | Fastener cartridge assemblies and staple retainer cover arrangements |
US11717297B2 (en) | 2014-09-05 | 2023-08-08 | Cilag Gmbh International | Smart cartridge wake up operation and data retention |
US11653918B2 (en) | 2014-09-05 | 2023-05-23 | Cilag Gmbh International | Local display of tissue parameter stabilization |
US11918210B2 (en) | 2014-10-16 | 2024-03-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising a cartridge body including a plurality of wells |
US11931038B2 (en) | 2014-10-29 | 2024-03-19 | Cilag Gmbh International | Cartridge assemblies for surgical staplers |
US11547404B2 (en) | 2014-12-18 | 2023-01-10 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument assembly comprising a flexible articulation system |
US11812958B2 (en) | 2014-12-18 | 2023-11-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Locking arrangements for detachable shaft assemblies with articulatable surgical end effectors |
US11678877B2 (en) | 2014-12-18 | 2023-06-20 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument including a flexible support configured to support a flexible firing member |
US11571207B2 (en) | 2014-12-18 | 2023-02-07 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical system including lateral supports for a flexible drive member |
US11553911B2 (en) | 2014-12-18 | 2023-01-17 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument assembly comprising a flexible articulation system |
US11744588B2 (en) | 2015-02-27 | 2023-09-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling instrument including a removably attachable battery pack |
US11826132B2 (en) | 2015-03-06 | 2023-11-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Time dependent evaluation of sensor data to determine stability, creep, and viscoelastic elements of measures |
US11944338B2 (en) | 2015-03-06 | 2024-04-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | Multiple level thresholds to modify operation of powered surgical instruments |
US11918212B2 (en) | 2015-03-31 | 2024-03-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument with selectively disengageable drive systems |
US11849946B2 (en) | 2015-09-23 | 2023-12-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapler having downstream current-based motor control |
US11944308B2 (en) | 2015-09-30 | 2024-04-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | Compressible adjunct with crossing spacer fibers |
US11553916B2 (en) | 2015-09-30 | 2023-01-17 | Cilag Gmbh International | Compressible adjunct with crossing spacer fibers |
US11903586B2 (en) | 2015-09-30 | 2024-02-20 | Cilag Gmbh International | Compressible adjunct with crossing spacer fibers |
US11890015B2 (en) | 2015-09-30 | 2024-02-06 | Cilag Gmbh International | Compressible adjunct with crossing spacer fibers |
US11712244B2 (en) | 2015-09-30 | 2023-08-01 | Cilag Gmbh International | Implantable layer with spacer fibers |
US11759208B2 (en) | 2015-12-30 | 2023-09-19 | Cilag Gmbh International | Mechanisms for compensating for battery pack failure in powered surgical instruments |
US11730471B2 (en) | 2016-02-09 | 2023-08-22 | Cilag Gmbh International | Articulatable surgical instruments with single articulation link arrangements |
US11779336B2 (en) | 2016-02-12 | 2023-10-10 | Cilag Gmbh International | Mechanisms for compensating for drivetrain failure in powered surgical instruments |
US11642125B2 (en) | 2016-04-15 | 2023-05-09 | Cilag Gmbh International | Robotic surgical system including a user interface and a control circuit |
US11931028B2 (en) | 2016-04-15 | 2024-03-19 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument with multiple program responses during a firing motion |
US11811253B2 (en) | 2016-04-18 | 2023-11-07 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical robotic system with fault state detection configurations based on motor current draw |
US11918215B2 (en) | 2016-12-21 | 2024-03-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge with array of staple pockets |
US11701115B2 (en) | 2016-12-21 | 2023-07-18 | Cilag Gmbh International | Methods of stapling tissue |
US11992213B2 (en) | 2016-12-21 | 2024-05-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling instruments with replaceable staple cartridges |
US11931034B2 (en) | 2016-12-21 | 2024-03-19 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling instruments with smart staple cartridges |
US11672532B2 (en) | 2017-06-20 | 2023-06-13 | Cilag Gmbh International | Techniques for adaptive control of motor velocity of a surgical stapling and cutting instrument |
US11793513B2 (en) | 2017-06-20 | 2023-10-24 | Cilag Gmbh International | Systems and methods for controlling motor speed according to user input for a surgical instrument |
US11871939B2 (en) | 2017-06-20 | 2024-01-16 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method for closed loop control of motor velocity of a surgical stapling and cutting instrument |
US11653914B2 (en) | 2017-06-20 | 2023-05-23 | Cilag Gmbh International | Systems and methods for controlling motor velocity of a surgical stapling and cutting instrument according to articulation angle of end effector |
US11766258B2 (en) | 2017-06-27 | 2023-09-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical anvil arrangements |
US11564686B2 (en) | 2017-06-28 | 2023-01-31 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical shaft assemblies with flexible interfaces |
US11678880B2 (en) | 2017-06-28 | 2023-06-20 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument comprising a shaft including a housing arrangement |
US11642128B2 (en) | 2017-06-28 | 2023-05-09 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method for articulating a surgical instrument |
US11696759B2 (en) | 2017-06-28 | 2023-07-11 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling instruments comprising shortened staple cartridge noses |
USD1018577S1 (en) | 2017-06-28 | 2024-03-19 | Cilag Gmbh International | Display screen or portion thereof with a graphical user interface for a surgical instrument |
US11890005B2 (en) | 2017-06-29 | 2024-02-06 | Cilag Gmbh International | Methods for closed loop velocity control for robotic surgical instrument |
US11974742B2 (en) | 2017-08-03 | 2024-05-07 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical system comprising an articulation bailout |
US11944300B2 (en) | 2017-08-03 | 2024-04-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method for operating a surgical system bailout |
US11963680B2 (en) | 2017-10-31 | 2024-04-23 | Cilag Gmbh International | Cartridge body design with force reduction based on firing completion |
US11896222B2 (en) | 2017-12-15 | 2024-02-13 | Cilag Gmbh International | Methods of operating surgical end effectors |
US11849939B2 (en) | 2017-12-21 | 2023-12-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Continuous use self-propelled stapling instrument |
US11751867B2 (en) | 2017-12-21 | 2023-09-12 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument comprising sequenced systems |
US12004743B2 (en) | 2018-07-05 | 2024-06-11 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising a sloped wall |
US11957339B2 (en) | 2018-08-20 | 2024-04-16 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method for fabricating surgical stapler anvils |
US11696761B2 (en) | 2019-03-25 | 2023-07-11 | Cilag Gmbh International | Firing drive arrangements for surgical systems |
US11998198B2 (en) | 2019-04-15 | 2024-06-04 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling instrument incorporating a two-piece E-beam firing mechanism |
US11903581B2 (en) | 2019-04-30 | 2024-02-20 | Cilag Gmbh International | Methods for stapling tissue using a surgical instrument |
US11660163B2 (en) | 2019-06-28 | 2023-05-30 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical system with RFID tags for updating motor assembly parameters |
US11638587B2 (en) | 2019-06-28 | 2023-05-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | RFID identification systems for surgical instruments |
US11684369B2 (en) | 2019-06-28 | 2023-06-27 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method of using multiple RFID chips with a surgical assembly |
US11627959B2 (en) | 2019-06-28 | 2023-04-18 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instruments including manual and powered system lockouts |
US11684434B2 (en) | 2019-06-28 | 2023-06-27 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical RFID assemblies for instrument operational setting control |
US11771419B2 (en) | 2019-06-28 | 2023-10-03 | Cilag Gmbh International | Packaging for a replaceable component of a surgical stapling system |
US11744593B2 (en) | 2019-06-28 | 2023-09-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method for authenticating the compatibility of a staple cartridge with a surgical instrument |
US12004740B2 (en) | 2019-06-30 | 2024-06-11 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling system having an information decryption protocol |
US11701111B2 (en) | 2019-12-19 | 2023-07-18 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method for operating a surgical stapling instrument |
US11576672B2 (en) | 2019-12-19 | 2023-02-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument comprising a closure system including a closure member and an opening member driven by a drive screw |
US11844520B2 (en) | 2019-12-19 | 2023-12-19 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising driver retention members |
US11911032B2 (en) | 2019-12-19 | 2024-02-27 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising a seating cam |
US11974741B2 (en) | 2020-07-28 | 2024-05-07 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instruments with differential articulation joint arrangements for accommodating flexible actuators |
US11871925B2 (en) | 2020-07-28 | 2024-01-16 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instruments with dual spherical articulation joint arrangements |
US11998194B2 (en) | 2020-09-14 | 2024-06-04 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling assembly comprising an adjunct applicator |
US11617577B2 (en) | 2020-10-29 | 2023-04-04 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument comprising a sensor configured to sense whether an articulation drive of the surgical instrument is actuatable |
US11896217B2 (en) | 2020-10-29 | 2024-02-13 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument comprising an articulation lock |
US11779330B2 (en) | 2020-10-29 | 2023-10-10 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument comprising a jaw alignment system |
USD1013170S1 (en) | 2020-10-29 | 2024-01-30 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument assembly |
US11931025B2 (en) | 2020-10-29 | 2024-03-19 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument comprising a releasable closure drive lock |
US11844518B2 (en) | 2020-10-29 | 2023-12-19 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method for operating a surgical instrument |
US11717289B2 (en) | 2020-10-29 | 2023-08-08 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument comprising an indicator which indicates that an articulation drive is actuatable |
US11744581B2 (en) | 2020-12-02 | 2023-09-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Powered surgical instruments with multi-phase tissue treatment |
US11737751B2 (en) | 2020-12-02 | 2023-08-29 | Cilag Gmbh International | Devices and methods of managing energy dissipated within sterile barriers of surgical instrument housings |
US11944296B2 (en) | 2020-12-02 | 2024-04-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | Powered surgical instruments with external connectors |
US11653920B2 (en) | 2020-12-02 | 2023-05-23 | Cilag Gmbh International | Powered surgical instruments with communication interfaces through sterile barrier |
US11653915B2 (en) | 2020-12-02 | 2023-05-23 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instruments with sled location detection and adjustment features |
US11890010B2 (en) | 2020-12-02 | 2024-02-06 | Cllag GmbH International | Dual-sided reinforced reload for surgical instruments |
US11849943B2 (en) | 2020-12-02 | 2023-12-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument with cartridge release mechanisms |
US11678882B2 (en) | 2020-12-02 | 2023-06-20 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instruments with interactive features to remedy incidental sled movements |
US11627960B2 (en) | 2020-12-02 | 2023-04-18 | Cilag Gmbh International | Powered surgical instruments with smart reload with separately attachable exteriorly mounted wiring connections |
US11998206B2 (en) | 2021-01-29 | 2024-06-04 | Cilag Gmbh International | Detachable motor powered surgical instrument |
US11696757B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2023-07-11 | Cilag Gmbh International | Monitoring of internal systems to detect and track cartridge motion status |
US11950779B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2024-04-09 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method of powering and communicating with a staple cartridge |
US11751869B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2023-09-12 | Cilag Gmbh International | Monitoring of multiple sensors over time to detect moving characteristics of tissue |
US11730473B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2023-08-22 | Cilag Gmbh International | Monitoring of manufacturing life-cycle |
US11980362B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2024-05-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument system comprising a power transfer coil |
US11749877B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2023-09-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling instrument comprising a signal antenna |
US11812964B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2023-11-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising a power management circuit |
US11701113B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2023-07-18 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling instrument comprising a separate power antenna and a data transfer antenna |
US11925349B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2024-03-12 | Cilag Gmbh International | Adjustment to transfer parameters to improve available power |
US11793514B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2023-10-24 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising sensor array which may be embedded in cartridge body |
US11723657B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2023-08-15 | Cilag Gmbh International | Adjustable communication based on available bandwidth and power capacity |
US11950777B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2024-04-09 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising an information access control system |
US11744583B2 (en) | 2021-02-26 | 2023-09-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Distal communication array to tune frequency of RF systems |
US11826042B2 (en) | 2021-03-22 | 2023-11-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument comprising a firing drive including a selectable leverage mechanism |
US11806011B2 (en) | 2021-03-22 | 2023-11-07 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling instrument comprising tissue compression systems |
US11723658B2 (en) | 2021-03-22 | 2023-08-15 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising a firing lockout |
US11717291B2 (en) | 2021-03-22 | 2023-08-08 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising staples configured to apply different tissue compression |
US11759202B2 (en) | 2021-03-22 | 2023-09-19 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising an implantable layer |
US11737749B2 (en) | 2021-03-22 | 2023-08-29 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling instrument comprising a retraction system |
US11826012B2 (en) | 2021-03-22 | 2023-11-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling instrument comprising a pulsed motor-driven firing rack |
US11857183B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2024-01-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling assembly components having metal substrates and plastic bodies |
US11793516B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2023-10-24 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical staple cartridge comprising longitudinal support beam |
US11896218B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2024-02-13 | Cilag Gmbh International | Method of using a powered stapling device |
US11832816B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2023-12-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling assembly comprising nonplanar staples and planar staples |
US11786239B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2023-10-17 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical instrument articulation joint arrangements comprising multiple moving linkage features |
US11849945B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2023-12-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Rotary-driven surgical stapling assembly comprising eccentrically driven firing member |
US11849944B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2023-12-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Drivers for fastener cartridge assemblies having rotary drive screws |
US11786243B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2023-10-17 | Cilag Gmbh International | Firing members having flexible portions for adapting to a load during a surgical firing stroke |
US11896219B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2024-02-13 | Cilag Gmbh International | Mating features between drivers and underside of a cartridge deck |
US11903582B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2024-02-20 | Cilag Gmbh International | Leveraging surfaces for cartridge installation |
US11744603B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2023-09-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Multi-axis pivot joints for surgical instruments and methods for manufacturing same |
US11944336B2 (en) | 2021-03-24 | 2024-04-02 | Cilag Gmbh International | Joint arrangements for multi-planar alignment and support of operational drive shafts in articulatable surgical instruments |
US11998200B2 (en) | 2021-05-04 | 2024-06-04 | Cilag Gmbh International | Surgical stapling instrument with an articulatable end effector |
US11918217B2 (en) | 2021-05-28 | 2024-03-05 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling instrument comprising a staple cartridge insertion stop |
US11723662B2 (en) | 2021-05-28 | 2023-08-15 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling instrument comprising an articulation control display |
US11826047B2 (en) | 2021-05-28 | 2023-11-28 | Cilag Gmbh International | Stapling instrument comprising jaw mounts |
US11980363B2 (en) | 2021-10-18 | 2024-05-14 | Cilag Gmbh International | Row-to-row staple array variations |
US11937816B2 (en) | 2021-10-28 | 2024-03-26 | Cilag Gmbh International | Electrical lead arrangements for surgical instruments |
US12004741B2 (en) | 2021-11-22 | 2024-06-11 | Cilag Gmbh International | Staple cartridge comprising a tissue thickness compensator |
US11998201B2 (en) | 2022-04-25 | 2024-06-04 | Cilag CmbH International | Stapling instrument comprising a firing lockout |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JP6518686B2 (en) | 2019-05-22 |
JP2017513560A (en) | 2017-06-01 |
BR112016021974A2 (en) | 2017-08-15 |
US20220218382A1 (en) | 2022-07-14 |
BR112016021974B1 (en) | 2022-07-12 |
CN106456167A (en) | 2017-02-22 |
CN106456167B (en) | 2019-05-14 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20220218381A1 (en) | Feedback algorithms for manual bailout systems for surgical instruments | |
US20200093506A1 (en) | Feedback algorithms for manual bailout systems for surgical instruments | |
JP6573905B2 (en) | Modular power surgical instrument with separable shaft assembly |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: CILAG GMBH INTERNATIONAL, SWITZERLAND Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:ETHICON LLC;REEL/FRAME:060386/0441 Effective date: 20210405 Owner name: ETHICON LLC, PUERTO RICO Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:LEIMBACH, RICHARD L.;ADAMS, SHANE R.;OVERMYER, MARK D.;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20190130 TO 20190519;REEL/FRAME:060206/0222 |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: FINAL REJECTION MAILED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: FINAL REJECTION MAILED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: FINAL REJECTION MAILED |